LeSOO WC73 YALE UNIVERSITY LIBRARY .tect "by TI Jlocxai. "i Ivy J '?:X-:-'r;in. «** '^ £^-z^?^?^^/ FOBLISHED BY J. SNOW, PATEIUTOS'.nSB. EOW A NARRATIVE OF MISSIONAKY ENTERPRISES SOUTH SEA ISLANDS; REMARKS UPON THE NATURAL HISTORY OF THE ISLANDS, ORIGIN, LANGUAGES, TRADITIONS AND USAGES OF THE INHABITANTS. BY THE REV. JOHN WILLIAMS, OF THE LONDON MISSIONARY SOCIETY.- TWENTY-FOURTH THOUSAND. m^^^&^W^m' ys*^X-- 2 . " And the idols he shall utterly abolish.''— Isaiah ii. 18. (See page 30.) ILLUSTRATED WITH A PORTRAIT OF THE AUTHOR AND ENGRAVINGS ON WOOD. LONDON: PUBLISHED BY JOHN SNOW, 35, PATERNOSTER ROW. ,1840. LONDON Printed by W,ll,am Clowes and Sows, Stamford Street. hytSoo TO THE KING. May it please your Majesty, It is with feelings of the highest satisfaction that I avail myself of the permission graciously afforded me to dedicate this work to your Majesty. Your Majesty's illustrious Family has especial claims upon the gratitude of the friends of Missions for the fostering countenance it has uniformly extended to their operations. The Society with which I have the honour to be connected enjoyed from its commencement, in the year 1795, the gracious approbation of your Majesty's Royal Father ; and the Directors were allowed to dedicate to him the first Narrative of their labours among the inhabitants of the South Sea Islands. Your Majesty's Royal Brother, when on the throne of these realms, graciously signified His attach ment to the objects of the Society, by an act of princely munificence, and by per mitting the Journal of their Deputation to he published under his auspices. Since the accession of your Majesty to the throne, the readiness evinced by your Government to aid the benevolent design of Missions to the heathen, induces the assurance that your Majesty cherishes sentiments in perfect unison with those ex pressed by your august Predecessors. It is, therefore, with grateful confidence that I accept the permission, so graciously afforded, to inscribe this Work to your Majesty. I trust it will be found that the facts it records are not unworthy of the attention, as I am persuaded, the object it seeks to promote is not unworthy of the patronage, of the enlightened Sovereign of the greatest nation upon earth. I embrace this public occasion to assure your Majesty, on behalf of my brethren as well as myself, that, although removed to the antipodes, the Missionaries in the Islands ofthe Pacific Ocean cherish a loyal affection for your Person and Government, and feel as lively an interest in the welfare of their native land as any of your Majesty's subjects ; and that, in prosecuting the one great object to which their lives are con secrated, they will keep in view whatever may promote the Commerce and the Science, as well as the Religious glory, of their beloved Country. Offering the dutiful homage of my devoted coadjutors and myself to your Majesty, I have the honour to subscribe myself, Your Majesty's Obliged servant, and loyal subject, JOHN WILLIAMS. a 2 PREFACE. While the Author of the following pages has endeavoured to compose a volume that will be generally interesting and instructive, and to publish it in a form at once cheap and elegant, his principal design has been to secure a permanent record of facts, to which history can furnish but few parallels. In the prosecution of his task, however, the Author has experienced difficulties which he did not anticipate at its commence ment. Having travelled a hundred thousand miles, and spent eighteen years in promoting the spread of the Gospel, he has gathered a mass of materials, from which he could have composed many volumes with greater ease than one ; and his chief difficulty has been so to select, compress and arrange his facts as to form out of them a continuous Narrative, in which the details should be given with as much brevity as would consist with faithful description. It would have been comparatively easy to have filled the volume with general statements, instead of descending to minute particulars ; but mere outlines and sketches could convey a very inadequate impres sion of the state of society and the progress of Christianity among the people for whose welfare he has laboured. He has therefore endeavoured as exactly as possible to describe the scenes he has witnessed as they appeared to himself, and to give upon the pages of his narrative a cast of the images and impressions which exist in his mind. With this view, he has preserved the dialogues, in which much of his know ledge was obtained, and has not spoken for the natives, but allowed them to speak for themselves. In doing this, he has carefully avoided the use of terms and phrases which are current among nations more advanced in the scale of intelligence and civilization, and -the employment of which might lead the reader to form a higher estimate of the state of society in the South Sea Islands than facts would warrant; and he has been equally careful to convey native ideas in the phraseology and under the figurative garb in which they were expressed. This he has been enabled to do, not only from an intimate knowledge of the habits of thought and modes of com munication with which they are familiar, but more especially from the circumstance of his having kept a minute record of most of the interviews and events which the following pages describe. In a word, the Author has endeavoured to take his reader with him to each of the islands he has visited ¦ to make him familiar with their chiefs and people ; to show him what a Missionary life is ; and to awaken in his mind emotions similar to those which successively filled his own. In the course of the Narrative, but more especially in the concluding chapters, some observations will be found upon the origin, structure, and productions of those lovely islands at which the Author has resided. As, however, his days have been devoted, not to the study of geology, nor to the pursuits of the naturalist, but to the work of a Missionary, the curious and scientific must not censure him for contributing to their stores so small a portion of information. While he would not underrate the talents, the diligence, and the discoveries of those who have chosen for themselves such paths, he always felt that he had a much nobler work to perform. Still he hopes that the facts he has presented will throw some light upon the forma tion, the natural history, and the botany of those isles of the Pacific ; and, should the PREFACE. providence of God permit him to revisit the scenes of his former labours, and to ex plore others on which the eyes of a Christian Missionary never rested, he purposes to make observations, and to collect specimens to a very much greater extent than before. To two points, especially, he intends to devote some attention. In the first place, he will endeavour to gather from those comparatively unexplored fields of botanical research a complete hortus siccus ; and, in the second place, to make a variety of experiments upon corals and coral formations, for the purpose of ascertaining the mode of their construction, and the rapidity of their growth. While it is cheering to observe the triumphs which the cause of Missions has gained, not only abroad, but at home, and the high estimate in which Missionary exertions are now held by many who a few years since despised and decried them, it is yet to be lamented that there are few of the wise and the noble amongst us who countenance and contribute to the work. To what can this be ascribed ? Not surely to anything in the Missionary enterprise which could dishonour or degrade those who identify themselves with it. Regarded in the lowest view in which it can be considered — as an apparatus for overthrowing puerile, debasing, and cruel supersti tions ; for raising a large portion of our species in the scale of being • and for intro ducing amongst them the laws, the order, the usages, the arts, and the comforts of civilized life — it presents a claim, the force and obligation of which every one who makes pretensions to intelligence, philanthropy, or even common humanity, ought to admit ; and, if evidence in support of this claim be demanded, the Author ven tures confidently to assert that it will be found in the following pages. This, how ever, is taking but low ground. The Missionary enterprise regards the whole globe as its sphere of operation. It is founded upon the grand principles of Christian benevolence, made imperative by the command of the ascending Saviour, and has for its primary object to roll away from six hundred millions of the race of Adam the heavy curse which rests upon them ; — to secure their elevation to the dignity of intelligent creatures and children of God * — to engage their thoughts in the contem plation, and to gladden their hearts with the prospects, of immortality •— to make known " the way of life " through the meritorious sufferings of the Redeemer; — in a word, " to fill the whole earth with the glory of the Lord." Surely, to be iden tified with such an object must confer dignity on the highest stations, and throw lustre around the most brilliant talents. If, then, there be nothing in the Mission^ ary enterprise to account for the indifference of the more opulent and literary of our countrymen, but everything to condemn it, we are led to the conclusion that such a state of things must be ascribed to the circumstance that the important subject has not been brought sufficiently under their attention. The Author scarcely indulges the hope that a Narrative with so few pretensions to literary excellence will meet the eye of those to whom his remarks refer, but he would ardently desire that they might be induced to ponder the facts which his pages record; persuaded that, if not altogether insensible to the claims of God and man, they would be led thereby to honour and support the institutions whose imperishable names will fill one of the brightest pages of history, and live amongst the purest and best recollections of " the spirits of just men made perfect." The candid reader will throw the mantle of kindness over the numerous defects which may appear in the execution of his work, when he recollects that the greater portion of the Author's life has been devoted either to active labour, or to the study PREFACE TO THE FIFTH THOUSAND. of uncultivated dialects, the idiom, abruptness, and construction of which are more familiar to him than the words and phrases — the grace and force of his native tongue. He has aimed at nothing beyond furnishing a simple and unadorned narrative of facts; and, did he not believe that the interest of these facts would compensate for every deficiency, he should have shrunk from the position which he has been induced to occupy. The Author has availed himself of the kind assistance of the Rev. Dr. Reed, of London, and the Rev. E. Prout, of Halstead, to both of whom he is indebted for many valuable suggestions. In conclusion, the Author would commit this volume to the blessing of that God, the wonders of whose Providence, and the triumphs of whose Gospel, he has endea voured to record. After a life so marked by the Divine favour, he " could not but speak the things which he had seen and heard ;" and, whatever reception may await his volume, he will rejoice in its publication, and close his earthly existence with the delightful satisfaction of having discharged a sacred obligation, by recording facts which alike redound to the honour of God and illustrate the power of his Gospel. PREFACE TO THE FIFTH THOUSAND. In introducing to the Public, at this early period, the fifth thousand of his Nar rative of Missionary Enterprises, the Author avails himself of the opportunity thus afforded of acknowledging, with feelings of lively gratitude, the encouraging appro bation with which his Volume has been so generally received. To many Noblemen, scientific and other Gentlemen, as well as to several Dignitaries and Clergymen of the Establishment, he is under great obligations for the opinion they have been pleased to express of the merits of his Narrative. To his own brethren in the Ministry, as well as to Ministers of other denominations, the Author would tender his thanks for their kindness in recommending the Work to the people of their respec tive charges. He begs, also, to present his grateful acknowledgments to the Editors of a number of highly respectable literary, scientific, and religious Periodicals, and also to the Gentlemen conducting most of the leading Journals of the day, for the very favourable notice they have taken of his Volume. In preparing the present Edition for the press, the Author has availed himself of the suggestions of several of the Reviewers, and begs to express his high sense of the gentlemanly and Chris tian spirit in which those suggestions were offered, especially those in the Monthly Review. Commending his Volume once more to the blessing of God, and the patron age of a kind and discerning Public, the Author again embarks upon an extensive and arduous expedition, cheered by the assurance that he has a share in the prayers and sympathies of British Christians, and entertains a pleasing hope that he shall be privileged to see the inhabitants of many more islands turned from darkness to light, by the transforming influence of the Gospel of Christ. CONTENTS. CHAPTER I. Page A Mission to the Isles ofthe Pacific resolved upon— The Voyages of CaptainWallis and Cook — The hand of Divine Providence recognized— The importance of the Mis sion — The Duffs first Voyage — Account of Captain Wilson — The Capture of the Duff— Discouraging state of the Mission — Extraordinary Circumstances under which success commences . . . 1 CHAPTER II. Geographical Description of the Hervey Is lands — Geological Character of the Is lands generally — Their Classification — The Object for which, and the Spirit in which, Knowledge should be sought — On Coral Formations — Reefs and Islands not the work of Insects . . 5 CHAPTER III. Voyage to New South Wales — The remark able Circumstances under which the Gos pel was introduced at Rurutu — His Ma jesty King George the Fourth remits the Duty on the first cargo of Native Pro duce — The Wreck of the Ship Falcon at Rurutu — Honesty of the Natives — Ex hibition of Idols — The Aitutaki Mission commenced . . . .10 CHAPTER IV. Mission to Aitutaki — Tradition about Ra- rotonga — Voyage of Messrs. Bourne and the Author — Success at Aitutaki — Our Intercourse with the People — Informa tion about Rarotonga — Search for it — Papeiha's Narrative . . .15 CHAPTER V. Papeiha's Narrative continued — Remark able Incidents at Tahiti — Effect upon the Aitutakians at seeing Lime burnt — Un successful search for Rarotonga — Go to Mangaia — Incidents there — Abandon it, in consequence of the cruel Treatment of the Missionaries' Wives . . 18 CHAPTER VI. Visit to Atiu — Conversion of the King — The Power of Scripture Truth— The Dis covery of Mauke — Introduction of Chris tianity into it and Mitiaro— Lord Byron's Testimony — Regard to the Sabbath-day by a Native Crew — Go again in search of Rarotonga . . . .22 CHAPTER VII. Page Rarotonga discovered— Pleasing and dis tressing Incidents there— Papeiha's de voted Conduct — Conversation between a Native Sailor and the King — Remark able Account of a Heathen Woman- Return Home— Exhibition ofthe Idols- Native Speeches, &c. . . .26 CHAPTER VIII. Mr. Bourne's Voyage— Accompanied by Mr. and Mrs. Pitman, with Mrs. Wil liams and Family, the Author sails for Rarotonga — Dangers experienced in landing — Idols delivered up — Chapel erected— Writing on a Chip ; the Won der it excited — Mr. Pitman's narrow Escape — Books prepared in the Language — A Sabbath at Rarotonga . .29 CHAPTER IX. The Adoption of a Code of Laws by the People of Rarotonga — To what extent a Missionary should interfere in Civil Af fairs — A Conspiracy, with its Results — Difficulties at Rarotonga arising from Polygamy and other Heathen Usages — the Character of Works expected from the Pen of a Missionary . , 33 CHAPTER X. Mrs. Williams's Illness — She gives her Con sent to the Author visiting the Samoa Islands-^Resolve to build a Ship — Make a Pair of Bellows — Deficiencies in Books upon the useful Arts — The Rats eat the Bellows — Make a Pair of Wooden Ones ¦ — Messenger of Peace completed — Voy age to Aitutaki — The King accompanies the Author — Return with a singular Car go — Pleasing Incidents on our Arrival . 37 CHAPTER XI. Mr. Buzacott's arrival — Receive Letters from England from the Rev. Matthew Wilks, &c. — Also from Raiatea — Charac ter and Death of Tuahine — The Author leaves Rarotonga — Useful Arts intro duced among the People — Voyage from Rarotonga to Tahiti — Makea's Return . 41 CHAPTER XII. Papeiha's Narrative — Ideas of the People on seeing him read — Arrival of his Col league — Arrangements for increased Ex ertion — The Success which attended CONTENTS. Page their Efforts — Ludicrous Incidents with a Cat — First Place of Worship erected — War with the Heathens — The entire Sub version of Idolatry at Rarotonga — War at Raiatea — Accusations of Professor Lee . . . . .45 CHAPTER XIII. Tradition — How the Rarotongans first ob tained their knowledge ofthe Europeans — They pray to their Gods that Ships may visit their Island — -A Ship, supposed to be the Bounty, arrives — The Tides — The unsoundness of Captain Beechy's Theory — Peculiarities of Rarotonga — Buteve the Cripple — Their Wars, Savage Usages, &c. — Female Degradation — Grades in Society, &c. — . . 51 CHAPTER XIV. Mr. Piatt's Voyage — Intelligence from Ra rotonga — The Vincennes and the Sering- apatam arrive at Raiatea — Missionary Meetings — Native Speeches — Interesting Interview with Captain Waldegrave — Preparations for our Voyage . . 56 CHAPTER XV. Sail for the Navigators' Islands — Touch at the Hervey group — Mangaia — Native Service — War between the Christians and Heathens — Usages of the Mangaians in War — The Author's Advice solicited on various Topics — Female Degradation — New Chapel opened — Last Visit to Mangaia — Remarkable Providence — War prevented . . . .63 CHAPTER XVI. Atiu — Religious Services there — Devoted- ness of the Teachers' Wives — The Au thor's narrow Escape — Distressing Situa tion — Fishing Excursion — Superb Cavern — Mauke and Mitiaro — A dreadful Mas sacre — Rarotonga — An Epidemic rages ¦ — Aitutaki — Interesting Incidents — Na tive Contributions . . .69 CHAPTER XVIT. Leave Aitutaki — Savage Island — Difficulty in obtaining Intercourse — Savage Ap pearance ofthe People — Reach Tonga- tabu — Cordial Reception by the Wesleyan Missionaries — Account of their Labours — Arrangement entered into with them— A Sabbath at Tonga — Meet with Fauea — Productions . . . .77 CHAPTER XVIII. Hapai Islands — Volcanic Island — -Escape Shipwreck — Finau's Despotism — A la mentable Account of a Native Teacher ¦ — History of the Introduction of Chris tianity at the Hapai Islands — The intrepid Conduct of the Chief— Idols hung . . 81 CHAPTER XIX. Sail for the Navigators — Fauea expresses his fears about Tamafainga — Reach Savaii — Astonishment of the Natives at seeing Europeans — Tamafainga killed — Charac ter of Fauea — Intercourse with the Na tives — Most favourable Reception — The War — Malietoa — The Author's narrow Escape . . . . .85 CHAPTER XX. An Interesting Meeting — Interchange of Presents — Ceremonies observed on the Occasion — A display of noble Feeling between the two Brothers — A newly- purchased Bride — Marriage Ceremony — Female Degradation — Matetau — His Person — bis desire for a Missionary — Re marks — Fauea's Character . . 89 CHAPTER XXI. Compelled by contrary wind to leave Sa vage Island — Arrival at Rarotonga — Visit to Arorangi — Beauty of the Settlement — Arrival at Rurutu — Incidents there — Ar rival at Tahiti — Visit to Afareaitu — Meeting there — Vara's Character and Death — Me— The Warrior and the Drop of Blood . . . .93 CHAPTER XXII. Distress at Raiatea — Tamatoa — His Cha racter and Death — Sail again for Raro tonga — New Chapel — Beautiful Appear ance of the Settlement — Makea's Gene rosity — Ancient Usages revived — The Effects of a Discourse — A Hurricane — Mrs. Buzacott's Distress — Mrs. Wil liams's narrow Escape — A Thousand Houses destroyed — The Island devas tated .97 CHAPTER XXIII. The Messenger of Peace driven on Shore — The Effect ofthe Hurricane upon the minds of the People — The Death of our Seventh Babe — More Disasters — A great Feast — Singular Ceremony in apportion ing the Food — Five Calamities — Value of Ironmongery — TheMessenger of Peace repaired and launched — Voyage to Tahiti, &c Evils of Ardent Spirits — The Destruction of the Stills — Establish ment of Temperance Societies — Return to Rarotonga — Introduction of Horses, Cattle, &c. .... 102 CHAPTER XXIV. Second Visit to the Navigators — The Ava's Prayer — Arrival at Manua — Salutations of the People — Find some Raivavaians — Orosenga and Ofu — The Desire every where expressed for Missionaries — Sail for Tutuila — Interesting Interview at Leone Bay — The Author carried on Shore — A Chief prays upon the Deck Runaway Sailors baptising the People 106. CONTENTS. Page CHAPTER XXV. Arrivalat Manono — Joy of Matetau — Reach Savaii — Sabbath Services there — Malie- toa's Address — Interview between Makea and Malietoa — An important Meeting held — Makea's Speech — Malietoa's Re plies to the Author's Questions — The Teacher's Narrative — Consultation with the Teachers — Advice given upon various important Topics — Snakes — Earth quakes ..... 110 CHAPTER XXVI. Visit to Amoa — A beautiful Settlement — A Company of Female Christians — Their Appearance — The Chapel erected by themselves — Visit to Malava — Disagree ment between Matetau and Malietoa — An intelligent young Chief— Sail for Ma nono — Curious Incidents on Board — Re conciliation effected between the Chiefs 115 CHAPTER XXVII. Runaway Convicts, &c. — Tragical Occur rences — Retributive Justice — Two Ves sels taken at Heathen Islands — Kindness of English Captains — Meet with the Widow of Puna — Her Narrative — Ship springs a Leak — Danger to which we were exposed — Vavau — Its Dreariness — Ar rival at Tonga — Character and Labours of the Wesleyan Missionaries — Reach Rarotonga — Flourishing State of the Stations and the Schools — The Ingenuity of the Children in procuring Slates and Pencils — Letter of one of the Children ] 1 9 CHAPTER XXVIII. Discovery of the Samoa Group — French Navigators — Names of the Islands — Kot- zebue — Manua — Orosenga — Ofu — Tu- tuila — Upolu — Manono — Aborima — Savaii — Importance of the Group — Eligi bility for a British Settlement — Soil — Trees — Various Uses of the Candle-nut, Bread-fruit, and Cocoa-nut Trees — Bo tany of the Islands — M. Betero — Birds — Vampire Bat — Snakes and Lizards — Fish —Fishing— Turtle . . .125 CHAPTER XXIX. Distinct Races of Polynesians — Islands in habited by each Race — Malay Origin ofthe Inhabitants of Eastern Polynesia — Rea sons for this Theory — Three Objections answered — Origin of the Inhabitants of Western Polynesia doubtful — Conjectures respecting them — Spiritual Condition of the two Races — Physical Character of the Eastern Polynesians — Superiority of the Chiefs, with Reasons for it — Intel lectual Capacities of the People — Opi- Page mons of themselves — Mental Pecu liarities—Wit and Humour— Proverbs and Similes — Ingenuity — Good Sense — Eloquence — Desire of Knowledge — In fluence of Rehgion upon the Intellect — Appropriate Use of Scripture . . 130 CHAPTER XXX. The two Languages of the South Sea Islanders — The eight Dialects of the Eastern Polynesians — Comparison of each Dialect with the Tahitian— Tabular View of the Differences between them — Their Precision and Perfection — Nice Distinctions in the Pronouns— Causative Verb — Pronunciation — Introduction of New Words — Government — Power of the Chiefs — Punishment of Theft — Wars — Their frequency — Weapons — Canni balism not practised by the Samoans — Amusements .... 136 CHAPTER XXXIV Religion of the Polynesians — Difference between the Superstitions ofthe Samoans and the other Islanders — Objects of Wor ship — Deified Ancestors— Dedication of Children— the Christian and Heathen Mother — Idols — Etus — Tangaloa — Modes of Worship — Invocations — Muti lations — Human Sacrifices — Occasions for which they were required — Mode of procuring them — Affecting Incidents — Future State— Terms of Admission to their Paradise— Cruel Rite of the Fljians — Prevalence of Infanticide — Illustra tions of this — Contrast between the former and present State of the Children — Scene at School Anniversary — Reco very of a Daughter — Alleged Reasons for Infanticide — Method of performing it — Necessity for, andPower of, the Gospel 142 CHAPTER XXXII. Providential Interpositions at the Samoas — Rapid Progress of the Gospel — De bates on the Subject — Native Arguments — Extraordinary Preparations of the People — Rarotonga — Striking Contrast between its Condition in 1823 and 1834 — Recent Intelligence from Mr. Pitman — Various Temporal Advantages of Mis sionary Labours — Useful Arts, Animals, — and Vegetable Productions introduced into the Islands — Prospective Advantages — Connexion of Christianity and Civili zation — Commercial Benefit of Missions — Safety to Shipping — Dangers to which Seamen are exposed where there are no Missionaries — Instances — Missions com mended to the Statesman — The Philo sopher — The Nobleman . . 148 FUNDAMENTAL PRINCIPLE LONDON MISSIONARY SOCIETY. " As the union of Christians of various denominations in carrying on this great work is a most desirable object, so to prevent, if possible, any cause of future dissension, it is declared to be a fundamental principle of the Missionary Society, that its design is not to send Presbyterianism, Independency, Episcopacy, or any other form of church order and government (about which there may be difference of opinions among serious persons), but the glorious Gospel of the blessed God, to the heathen ; and that it shall be left (as it ought to be left) to the minds of the persons whom God mav call into the fellowship of his Son from among them, to assume for themselves such form of Church government as to them shall appear most agreeable to the word of God." In introducing this Volume to the public, I avail myself of the opportunity it affords me to say, that, after twenty years' connexion with this Institution I have never known its fundamental principle violated. I have never received any com munication, either directly or indirectly, as to the mode of Church government that I should adopt • nor am I aware that any of my coadjutors have. The only charge given to me by the Directors of the Society was, to make known the way of salvation, as consummated by the death of the Lord Jesus Christ. JOHN WILLIAMS. LIST OF ENGRAVINGS. Page Portrait of the Author. Map . 1 Three Islands of different formations 6 — 7 Conveying the Idols to the Boat . . 17 An Idol, and the Snare for catching a God 18 Idols 31 Wooden Bellows 39 The Messenger of Peace, with her mat- sails, &c. ...... 43 The Sugar Mill 44 Carved Adzes . . . . .69 The Boat upset at Atiu . . . .70 The Natives catch Flying-fish . . 72 Mrs. Williams and the Children going over the Reef 73 An Idol suspended by its neck . , The Messenger of Peace off the Samoas . Chapel and Scenery at Arorangi . Interview at Leone Bay . , , The Messenger of Peace hove down Mr. Buzacott's Residence . . The Author's Residence . . , The Echinus . The Mantis ..... War Weapons .... Native Cap of Aitutaki . . . , Plate of various Articles of Native Manu. facture ..... Portrait of Papeiha ... Portrait of Makea .... Page 8387 94 108122123124 ti. 129139140141150 151 130 iO B I id* • * L30 tjritttditlflfpc ta'ampasZ Jfcar.tl .Pa.caro Jlu. tines 160 J/Y£ Colwxas 1 ' SebasttatzZobes Volcano * Zanura ISO ZeiskcrZ 150 _c»!r]30 ssashusscts J >, -r 3unkerZ . -McnZ, \_JJisiansAvZ \ Jf.ua I,-, tral - CkisperZ o JJesia'in >LiLi..iiia or Link-nii--- Ls 7 (;t -Ti Jssti'ii/i{i/, ~/~ rjnan tfodius I iMglttftttt Cooper! Smith. £ ¦ 4S* ir./. Egtoi I* t-urnuvilq' . iv-i.,n is p/,,1/,,,1 Jfaivns S'.lu.l,.,,- (-. IMitanttx fO/,J*-£ . 'r,.im^f"CMtn'!! --(TcUnd.% Xarwc 'Sr :AlUi Q, r.i„i.r ,<,„»,.,„,/< y.„,„, r *',w ^*,kf ftcuthM,, T /£¦/',- [ . ZW"Z Z-hntwhrl Scarborowh. <<"-* --, Rangfe6 , Johrisotis £ WatxZ -dnixl Jiarber S JPahnyirtsir .Funia ¦n-L ! ^S*> MnurvltyP "** J« ^.Newlrelaad X"""#- '^|X>Sn|BCTae —¦*=-¦- g=gg i/fttnwnond. *W IlcasantI StarbtukC*\ Gx^p EqUStOT Sard I ¦ Cardnerl St^itqusiim J&abell': r„u.A.- ^".^ •^Cotxtrc . I. Jesus ^Matteectze f .Hertz I Ciarencd- , Gattdalcaiutr % ct Christ?- yai„ '.'„,. .-<;»¦ -i^RKi <** JZqmontS Ztdcpendaiec Sfihtnry JBrmks.T WalUsZ 9 .Opotu ITebwdes ' Frond sf Z'ofjltvu/cr 7V ashinaten ~F (Yay,\-/m,i.<. / •JZireosZ • Sarah - Starbitcfc Je.uhvn •rt fxo.huinc?. £oH-J* elim i fTuons I JStTwnange "Sm'thiftrvoo , Mcrwotht . xfiapai JirttantucL Tonpatabool ' ',2:00a • JTnntvrl j^ts&arts Marqaj_'-ias olfotutttu J tOML 0 A'uti'l^"" *2™*«*« 'jiii'' ^ftttvet JTltntZ • ti&SociclT l» ._ , _ ^jJ^V' „Dt.irtp/->omtrnentl , illam"" ,ii'll,sV> ^* BSSSkhmX ralmcrstonl Uer> l;v o Jfuahuxo ,'A/.":<'r.'< • "''f,ric"' r^l( Scries J. •Mot- -arrow ScyUv / J,-,,.-' «.-//„/.„ -Maretriiiga *_3fatiai\. ^i"'1" " '-''"//rt? v. WlHfauuiavI Murutn ¦ Osnnbitrtj ^ - 1 1 . / -. , t'coi- JFtycawisZ StJtum Baptista j 'Hljshinnton ~ i — j-C )J Martpota Jfii.j.ttOft " Itavavaj; A -Shod I ^hitfGarahia-I 1 Crcxceiit'.r JUapa. NAME NUMB" (SI.1?-? Slfl*PO^ t»0l*UL-; STATli M*?MtSSIONA» Tahiti fcSoa'ctyZ right L&orioooo Chrism ninc.flnerteh Zotul'W Sec* Sandn'ich right 0OOOO ( 'hristr,/n y7wcnty tiwcc ..4incriain JMhrqucsas eight iAQOO tki,tf,et< tM-oJinqhsh /7ond'".WSccx' Dct/iefAtdiipdagovetymany SmZ. 3 or I OOO mostly lluust'.1 .TSfotue L St S ^Austral!" /?.'-' .> oi"WOo Clwistutn J\redivc L.2Z. S ITcncy [<* seven 16 erisooo Christian OroF.nyiJiN'otf L 31 S yavigalors I4 ciphi 160.00O Partial^ aatst's^xJ-'.nej.LO.y. d; L M S fen-cut u group S> or WOO Otrtsium Hi .English ( T\r , Jlapai tt (/roup Sor l-ooo Christian wtftifflitivc Tonaatahoo WOOO Partial? Clirist'? Sssistwtts Zi/i fi-omLtotoo teiy tyrvat Jfcadtcn. two Native .Ut peyeial ut Jfcathcn Oarlcncss .ybtf '/.coJanel Ctuavh and fVcsieyan Missiorutrv St.Jefy making great pmgrcxs *i- Nttte vc^lsststa/t/s Z)iu;es JZ/U^cti, lao O/eup of Is -a 140 •ne iVeslcvetn John Siietr, 35, Paternoster IRou A NARRATIVE, &. #<*. CHAP'TER I. A Mission to the Isles of the PaciDc resolved upon— the Voyages of Captains Wallis and Cook— the hand of Divine Providence recognised— Tho importance of the Mission— The Duff's first voyage— Account of Captain Wilson— The Capture of the Duff— Discouraging State of the Mission— Extraordinary Circumstances under which Success commences. The venerable fathers and founders of the London Missionary Society, after having aroused the attention of the Christian public to the im portant duty of extending the knowledge and blessings of the Gospel, proceeded to the consi deration of the very important and difficult question, " In what part of the world they should commence their work of mercy 1" The late excellent Dr. Haweis, Rector of All Saints, Aldwinkle, and Chaplain to the late Countess of Huntingdon, who was one of the founders of thS Society, the father of the South Sea Mission, and among its most liberal supporters, was re quested to prepare a " Memorial;' upon the subject, which was delivered at Surrey Chapel. In the course of his address, he says, " The field before us is immense ! O that we could enter at a thousand gates! — that every limb were a tongue, and every tongue a trumpet, to spread the joyful sound! Where so consider able a part of the habitable globe on every side calls for our efforts, and, like the man of Mace donia, cries, ' Come over and help us,' it is not a little difficult to decide at what part to begin." The learned and venerable doctor then pro ceeded, with all the warmth of his ardent and cultivated mind, in a lucid and masterly style, to draw a comparison between the climates, the means of support, the government, the language, and the religion of heathen countries ; and con cluded that, of all the " dark places of the earth," the South Sea Islands presented the fewest difficulties, and the fairest prospects of success. The result of Dr. Haweis's able advo cacy was a unanimous resolution, on the part of the Directors and friends, to commence their mission among the numerous and far-distant islands ofthe Southern Ocean; and, with the exception of the estimate of the population of Tahiti, I am astonished at the general correct ness of his information. Those great and good men appear to have had the pleasing impression that they were acting under the guidance of the Spirit of God ; for one of their number, in his almost prophetic discourse, after having enumerated the various No. 1. difficulties that had been overcome and the numerous facilities that had been unexpectedly afforded, says,* " Thus the providence of God, in an unusual manner, seems to conspire with the Spirit of God ; everything favours, nothing impedes the design." Subsequent events, I think, evidently confirm the correctness of this impression ; for, from the very commencement of the mission to the present day, the leadings of Divine Providence have been remarkably developed, and the interpositions of tbe Re deemer's power both frequent and striking. The discovery of so many beautiful islands just before that wonderful period, when, amidst the throes of kingdoms, and the convulsions of the civilized world, a gracious influence was simul taneously shed in so surprising a way on the minds of thousands of British Christians, can not fail to convince every thinking person that the undertaking was of God. So great was the liberality, that, in a short time, ten thousand pounds were subscribed ; and such an amazing spirit of prayer was diffused, as clearly indicated that the Spirit of God was at work, and that some mighty movement was about to take place - for - the wider extension of the Redeemer's kingdom. It was not until the year 1767, that Captain Wallis, commander of his Majesty's ship Dol phin, when crossing the comparatively untra- versed waters of the Southern Pacific Ocean, discovered the splendid island of Tahiti, which has since occupied so prominent a place in the annals of Missionary enterprise. Little did its discoverer think, when hoisting the broad pennant on the Tahitian shores, and taking possession of the island in the name of his sovereign, King George III., that in a few short years the Missionary, sent by the liberality and sustained by the prayers , of British Christians, would follow in his track, search for the lovely spot he had discovered, unfurl another banner, and take possession of that and other islands in the name of'the King of kings. This has been effected under the guidance of Him " Who plants Ius footsteps in the sea ;" for the providence of God has evidently con spired with the Spirit of God in the accom plishment of this great work. A year or two after the voyage of Captain Wallis, Tahiti was visited by that truly great * See a Sermon, liv the l*ev. T. Pcntycross, A. M., Vicar of St. M.iry, Wallingford. B CAPTAIN COOK, AND THE INTEREST HE EXCITED. man Captain Cook, whose name I never mention but with feelings of veneration and regret. His objects were purely scientific. His first voyage was undertaken to observe the transit of the planet Venus, the Royal Society having represented to King George III. that important services would be rendered to the interests of science by the appointment of properly-qualified individuals to observe that phenomenon. The second was in search of » southern continent, which, at that time, was a favourite object of geographical speculation. The third and last was to endeavour to find a passage from the Pacific into the Atlantic Ocean. By the important discoveries made in these successive voyages, a new world was opened to the view all of Europe ; for beside New Holland and New Guinea, almost innumerable islands were found to exist, bestudding the bosom of the vast Pacific with their beauties. The wonderful accounts published respecting these newly-discovered regions very naturally excited unprecedented and almost universal interest. The climate was represented as most salubrious : the cold of winter was never known, and the heat of a tropical country was alleviated by breezes from the ocean. The scenery of the islands was represented as most enchanting : their productions most wonderful: and the manners and customs of the inhabitants as alto gether novel and peculiar. The universal inte rest excited by these representations is, therefore, not a matter of wonder. The mind of the late excellent Countess of Huntingdon was deeply affected by the account of the inhabitants of these interesting islands, and she was anxiously desirous that the Gospel, with all its attendant blessings, might be conveyed to them. I be lieve her dying charge to her beloved chaplain, Dr. Haweis, was, never to lose sight of this object.* While we respect the enterprising spirit of the philosophers at whose instigation the voyages were undertaken, as well as admire the daring and adventurous energy and skill of those indi viduals by whom they were performed, we re cognise the hand of One who is wonderful in counsel and excellent in working; the move ments of whose providence have ever been sub servient to the triumphs of his Gospel; and who, by all this work of preparation, just at this particular time, was showing clearly to his people that it was his intention that those far dis tant islanders should be visited by the Gospel ; that there the interesting experiment of its power to ameliorate the condition of an ignorant, barbarous, and demoralized race should be tried ; that, by the triumphs it should achieve, its moral energy should be demonstrated ; that present and succeeding ages should see that the Gospel alone was " mighty to the pulling down of strongholds ;" and that there was, at least, one means by which uncivilized nations might be constrained to bless, rather than execrate, the day when civilized men first landed on their shores. To what else can we attribute such a * The representations of Dr. Haweis, doubtless, pro duced this impression upon the Countess's mind. confluence of new and unparalleled circum stances just at this period 1 Notwithstanding all that has been effected in the Tahitian and Society Islands, in transform ing their barbarous, indolent, and idolatrous inhabitants into a comparatively civilized, in dustrious, and Christian people, I never con sidered this group alone as worthy the lives and labours of the number of Missionaries who have been employed there. It is only by viewing the Tahitian mission as a fountain from whence the streams of salvation are to flow to the nume rous islands and clusters scattered over that extensive ocean, that we can perceive it to be worthy of the importance that has been attached to it, or of the labour and expense which the London Missionary Society has bestowed upon it. To this mission, however, considered in its relation to other islands, too much importance cannot be attached ; for, in addition to the numerous islands now professedly Chris tian, there are, within a comparatively small distance, many large and extensive groups of which little is known. Among these are the Fiji, the New Hebrides, New Caledonia, Solo mon's Archipelago, New Britain, New Ireland, and, above all, the immense island of New Guinea. This island is said to be 1200 miles in length, and, in some parts, about 300 in breadth. It is reported to be a most beautiful island, rich in all the productions of a tropical climate, inhabited by several millions of im mortal beings, suffering all the terrific miseries of a barbarous state, and dying without a know ledge of God, or the Gospel of his Son. The Fiji is an extensive group, said to comprise from 100 to 200 islands, which vary in size from five to 500 miles in circumference — all teeming with inhabitants, in the most degraded and wretched state of barbarism. These various islands and clusters are inha bited by distinct tribes, diverse from each other in appearance and habits ; but principally by those of the negro race. They are men of immense stature, with black complexion, spread ing noses, and crisped hair ; decidedly distinct from those inhabiting all the islands to the eastward, who are distinguished by their light copper colour, Malay contenanc'e, and straight hair. I sincerely hope that the London, or some other Missionary Society, or the Societies unitedly, will adopt some effective measures, by which these extensive and inviting fields may be brought under moral culture. It will, no doubt, be attended with much danger, as ¦ some of the inhabitants are cannibals of the ' worst character ; others of ferocious habits and cruel practices, using poisoned arrows, and poisoning the very food they bring to sell, and even the waterwhichis taken from their shores ; whilst others are mild in their manner, and kind in their treatment of strangers. The ad venturous trader, however, braves all these dangers ; and shall the devoted Missionary of the Cross, whose object infinitely surpasses in importance that of the merchant, and who pro fesses to be influenced by motives of a highetf order, be afraid to face them? Has he not the FIRST MISSIONARY VOYAGE-CAPTAIN WILSON'S SUFFERINGS. arm of Omnipotence for his protection, and the promises of a faithful God for his encourage ment? The places to which the Gospel has already been conveyed from the Tahitian and Society Islands, are the Sandwich Island group, 3000 miles to the north of Tahiti, inhabited by a population of 150,000 souls;— the Austral Islands, a group 400 miles to the south : — the Paumotu, the Gambier, and the Marquesan, to the eastward; — together with the Hervey, the Navigators, and the Friendly Islands, to the westward. These various groups are inha bited by a population little short, I think, of 300,000 persons; the greater part of whom have abandoned idolatry, with all its barbarous practices, its horrid rites, and superstitious cus toms. Their sanguinary wars have ceased ; the altars of their gods are not now stained with the blood of human beings offered up in sacrifice ; and mothers have ceased to destroy their innocent babes. Captain Cook and his scientific associates little thought, when observ ing the transit of the star, that in a few short years the island on which they stood would itself shine resplendent, like a bright speck in the midst of the ocean, whence the light of sal vation was to diverge in all directions over that mighty mass of waters. The fathers and founders of the London Missionary Society began their labours upon an extensive scale. They purchased a ship, and sent out no less than twenty-five labourers to commence missions simultaneously at the Marquesan, Tahitian, and Friendly Islands. The vessel returned after a most successful voyage ; the Missionaries having been settled, and everything having succeeded to the wishes and expectations of the friends and Directors of the benevolent scheme. This, in a great mea sure, may be attributed to the skill of Captain Wilson, whom God raised up, and, by a series of events almost without a parallel in the his tory of man, qualified to take charge of the ex pedition. When in India, after having ren dered invaluable services to the British army, he was unfortunately taken by the French; and, upon receiving intelligence that Suffrein had basely accepted a bribe from Hyder Ally to deliver the English prisoners into his hands, he determined to effect his escape, which he did by leaping from the prison-walls, a height not less than forty feet. In his flight, the vast Coleroon, a river full of alligators, obstructed his passage ; but, ignorant of the danger he was' encountering, he plunged into its waters, and swam to the opposite shore. Flattering him self that his perils were passed, and his liberty secured, he ascended an eminence to survey the surrounding country, when, to his terror and surprise, he was perceived by some of Hyder Ally's peons, who galloped towards him, seized him, stripped him naked, tied his hands behind his back, and, fastening a rope to them, drove him before them to head-quarters. When interrogated by one of Hyder Ally's chieftains, he gave an ingenuous account of his escape from the prison at Cuddalore. The chieftain immediately charged him with false hood, adding, that no mortal man had ever swam over the Coleroon, and that, if he had but dipped his fingers in its waters, he would have been seized by the alligators. Upon being convinced, however, of the fact, they all gazed with astonishment, and the Turk exclaimed, " This is God's man ! After this he was chained to a common sol dier, and driven naked, barefoot, and wounded, a distance of 500 miles. He was at length loaded with irons of thirty-two pounds weight, and thrust into a horrible prison called the Black Hole ; and while there, so great at times was the raging of hunger, that his jaws snapped involuntarily when his scanty meal was brought to him. Often the corpse was unchained from his arm in the morning, that another living sufferer might take its place, and fall by the same merciless treatment. That he should survive such accumulated misery for twenty-two months, was next to a miracle. At length the monster Hyder Ally was subdued, and the doors of the Black Hole were thrown open, when, emaciated, naked, half-starved, and covered with ulcers, with thirty-one companions, who alone remained to tell the dismal tale of their sufferings, Captain Wilson obtained deliverance. At a subsequent period, when at Bencoolen, every European in the ship he commanded died! Yet during all this time his heart continued hardened, and he knew not the hand that preserved him. Having been successful in his mercantile pursuits, he resolved to return to England, and sit down content. With this view he embarked in the same ship in which the excellent Mr. Thomas, one of the Baptist Missionaries, was returning to England. Mr. Wilson, being still an infidel in principle, had frequent disputes with Mr. Thomas, who one day remarked to the chief officer of the vessel, that he should have much more hope of converting the Lascars to Christianity than Captain Wilson ; so deeply mysterious, at times, are the ways of Providence. But things impossible to man are possible with God ; for at length, by a series of most interest ing incidents, he was induced to abandon his infidel principles, and became an eminent and devoted Christian. After some years of uninterrupted enjoyment of the comforts around him, a number of the Evangelical Magazine, communicating some em bryo views of the mission to the South Seas, fell into his hands, which immediately gave rise to the suggestion, that, if his services were either needful or acceptable, he would sacrifice his comforts, and, without any prospect of worldly advantage, embark once more upon the stormy ocean. Thus was this wonderful man raised up, and thus prepared to take command of this novel and important undertaking. When we reflect upon the various circum stances which attended the commencement of the mission, we cannot wonder that our fathers had the pleasing impression " that their under taking was of God." A second time the ship Duff was sent with a e2 CAPTAIN OF THE SHIP DUFF— SUCCESS OF THE MISSION. 6trong reinforcement of thirty additional labour ers. By this we perceive the enlarged nature of the views entertained by the friends of this mission, together with the extent of their con fidence in God and in his people. They were men whose minds seemed to revel in great things. God, however, for a time, appeared to disappoint all their expectations ; for this hitherto favoured ship was captured by the Buonaparte privateer. The property was en tirely lost; and the Missionaries, with their families, after suffering many difficulties and privations, returned to England. The Mar quesan mission failed ; at Tongatabu some of the Missionaries lost their lives, and that mission was, in consequence of a series of disastrous circumstances, abandoned ; those settled at Tahiti, under such favourable circumstances, had, from fear of their lives, nearly all fled to New South Wales ; so that after a few years very little remained of this splendid embassy of Christian mercy to the South Seas. A few of the brethren, however, never abandoned their posts ; and others returned, after having been a short time absent ; some of whom are still labouring with unabated devotedness in the cause to which they consecrated their lives. These are Mr. Henry and Mr. Nott,* who were among the first Missionaries in the Duff ; and Mr. Davies and Mr. Wilson, who were in the same vessel when she was captured. In addition to all these disappointments, tbe Mis sionaries at Tahiti appeared to be " labouring in vain, and spending their strength for nought and in vain." For sixteen years, notwithstand ing the untiring zeal, the incessant journeys, the faithful exhortations of these devoted men, no spirit of interest or inquiry appeared ; no solitary instance of conversion took place ; the wars of the natives continued frequent and desolating, and their idolatries abominable and cruel. The heavens above seemed to be as brass, and the earth as iron. At length the time to favour Zion in Polynesia, yea, the set time came, and then God was pleased to com mence the work of conversion there, in such a manner as to secure all the glory to himself. This is worthy of special notice ; for the Mis sionaries, at the time the work commenced, were driven away from the island of Tahiti by war, and cut off from all communication with it. Two native servants, formerly in the families of the Missionaries, had received, unknown to them, some favourable impressions, and had united together for prayer. To these many other persons had attached themselves, so that, on the return of the Missionaries to Tahiti, at the termination of the war, they found a great number of " pare Atua," or praying people ; and they had little else to do but to help for ward the work which God had so unexpectedly and wonderfully commenced. Another circum stance, demanding special observation in refer ence to the commencement of the great work at Tahiti, is, that, discouraged by so many years of fruitless toil, the Directors entertained serious * Now in England, artel- nearly forty years of faithful. and devoted labour. thoughts of abandoning the mission altogether. A few undeviating friends of that field of Mis sionary enterprise, however, opposed the mea sure, among whom was good Dr. Haweis, who, in addition to his former princely donations, sustained his opposition by presenting the Society with '2001. more.* My late venerable and beloved pastor, the Rev. Matthew Willcs, united with Dr. Haweis in supporting the mission, and, with the characteristic devoted ness of his spirit, said, " that he would rather sell his garments from his back than that the mission should be given up ;" and proposed that a season of special prayer for the Divine blessing should be observed. The proposition was agreed to, and letters of encouragement were written to. the Missionaries : and while the vessel which carried these letters was on her passage to Tahiti, another ship was convey ing to England, not only the news of the entire overthrow of idolatry, but also the rejected idols of the people. Thus was fulfilled the gracious promise, " Before they call I will answer, and while they are yet speaking I will hear." From that time to this, one continued series of successes has attended our labours, so that island after island, and group after group have, in rapid succession, been brought under the influence of the Gospel ; so much so, indeed, that at the present time we do not know of any group, or any single island of importance, within 2000 miles of Tahiti, in any direction, to which the glad tidings of salvation have not been conveyed. Thus it will be seen, that God was " not unrighteous to forget their work of faith and labour of love." The fathers of our Society had cast themselves, in the " confidence of hope," upon the promises and faithfulness of God ; and it is not in accordance with the one or the other that, having sown bountifully, they should reap sparingly. My earnest desire is, that the mighty work may go on with equal rapidity, so that within a few years every island in the Pacific, even to New Guinea itself, may be elevated from its moral degradation, and made to participate in the blessings of the I Gospel. Nor am I devoid of the cheering hope that I also maybe an instrument in accelerating this great work. . * The amount was in fact twelve hundred pounds; a thousand of w hich the excellent Doctor became possessed of in a peculiar way. Mrs. H had just given birth to a son, and a kind lady addressed a letter of congratula tion to her, enclosing a present for Mrs. H 's at tendant. This Mrs. Haweis returned to her friend. Dr, Haweis was at this period much perplexed about the Mission ; his 200 '., he said, would not support it, and he feared that it would ultimately be abandoned. He had spent an almost sleepless night in anxiety, when, on the following morning, a letter was received from the ladY to whom the Five Pounds had been returned, enclosing five hundbed, saying, it was hoped that the Doctor would not return that, but devote it to some of the numerous, benevolent objects for which he required it. The letter also contained a promise of Five Hundred more the following year; all of which was devoted by the good Doctor to the Souih Sea Mission. DESCRIPTION OF THE ISLANDS. CHAPTER II. Geographical Description of the Hervey Islands— Geolo gical Character of the Islands generally — Their Classi fication — The Objectfor which, and the Spirit in which, Knowledge should be sought— On Cural Formations — lieefs and Islands not the work of Insects. The Island of Raiatea, the largest and most central of the Society Islands, about 100 miles from Tahiti, has been the immediate scene of my labours since I joined the mission, in 1817 ; but, as much information has been given, in various ways, respecting the Tahitian and Society Islands, I shall say little respecting them. The two groups, about which the following pages contain much information, are, first, the Hervey ; and, secondly, the Samoa, or Navi gators' Islands ; both of which are new fields of Missionary labour. The Hervey Islands are seven in number — Mauke, Mitiaro, Atiti, Mangaia, Rarotonga, Hervey's Island, and Aitutaki. They are from 500 to 600 miles west of Tahiti. Very little was known of them until they were visited by myself and my colleague, Mr. Bourne, in 1823. To prevent the interruption of the nar rative, and to render the sequel more intelligible, I shall give a short description of each island, with its position, size, and population. Hervey's Island, from which the group takes its name, is really composed of two small islets, 19° 18' S., 158° 54' W. long. It was discovered by Captain Cook, and by him named in honour of Captain Hervey, R. N., one of the Lords of the Admiralty, and afterwards Earl of Bristol. It is surrounded by a reef, through which there is no entrance. I visited it in 1823, intending to place a native teacher there, as I expected to find a considerable population ; but on learning that, by their frequent and exterminating wars, they had reduced themselves to about sixty in number, I did not fulfil my intention. Some six or seven years after this I visited the same island again, and found that this miserable remnant of the former population had fought so frequently and so desperately, that the only survivors were five men, three women, and a few children ! and at that period there was a con tention among them as to which should be king ! Mauke is a small low island, discovered by myself and Mr. Bourne, in 1823, in lat. 23° S., 157° 20' W. long. It is about fifteen miles in circumference. By an invasion of a large fleet of canoes, laden with warriors from a neigh bouring island, three years prior to our arrival, the population, previously considerable, was, by the dreadful massacre that ensued, reduced to about 300. Mitiaro is a still smaller island of the same description. It lies about twenty miles north west of Mauke. By famine and invasion this island has likewise been almost depopulated ; there not being 100 persons remaining. Atiu is larger than either Mauke or Mitiaro. This island, which is about twenty miles in circumference, was discovered by Captain Cook, and is situated 20° S., 158° 15' W. It is a beautiful verdant spot, not mountainous, but hilly. We found the inhabitants something under 2000. Captain Cook, called it Wateoo. Mangaia was also discovered by Captain Cook, and is situated lat. 21° 57' S., 158° 7' W. long., being about 120 miles south of Atiu. Mangaia is twenty or five-and-twenty miles in circumference, and moderately high. The island is rather singular in, its form and appear ance ; a broad ridge girting the hills, at about 100 feet from their base. The foliage is rich ; the population between 2000 and 3000. These four islands differ from the Society Islands in tors very important feature, that the surround ing reef joins the shore ; there is, consequently, neither passage for boats, nor any safe anchor age for vessels. The sixth, and most important island of the group, is Rarotonga. This splendid island escaped the untiring researches of Captain Cook, and was discovered by myself in 1823. It is a mass of high mountains, which present a remarkably romantic appearance. It is situated in lat. 21° 20' S., 160° W. long. It has several good boat harbours, is about thirty miles in circumference, and is surrounded by a reef. The population is about 6000 or 7000. The seventh and last island is Aitutaki, which was discovered by Captain Cook. Like most of its companions in the group, its landscapes are rich and variegated ; it is hilly rather than mountainous, and surrounded by a reef, which extends a very considerable distance from the shore. There is a good entrance for a boat on the west side of the island. It is eighteen miles in circumference, and has a population of about 2000 persons. The situation is 18° 54' S. lat. 159° 41' W. long. By this brief description of the Hervey Islands, the reader will be enabled, as we pro ceed, to refer in his mind to the relative im portance of each island ; he will also perceive that the whole group contains » population of from 14,000 to 16,000 persons. Of the Samoa Islands I shall hereafter give a more extended account. Perhaps it will be expected that I should say something upon two most interesting subjects — both of which, however, are involved in much mystery — the formation of the islands, and the origin of the inhabitants. The latter point I shall defer until I treat of the different dialects spoken by the inhabitants of the various groups ; and, having hastily glanced at tbe former, shall pass as speedily as possible to the immediate object of the present narrative, which is, first, to show how the Gospel has been introduced among this people, and then to supply some account of the mighty triumphs it has achieved.. In order to give the reader a correct idea of the islands generally, it will be necessary to divide them into three distinct classes, and de scribe each class separately. The first is the mountainous. The islands of this class, with but few exceptions, are truly splendid. The immense mountains rise gradually from their base, till their lofty summits are lost amid the clouds of heaven ; some are broken into a thou- CLASSIFICATION AND CHARACTER OF THE ISLANDS. Aimeo Volcanic, or First Class. sand fantastic shapes ; here a. pyramid piercing the skies, and there a spire presenting its apex above the belt of clouds by which it is girt ; and then you see a precipitous rock, lifting itself up in solemn grandeur, and frowning over your head like the mouldering battlements of some immense castle. The sides of these mag nificent heights are clothed with bright verdure of varied shades. Beauty, grandeur, wildness, and sublimity, are so fantastically blended and contrasted, as to excite the most varied and delightful feelings. Then there is the ocean beneath you, stretching away in boundless majesty, until it appears to embrace the heavens in the distance. At the base of the mountains are fertile and luxuriant valleys, in which are intermingled the stately bread-fruit tree, the banana, the Brazilian plum, and many other tropical productions, some of which are trees of gigantic growth and richest foliage, — all equally beautiful, but each having its own hue, from the darkest shade to green of the lightest tint. The plumes of the cocoa-nut tree, overtopping the whole, and waving majestically to the passing breeze from the ocean, give an exquisite finish to the landscape. The elevated portions of these islands are from 2,000 to 10,000 feet above the level of the sea. The mountains of Hawaii are said to be about 15,000 feet in height. In all the above-mentioned islands there are evident traces of volcanic eruption. In many of them the rocks are composed of a fine-grained black basalt, of which the natives make their , ¦perms, or pounders, to beat their bread-fruit into a paste, and of which also they made their hatchets prior to the introduction of iron tools. In others, pumice-stone is found, and stones of varied appearance, which have evidently under gone the action of fire. Immense masses, also, of conglomerated rubble are frequently met with. But whether these islands, from 50 miles to 400 or 500 in circumference, and from 1,000 to 15,000 feet in height, owe their exist ence entirely to volcanic agency, or otherwise, is a problem I am not prepared to solve. Some of them may; others may be fragments of a submerged continent ; or they may have been thrown up from the bed of the ocean by some violent convulsion of nature. It is evident, that all the islands with which we are acquainted have, at one time or other, been under water ; for at the tops of the highest mountains, coral, shells, and other marine substances, • are found in great abundance. The wild and romantic appearance of the rocks — their broken, abrupt, and irregular forms — also indicate that at some remote period they have been subject to the disruption of an earthquake, to volcanic ex plosion, or to some other equally mighty and equally capricious agent. The islands of the second class are rather hilly than mountainous, averaging from 100 to 500 feet in height. They are, generally speaking, equally beautiful in their appearance, i and luxuriant in their foliage, with those of the Henderson's Island. Cryst.il Rocks, or Second Class. CORAL REEFS. first class ; but, being less sublime in their character, from having neither pyramidal rocks nor spring heights, they do not impress the mind with that wonder and delight which must seize the breast of every lover of nature, when mountains of so much grandeur, richness, and sublimity, first present themselves to his view. In this second class of islands there is cer tainly an absence, to a great extent, of the > ol- canic phenomena that abound in those of the first, the rocks being crystallized carbonate of lime, very much in appearance like the aragonite of the Giant's Causeway. These are supposed originally to have been coral ; but by exposure to the action of the atmosphere, together with that of the water percolating through them, the loose particles of calcareous matter have been washed away, and the whole mass has become hard and bright. The third class is the low coralline islands, War-*! ONE OF THE FBIENDI.Y ISLANDS. Cor.ll, Tllil'd ClaSS. which, in most cases, rise but a few feet above the sea. They are generally small. Tongatubu, however, which is also of this class, is about 100 miles in circumference. The soil upon the coralline islands is frequently so very thin, that but little vegetation is produced upon them, beside the cocoa-nut trees, pandanus, some stunted hibiscus, and a few other trees, of dwarfish growth, with a quantity of brush-wood. Tongatubu, however, and the Friendly Islands generally, may be deemed exceptions ; the soil there being much deeper, every production of the islands of the first and second class grows in luxuriant profusion. Mauke, also, is a beau tiful and fertile little spot. The accompanying cuts will present to the reader, at one view, the relative appearance of the classes into which I have divided the islands. All the Society, and many other islands in the Pacific, are surrounded by a belt of coral rock, from two or three to twenty yards in width, and situated at various distances, from a few yards to perhaps two miles from the shore. Against this wonderful barrier the long rolling waves of the wide Pacific are driven with terrific violence ; and towering in one vast sheet of water to an immense height, with majestic power they curl their foaming tops over the reef, and bursting against this rocky bulwark, spread their harmless vengeance upon its surface. The spray from the breaking of these billows frequently rises so high as to present a beautiful marine rainbow. The waters of the lagoon, between the reef and the shore, are placid and transparent, at the bottom of which, and on the sloping sides ofthe banks as they descend beneath the water, a most enchanting picture presents itself; for coral of every variety, of every shape, and of every hue, is seen intermingled- in rich pro fusion, presenting to the imagination the idea of a sub-marine flower-garden or shrubbery of exquisite beauty : while among the tortuous branches of the madrepore, and wide-spreading leaves of other corals, the zebra-fish, and others of every colour and size, are seen gamboling in conscious security. For the sake of being clear and explicit upon the interesting topic of the formation of the islands, I shall first notice the theories which I find are en tertained upon it, and afterwards present some important facts to the attention ofthe reader, by which these theories may be tested. For it appears to me, that there is one grand point of difference in moral and physical science, which ought ever to be kept in view in our researches after knowledge : in morals, facts and theories must be brought to the test of known principles ; while in physical science, theories and principles must be brought to the test of facts. The great object for which all knowledge should be sought, and for which it ought to be employed, is to illustrate the wisdom or goodness of the great and beneficent Creator. And if we come to the study of natural phenomena, with minds unchilled by scepticism or infidelity, we shall be led to sublime religious contemplations ; and whether we examine the little coral insect of the ocean, or gaze upon the gigantic beast of the forest ; whether we atudy the little glow-worm which twinkles upon the bank, or the celestial luminaries performing their appointed revolu tions in majestic silence, amidst the vast expanse of infinity, with an ancient and scientific king, we shall be led to exclaim, " How manifold, O God, are thy works ! in wisdom thou hast made them all." In all our prying researches after knowledge, it is necessary that the mind be firmly established upon two great points — the belief in a Divine creative agency, and in the Divine authenticity THEORIES UPON CORALS. of the sacred Scriptures ; having a thorough con viction of the truth of the facts recorded, and of the correctness of the principles laid down. Without these, our minds will be led into a dark mysterious void, instead of having our thoughts carried up to the Father of light and of life. With these principles as our ballast, without any apprehension of danger, we may launch our bark upon the broad ocean of science, explore its coasts, and fathom its depths ; but destitute of them, our vessel will be in a perpetual storm, amidst rocks and shoals, without a rudder, a compass, or a chart. Thus equipped, you may accompany the geologist into the bowels of the earth, and examine its wondrous structure ; and you will return with an overwhelming conviction, " that the " Eternal God made the earth by his power, that the pillars of it are his, and that he has set the world upon them." With the astronomer, you may ascend the skies, contemplate with ecstasy the movements of the heavenly bodies, and with the scientific Psalmist you will exclaim, " The heavens declare the glory of God, and the firmament showeth his handiwork." With the voyager, you may visit distant climes, and viewing man in all his multiplied and varied characters, you will be convinced that " God hath made of one blood all nations of men for to dwell upon the earth." Thus it is, that in every age the evidences of revealed religion have advanced with the progress of sound know ledge. Indeed, it cannot be otherwise ; for the God of nature, whose operations it is the pro vince of Bcience to explore, is the God of the Bible ; and, as the God of truth, he cannot set forth in his word principles at variance with those which, as the God of nature, he has esta blished in the material world. Both systems of knowledge, thus emanating from the same source, must harmonize with each other ; for the Bible is something like a new edition of the book of nature, with a splendid appendix, which makes known the wonderful scheme of human redemption. If there is any apparent discrepancy in these two editions of this same great work, it arises from our inability rightly to decipher the characters employed. In venturing to suggest any opinions of my own upon this intricate but interesting- geological topic, I shall do so in the form of hints, for the candid consideration of those who may feel disposed to prosecute their inquiries into its mysteries. First, then, as to the formation of tbe coral islands. The received opinion now is, thatthey are formed by little marine animals, called sax- igcnous, or rock-making polypes. These insects, it is supposed, first select a suitable situation, such as the summit of a volcano, or the top of a sub-marine mountain ; for it is stated that this. species ofthe coral insect does not exist' in deep water.* Having thus selected the spot, innu merable myriads of these wonderful little animals work with incredible diligence until they reach the surface of the water, above which • Journal of Royal Geographical Society of London, 1831; p. 218. they cannot build. Drift-wood and other sub stances, which are conveyed by currents and winds, there find a lodgment : sand, &c, is washed up by the waves of the sea, and thus an island is formed. Birds visit the spot, seeds are by this means conveyed, and a soil is subse quently created by decayed vegetable matter.* This appears to be the received opinion rela tive to the formation of the low coral islands. The second class of islands, which are from thirty to three hundred feet in height, being what is termed crystallized rock-coral, are sup posed to have been originally either reefs or low islands, which have been elevated by the- upheaving power of an earthquake, or the vol canic intrusion of matter somewhere under their base, or by some general and powerful expan sive force. In two or three islands of this class that I have had an opportunity of examining, this latter opinion appears very probable. In Atiu and Mauke, the latter of which we discovered in 1823, there are several extensive caverns, having a stratum of crystallized coral, fifteen feet in thickness, as a roof. In one of these exquisitely beautiful caverns I walked about for two hours, and found no termination to its windings. This circumstance, together with the entire absence of scoria, lava, and other volcanic phenomena, in this class of islands, may lead to a supposition that they may have been elevated by some expansive power, or volcanic agency, without eruption. In the island of Mangaia, where there is also a small quantity of fine-grained basalt, there is a subterraneous communication with the sea, which, to the best of my recollection, reaches more than a mile inland. A piece of wood, or any other floating substance, thrown into a hole at the bottom of the rocks, where there is a small lake, will, in a short time, be found float ing on the 6ea. Also at Raiatea, the largest of the Society Islands, and one of the first, or volcanic class, there is a similar communication with the ocean. On the top of a mountain, several hundred feet in height, there is a hole of a few yards in dimension : and if, when a strong haapiti, or north-easterly wind, blows, you roll a piece of cloth of the size of a sheet into a hard ball, and throw it into the hole, the current of air beneath will open it out, and it will be blown to the top of the hole again like a parachute. The first class, as I have before intimated, betray, in the multiplied points of their expan sion, the proofs of volcanic violence. In Hawaii of the Sandwich Islands, in Toofua and Proby of the Friendly Islands, and in Tanna of the New Hebrides, volcanoes are still in active operation. From a variety of questions which have been proposed to me since my arrival in England, together with what I have heard stated by many well informed persons, I perceive tliat incorrect opinions are entertained respecting the extent and rapidity of coral growth ; and that it is sup posed new islands are constantly being formed with such rapidity, that in course of time island • Lyell's Geology, vol. iii., p. 300. ON CORALS. will be joined to island, and the whole Pacific will become one vast continent ! Dr. Buckland, in his late work on Geology, countenances the theory of newly-formed islands, as well as the rapidity of coral growth. " The tendency of polypes to multiply in the waters of warm climates is so great, that the bottom of our tro pical seas swarm with countless myriads of these little creatures, ever actively engaged in. con structing their small but enduring habitations. Almost every submarine volcanic cone and ridge within these latitudes has become the nucleus and foundation of a colony of polypes. The calcareous secretions of these insects are accu mulated into enormous banks, or reefs of coral, sometimes extending to a length of many hun dreds of miles ; these, continually rising to the surface in spots where they were unknown before, endanger the navigation of many parts of the tropical seas."* Now, the question is, Do the phenomena of the South Seas warrant such a conclusion! I should reply, Most cer tainly not. The rapidity of coral growth has been most egregiously overrated and overstated. Capt. Beechy, of his Majesty's ship the Blossom, in his voyage to the Pacific, supplied some valuable information calculated to corect this error. And here I may assert, that, in all the range of my travels in the South Seas, I have perceived no animal agency at work adequate to the formation of a reef or island of any extent, within a period of many thousands of years. Lyell, reasoning upon Captain Beechy's data, supposes that the ordinary growth of coral may amount to six inches in a century ; it will then require 3000 years to produce a reef fifteen feet thick.f Captain Beechy visited an island, sup posed to be an elevated reef, eighty feet high ; Mr. Stuchbury and myself have visited Rurutu, the rocks of which are of the same material, and are a hundred and fifty feet in height ; and the calcareous rocks of Mangaia are about three hundred feet. Now, all these are supposed to be reefs elevated out of the sea ; and if it takes a century to produce a reef six inches in thick ness, and three thousand years to produce one fifteen feet thick, eighteen thousand years would be required to produce the island visited by Captain Beechy, thirty thousand for the rocks of Rurutu, and fifty or sixty thousand for those of Mangaia ; and only that portion of them which appears above water ! In addition to this, I have traditions of the natives upon almost every subject, especially of their former navigators, wherein every island which has subsequently been discovered within two thousand miles is named ; but in no one of them is there any mention of, or reference to, a newly-formed island. I am familiar with one tradition, in which there is a genealogical ac count of the reigning family for thirty genera tions, and this is also equally silent upon the subject of new formations. Another error in reference to corals I find entertained is this : many persons suppose that * Buckland's Geology, p. 443. t See Lyell's Geology, vol. iii. p- 300. all coral insects work until they reach the surface of the water, which is not the case ; for you seldom find a piece of branching madrepore, or brain, or any other coral, however deep in the water, above two or three feet in height. Dr. Ure, in his admirable work on Geology, appears to assign by far too great importance to this species of coral.* And now I would briefly inquire what is the substance of which coral is composed, and whence do the insects obtain the material with which they build 1 Three distinct theories appear to be entertained upon this subject. The first is, that coral is the exitvim of the insect, t The second, that it is a secretion from the animal. Buckland says, " that the gelatinous bodies of these polypes are furnished with the power of secreting carbonate of lime, with which they form a basis of attachment, and cell of retreat," &c. A third opinion is, that the dead animal is converted into coral. This latter idea appears to be sanctioned by some persons of eminence. Lyell, when speaking of Bermuda, says, that " the decomposition of the numerous zoophites produces a soft white calcareous "mud resem bling chalk." J Mr. Stuchbury also remarks, that the " carbonate of lime, by which some solid masses of compact limestone are formed, may have been derived from the decomposition of corals and testacea."§ In venturing to offer a theory upon this topic, differing from those entertained by scientific men of great eminence, I must cast myself upon the candour of any one who, by his superior discernment, may detect a want of soundness in my propositions. That there exists a considerable portion of calcareous matter, or carbonate of lime, in salt water, has of course long been known ; it was, however, a fact with which I was unacquainted, until, when abroad, being in want of salt, we were compelled to make it by boiling down sea-water. In this process we invariably found that a cake of lime formed at the bottom of the pan in which the water was boiled. This fact, thus ascertained, gave rise to a variety of suggestions in my mind ; and having, since my arrival in England, prosecuted my inquiries into this subject, 1 find that, in all the salt-works in which sea-water is boiled, a thick cake of sul phate of lime is invariably found at the bottoms of the pans ; and that our magnesia is obtained from the same source. These facts will be conclusive and satisfactory to the mind of every person who was not previously aware of the presence of lime in salt water. Whence this material may be derived is an inquiry of no importance to the theory I would suggest. Dr. Buckland says, that " some refer it entirely to marine animals," but intimates himself, " that it may be carried by rivers into the sea."|| Where, however, are there rivers of sufficient magnitude to impregnate such a body of water as that of which the Pacific Ocean is com- * See Ure's Geology, p. 469. + Forster's Voyages. % Lyell's Geologv, vol. iii. p. 301. § Stuchbury. in the West of England Journal. II Buckland's Bridgewatcr Treatise. 10 SUGGESTIONS ON CORAL REEFS. posed? But, as in tropical climates the pro cess of evaporation is so much more rapid than in higher latitudes, and as this calcareous matter is separated by evaporation, may we not conclude that the innumerable myriads of these minute calcareous particles, which are always floating about in the sea, are thus produced! The inference I draw, then, is this : that, as there is carbonate of lime in salt water ; that as corals are carbonate of lime ; and that as they are found to exist principally in warm climates, where by the process of evaporation there is an abundance of material supplied for these insects to build with ; instead of secreting the substance, or producing it in any other way, they are merely the wonderful architects which nature employs to mould and fashion this material into the various and beauteous forms which the God of nature has designed it should assume ! This opinion appeared to me to receive con siderable confirmation on my late visit to the Museum at Liverpool ; for, in looking over the extensive collection of corals there, I perceived a branching piece rather different from any with which I was acquainted ; and on reading the label I found it to be " a calcareous crystal formed in the evaporating-house of the King of Prussia." I would venture also to suggest, whether the same theory might not be applicable to the formation of shells; and instead of supposing that the animals secrete the calcareous coverings which they inhabit, may they not emit or secrete a gluten, to which the calcareous particles ad here, and thus the shells are formed. While I believe in the agency of insects in the formation of the branching, the brain, and other corals, and also in that of roundish masses of various size, which, when broken, have much the appearance of coarse lump-sugar, and may be the work of the saxigenous polypes, yet, for two or three apparently conclusive reasons, I think the rock of which the reefs and islands are composed is not the production of insects. The first of these relates to the height of these masses. Lyell states that the class of polypes, to which this work is assigned, cannot live in water of great depth, and, quoting Mr. Stuch bury and other scientific authorities, suggests that twenty-five or thirty feet is the lowest point at which they can work. If this be correct, how can we account for the solid rock eighty feet above the surface of the water, of which Hender son's Island, visited by Captain Beechy, is composed; for the rocks of Rurutu, 150 feet; and for those of Mangaia, 300 feet in height! none of which present appearances to warrant the supposition that they have been elevated by a succession of efforts.* The inference to be drawn from this is, that the insects do exist in greater depths than are now assigned to them, or that these solid masses are not the effect of their labour : the one or the other must be the case. To the latter opinion I entirely yield. Another reason equally conclusive is, that, while the madrepore, the brain, and every other * Sec Captain Ueechy's Account of Henderson's Is land. species of coral, are full of little cells, the reefs and islands appear to be solid masses of compact crystal limestone, in which nothing like a cell can be detected, but which, on the contrary, present a fine stratified appearance. Lyell in timates, " that this continuous mass of stone is composed of shells, broken-off prickles of the echini, fragments of coral, united by calcareous sand, produced by the pulverisation of shells," &c. Now this kind of marine rubble, I think, is invariably in strata from three to nine inches in thickness ; and the solid masses composing the islands and reefs, to which I have alluded, are pure and unmixed. A third objection I have to allowing the reefs and islands to be the work of insects is, the amazing length of time, as I have already shown, that would be required to produce them. May not these structures have been produced by the chemical precipitation of the minute calcareous particles of which I have spoken ! or may not the late experiments at the Philosophical Insti tution at Bristol throw some light upon this subject! There, Mr. Cross, by passing electric fluid through water, detached the calcareous and silicious particles, and produced stones of various kinds. Now, in tropical climates light ning is very frequent and vivid, and perhaps may exert an influence which has not hitherto been assigned to it ; but more especially electric fluid may be engendered, to a considerable extent, by the sub-marine and other volcanoes which abound in the South Seas, and produce an effect adequate to the formation of these wonderful and invaluable structures.* After all, however, that I have seen, and thought, and read upon the subject, my im pression is, that the islands remain much in the same state as when the deluge left them, and that every subsequent alteration has been partial in its character, and exceedingly limited in its extent. CHAPTER III. Voyage to New South Wales— The remarkable circum stances under which the Gospel was introduced in Rurutu — His Majesty King George the Fourth remits the Duty on the first Cargo of Native Produce— The Wreck of the Ship Falcon at Rurutu — Honesty of the Natives — Exhibition of Idols — The Aitutaki Mission commenced. In the latter end of the year 1821, Mrs. Wil liam's health being much impaired, and suffer ing myself from the effects of a disease prevalent in the islands, it was deemed desirable to avail ourselves of an opportunity, which was then afforded, of visiting New South Wales. Desirous of making the affliction subservient to the one great object to which our lives were devoted, we determined to take with us two native * In my late visit to Bristol, I found that Mr. Cross produced his crystals, not by violent shocks of electricity, but by a small constant stream of electric fluid ¦ which appears to be the manner in which it would be emitted in submarine volcanoes, and may account for the circum stance of the coral reefs and islands being formed on their summits. EPIDEMIC AT RURUTU— AUURA ARRIVES AT RAIATEA. 11 Christians, and place them as teachers in the Island of Aitutaki. The captain of the vessel having kindly con sented to convey them, without expense either to ourselves or the Society, we mentioned the circumstance to the members of the church, who were delighted with the proposition, and selected Papeiha and Vahapata, two of their number, for the work. Of Papeiha much will be said hereafter, for he has been exceedingly useful, and to the present moment has preserved an unsullied reputation. These two brethren were set apart to their office in an interesting service, held on the day of our departure from Raiatea. The minds of our people had been awakened to the subject of extending the knowledge of the Gospel by a peculiarly interesting circumstance that had just before occurred. An island called Rurutu, about 350 miles to the south of Raiatea, was visited by an epidemic, which appears to have been exceedingly fatal. As the natives believe every such calamity to be an nfliction of some angry deity, two chiefs of enterprising spirit determined to build each a large canoe, and, with as many of their people as could be conveyed, to launch upon the mighty deep, committing themselves to the winds and the waves, in search of some happier isle. They felt convinced that, if they remained, they would certainly be "devoured by the gods," whose anger they had in vain endeavoured to appease ; and that, should they not succeed in reaching any other land, they could but perish in the billows of the ocean. Everything prepared, Auura and his party launched their canoe, unfurled their sails, and were soon out of sight of their lovely but de voted island, and, as they supposed, out of the reach of their infuriated deities. They arrived at the island of Tubuai ; and, after having recruited their strength and. spirits, determined on returning to their native isle, hoping that the plague was stayed. They launched their vessels, and committed themselves again to the deep, little anticipating the perils that awaited them. Scarcely had they lost sight of the mountains of Tubuai, when they were overtaken with a violent storm, which drove them out of their course. Of the crew of one of the canoes the greater part perished at sea. The chief, Auura, to whom the other belonged, and his party, were driven about they knew not whither, and for three weeks they traversed the trackless ocean, during which time they suffered exceed ingly from the want of food and water. At length, He who holds the winds in his fists, and the .waters in the hollow of his hands, to whose merciful designs the elements are subservient, guided them to the Society Islands. They were driven on the- coral reef which surrounds the island of Maurua, the farthest west of the group. Had they not reached this island they must have perished. The hospitable attentions of the inhabitants of this little isle soon restored the strength of the exhausted voyagers, who related the dread ful calamities which had befallen their country and themselves. The Mauruans informed them that they formerly worshipped the same deities, and attributed every evil that befel them to the anger of their " evil spirits ;" but that now they were worshippers of Jehovah, the one living and true God ; giving them a detailed account of the manner in which Christianity had been introduced among themselves, and pointing to the demolished maraes and mutilated idols in confirmation of their statements. The astonished strangers, on hearing that white men, who had come in ships from a dis tant country to bring them good tidings, were living at islands, the summits of whose moun tains were in sight, determined to proceed there immediately. A westerly wind setting in, Auura and his friends again launched on the deep, not to fly from the anger of their gods, but in search of those who could explain more fully to them the nature of the astonishing news they had heard. Not being acquainted with the coast of Porapora, they missed the entrance, and were driven to Raiatea. On landing their astonishment was again excited; the mission aries, their wives and families, the natives in European dresses with hats and bonnets, their neat white cottages, together with the various useful arts which had been introduced amongst the people, filled the strangers with admiration and surprise. When they were conducted to public worship on the Sabbath, they beheld with astonishment the assembled multitude ; heard them sing the praises of the one living and true God, and listened with the deepest interest to the message of mercy. At once they were convinced of the superiority ofthe Christian religion, and concluded that God had graciously conducted them there for the purpose of making them acquainted with its inestimable blessings. Having placed themselves under our instruc tion, we gave them in special charge to our deacons, and supplied them with elementary books. Auura was exceedingly diligent in learning, and made very rapid progress. In a short time he completely mastered the spelling- book, could repeat the greater part of our cate chism, and read in the gospel of Matthew. They were only with us a little more than three months, and, before they left, he and several others could read, spell, and write correctly, although they were previously ignorant of the formation of a letter or a figure. Auura expressed to us very frequently his anxious desire to revisit his own island, to carry to his relatives and countrymen the knowledge he had obtained of the true God and his Son Jesus Christ ; manifesting, at the same time, in the most affectionate manner, his fears that on his return he should find very few of his relatives and friends alive, as " the evil spirit was devouring the people so fast when he fled from the island." A vessel, belonging to our kind and liberal friend A. Birnie, Esq., touched at Raiatea, on her way to England, whither she was conveying the very first cargo of native produce which was shipped from that part of the world. It was a cargo of cocoa-nut oil, subscribed by the con verted natives in aid of the funds of the London Missionary Society. His late Mnjesty King George IV., upon being informed of the cir cumstance, graciously commanded that the duty- should be remitted, which enhanced the value of the property 400?. The total amount, there fore, contributed to the funds of the Society by this produce was 1800?. Having informed the captain of our wish that the chief and people might be conveyed to their own island, with a readiness which did him honour, he offered to take them. When we named the kind offer of the captain to the chief and his wife, they expressed their delight at the prospect of returning, but Auura objected to go to their " land of darkness without u light in his hand ;" by which he meant some person to instruct him and his people in the truths of the Gospel. We assembled the members of our congregation, mentioned Auura's desire, and inquired who among them would go as teachers to the heathen of Rurutu. Two of our deacons, who were amongst our best men, came forward, and, we hope, with the spirit, as well as in the language of the prophet, said, " Here we are ; send us." They were therefore set apart to their work by an interesting service. The greater part of the night previous to their de parture was spent in providing them with some necessary and useful articles. Every member of our church brought something as a testimonial of his affection ; one a razor, another a knife, a third a roll of native cloth, a fourth a pair of scissors, and others, various useful tools. We supplied them with elementary books, and a few copies of the gospels in the Tahitian language, from which their own does not materially differ. Thus we equipped them for this expedition as well as our means would allow. As we were anxious to know what reception was given to the teachers, and to open a com munication with this, to us, unknown island, we sent a boat of our own, with a native crew, to bring back intelligence. After an absence of little more than a month, we had the pleasure of seeing this boat return, laden with the tro phies of victory, the gods of the heathen taken in this bloodless war, and won by the power of the Prince of Peace. On reading the letters which accompanied them, and seeing with our own eyes the rejected idols, we felt a measure of that saered joy which the angels of God will experience when they shout, " The kingdoms of this world are become the kingdoms of our God and his Christ." A meeting was held in our large chapel to communicate the delightful intelligence to our people, and to return thanks to God for the success with which he had graciously crowned our first effort to extend the knowledge of his name. The chapel was lighted up with ten chande liers, made of wood neatly turned ; cocoa-nut shells were substituted for lamps. The middle chandelier held eighteen lights, twelve in the lower circle, and six in the upper; the others held ten and twelve each. When lighted up, they presented to the natives a most brilliant appearance, and called forth expressions of asto nishment and delight. In the course of the evening the rejected idols were publicly exhi bited from the pulpit. One in particular, Aa, the national god of Rurutu, excited considerable interest ; for, in addition to his being bedecked with little gods outside, a door was discovered at his back, on opening which, he was found to be full of small gods ; and no less than twenty- four were taken out, one after another, and exhibited to public view. He is said to be the ancestor by whom their island was peopled, and who aftei' death was deified. Several most interesting addresses were deli vered by the natives on the occasion. The two following extracts will give an idea of their general character : — Tuahine, one of our dea cons, observed, — " Thus the gods made with hands shall perish. There they are, tied with cords! Yes! their very names are also changed ! Formerly they were called ' Te mau Atua,' or the gods ; now they are called ' Te mau Varu hw,' or evil spi rits : Their glory, look ! it is birds' feathers, soon rotten ; but our God is the same for ever." Tamatoa, the king, also addressed the meet ing ; and, perhaps, a finer illustration of the simi litude of the knowledge of the Lord covering the earth as the waters cover the channels ofthe great deep, will not readily be found, than was used by this Christian chief : — ¦ "Let us," said he, "continue to give our oil and arrow-root to God, that the blind may see, and the deaf hear. Let us not be weary in this good work. We behold the great deep : it is full of sea; it is rough and rugged underneath ; but the water makes a plain, smooth surface, so that nothing of its ruggedness is seen. Our lands were rugged and rough with abominable and wicked practices ; but the good word of God has made them smooth. Many other coun tries are now rough and rugged with wickedness and wicked customs. The word of God alone can make these rough places smooth. Let us all be diligent in this good work, till the rugged world is made smooth by the word of God, as the waters cover the ruggedness of the great deep. Let us, above all, be concerned to have our own hearts washed in Jesus' blood ; then God will become our friend, and Jesus our brother." He concluded by an interesting allusion to the natives of Rurutu. Another speaker, with warmth and animation that produced a great impression, said, — " Look at the chandeliers ! Oro never taught us anything like this ! Look at our wives, ill their gowns and their bonnets, and compare ourselves with the poor natives of Rurutu, when they were drifted to our island, and mark the superiority ! And by what means have we ob tained it 1 By our own invention and goodness % No ! it is to the good name of Jesus we are indebted. Then let us send this name to other lands, that others may enjoy the same benefits." "Angels," added Uaeva, "would rejoice to be employed by God to teach the world this Gospel of Christ." To prevent the necessity of having again to WRECK OF THE FALCON— FRAUDULENT ATTEMPT DEFEATED. 13 notice this island, I shall mention here one or two interesting events in reference to it. Some time after the introduction of Christianity into Rurutu, a circumstance occurred which afforded indubitable proof of its beneficial effects upon the minds of the inhabitants, and displayed at the same time the great advantages which accrue from Missionary labours to our own and other maritime countries. Captain Chase, who com manded an American whaler, was in the habit of touching frequently at Raiatea for refresh ment. He determined, on his last visit to us, to call at Rurutu, on his way to America, in order to procure a supply of yams, which are both fine and abundant at that island, when, unfor tunately, his vessel was wrecked upon the rocks. The natives afforded him very efficient aid ; in acknowledgment of which, the captain, on his departure, left the following document : — " The natives gave us all the assistance in their power from the time the ship struck to the present moment. The first day, while landing the things from the ship, they were put into the hands of the natives, and carried up to the Native Mission-house, a distance of half a mile ; and not a single article of clothing was taken from any man belonging to the ship, though they had it in their power to have plun dered us of every thing that was landed ; which fully proves the honesty of the natives of this island. Since I have lived on shore, myself, officers, and people, have received the kindest treatment from the natives that can be imagined, for which I shall ever be thankful. Myself and officers have lived in the house with Puna, who, together with his wife, have paid every attention to make us comfortable ; for which I return my unfeigned thanks, being the only compensation I can make them at present. (Signed) "B.Chase." A short time after this I received a letter from Captain Chase, speaking in the strongest terms of the kindness he had experienced, and inform ing me that he had committed the cargo and the stores of the vessel to the native teachers ; but, as they were not acquainted with the rela tive value of money, he requested me to take the first opportunity of selling the property, and transmitting the proceeds to the President of the Marine Insurance Company in America. Some two or three months subsequently to this unfortunate occurrence, a trading vessel arrived at Tahiti. The captain, hearing of the wreck of the Falcon at Rurutu, and that there were only native Missionaries at the island, imagined that he could easily deceive them, and obtain the property ; and, therefore, instead of coming to Raiatea, and making a fair purchase of me, he raised his anchor, and steered direct for Rurutu. On landing he was welcomed by the native Missionary, to whom he stated that he had come for the oil belonging to the late Fal con. The Missionary asked him if he had not a letter from Beni. " Certainly," replied the captain, " but I have come from my ship with out it ; I will return for it immediately." He went off to his vessel, and wrote an order, with which he returned to the shore : and, affirming that it was from Captain Chase, he put it into the hands of the Missionary. The natives are very unsophisticated at times, in the expression of their sentiments; and, looking the captain significantly in the face, the teacher, in his broken English, said, " You a liar, you a thief, you want to steal this property — you no have it." The captain, being much enraged at this salutation, or more probably at being disap pointed of his expected booty, began to bluster and storm. The teacher, however, took the captain by tbe hand, led him into his house, then opened his native journal, in which he had taken the precaution to get Captain Chase to write, and, placing the forged paper by the side of this writing, he repeated his charge — "You a liar, you a thief, you shall not have this property." The captain threatened to go on board, load his cannon, and take it by force. He left the shore in anger ; but, instead of car rying his threat into execution, he hoisted his sails and took his departure. We never ascer tained from whence he came, nor whither he went. This circumstance shows that the con- duet of civilized visiters is not, at all times, cal culated to raise the European character in the estimation of the natives. It shows, also, that the natives are not destitute of good sound common sense ; while at the same time it exhi bits, in a striking light, the advantages the people have derived from education. Captain Chase rewarded the natives for the assistance they rendered, in saving the cargo and stores of the vessel, by giving them a portion of the oil. They immediately formed a Native Missionary Society, and contributed a considerable part of what they had thus ob tained in aid of the funds of the institution from whose operations they had derived so much advantage ; and, in «, visit I paid them some time after, they presented me with a set of bills for 66?., which they had received from the captain to whom they had sold their contribu tions ! It was with much pleasure that I trans mitted this expression of their gratitude to the Treasurer of the Society. This island was visited by the Deputation,* some twelve or fifteen months after the intro duction of the Gospel ; respecting which, in their communications, they remark, " Now the designs of God, in sending us winds which we thought adverse, were explained, in affording us an opportunity of visiting this beautiful little island. When we reached it, we were not certain what island it was, but were greatly surprised to see several neat-looking white houses at the head of the bay. From this we concluded that the Gospel had reached its shores. A pier, a quarter of a mile in length, had been constructed of vast coral blocks, as at some of the Society Islands, which afforded a convenient landing-place. We were kindly in vited to the houses of the Missionaries, when we received every possible attention from them and from the natives, who supplied us with baked pigs, fowls, and yams in profusion. * The Rev. Dr. Tyermnn. and G. Bennct, Esq., sent by the Directors to visit all these stations. 14 CHAPEL AT RURUTU— INTERVIEW WITH TAMATOA. " Besides the two comfortable houses of the Missionaries, we were surprised to find a large place of worship, eighty feet by thirty-six, wattled, plastered, well floored, and seated, — built within a twelvemonth, at the expense of great labour, by these industrious people, under the direction of the two native Missionaries, who performed a great part of the work with their own hands. Mr. Ellis preached several times to the people, when every individual in the island attended. Many of the chiefs were dressed in European clothing, and all were attired in the most decent and becoming man ner. In the house of God no congregation could have behaved with more propriety; all was solemnity. " Here our eyes were struck, and our hearts affected, by the appearance of certain simple yet signal trophies of ' the word of God' which in these islands is really going forth conquering and to conquer. These were ' spears,' not in deed ' beaten into pruning-hooks,' but converted into staves to support the balustrade of the pulpit staircase : for the people here ' learn war no more ;' but all, submitting to the Prince of Peace, have cast away their instruments of cruelty with their idols. " Not a vestige of idolatry was to be seen, not a god was to be found in the island. So great a change effected in so short a time is almost beyond credibility ; but we witnessed it with our own eyes, and exclaimed, ' What hath God wrought!' " By the remarkable success that had attended the introduction ofthe Gospel to Rurutu, ourown minds, as well as those of our people, were power fully awakened to the great importance of ex tending the benefits and blessings of the Gospel ; and, under the excited and delightful feelings thus produced, we, with our native teachers, took an affectionate leave of our people, and beloved colleagues, Mr. and Mrs. Threlkeld, and steered for the Hervey Islands. On the arrival of the vessel at Aitutaki, we were very soon surrounded by canoes ; the natives were exceedingly noisy, and presented in their persons and manners all the wild features of savage life. Some were tatooed froni head to foot ; some were painted most fantasti cally with pipe-clay and yellow and red-ochre ; others were smeared all over with charcoal ; and in this state were dancing, shouting, and exhibiting the most frantic gestures. We in vited the chief Tamatoa.on board the vessel. A number of his people followed him. Finding that I could converse readily in their language, I informed the chief of what had taken place in the Tahitian and Society Islands with respect to the overthrow of idolatry. He asked me, very significantly, where great Tangaroa was ! I told him that he, with all the other gods, was burned. He then inquired where Koro of Raiatea was ! I replied, that he too was con sumed with fire ; and that I had brought two teachers to instruct him and his people in the word and knowledge of the true God, that he and they also might be induced to abandon and destroy their idols, as others had done. On my introducing the teachers to him, he asked me if they would accompany him to the shore. I replied in the affirmative, and proposed that they should remain with him. He seized them with delight, and saluted them most heartily by rubbing noses, which salutation he continued for some time. On the chief promising me that he would treat the teachers with kindness, and afford them protection, taking with them their little store, they got into his large canoe, and the natives paddled off to the land, ap parently greatly delighted with their treasure. We had with us our only child, a fine boy about four years of age. He was the first European child they had seen, and attracted so much notice, that every native wished to rub noses with the little fellow. They expressed their sorrow that so young and lovely a child " should be exposed to the dangers ofthe wide- spreading boisterous ocean," and begged hard that I would give him to them. I asked them what they would do with him, for I feared they were cannibals. The chief replied, that they would take the greatest care of him, and make him king. As, however, neither his mother nor myself were ambitious of royal honours for our dear boy, we declined their offer. The people became clamorous in their demands for the child, and a good deal of whispering going on among them, with the significant gestures of first looking at the child, then over the side of the vessel, his mother was induced to hasten with him into the cabin, lest they should snatch him from her, leap with him into the sea, and swim to the shore. In the course of conversa tion with the chief, I learned that several islands, of which I had heard om- natives speak, when reciting their legendary tales, were not far distant, and that some of them were very populous, especially Rarotonga. This informa tion much increased in my estimation the in terest of the Aitutaki Mission. Thus it will appear that the year 1821 was fraught with important events. It was, in fact, a period of great things. In this year our native Missionary Society was formed, and our first Missionary meeting held. In this year also our Missionary interest was excited by a striking providence, which ended in the utter renunciation of idolatry, and the reception of the Gospel, by the inhabitants of Rurutu. In the same year, too, by distressing afflictions, which we deeply deplored at the time, opera tions for extending the boundaries of the Redeemer's kingdom were commenced, which have been attended with the most delightful results, and which have been continued with great success ever since. This is the more remarkable, because, on account of health, we expected that my labours in that part of the Missionary field were about to terminate ; for we had actually made prepa rations for returning to England in the vessel that brought home the Missionary contributions. But, feeling a reluctance to abandon the work, we determined to try the effect of a visit to New South Wales. Thus we are able to recognise the gracious PROVIDENTIAL OPENING— TRADITION ABOUT RAROTONGA. 15 hand of God in all that has occurred. We little thought at the time to what these things would grow. But He in whose work we were engaged is the Wonderful Counsellor, the government is upon his shoulders, and he over rules all human events for the furtherance of his designs of mercy. We shall find much pleasure, as we proceed, in noticing the numer ous and striking interpositions of God on our behalf. CHAPTER IV. Mission to Aitutaki— Tradition about Rarotonga— Voy age of Messrs. Bourne and the author — Success at Aitutaki— Our intercourse with the People — Informa tion about Rarotonga — Search for it — Papeiha's Narra tive. Haviug derived much advantage from a few months' residence in New South Wales, we returned, with recruited vigour, to our delight ful labours, after an absence of about eight months, and were cordially welcomed by our beloved brethren and people. In April, 1822, we received letters from Papeiha and Vahapata, stating the dangers to which they had been exposed, and the partial success that had attended their efforts, and re questing that two more labourers might be sent to assist them. The vessel which brought these had touched at Aitutaki on her way from the Society Islands to New South Wales, to deliver some books, presents, and letters, which we sent there by her. With these Faaori, » native of Raiatea, went on shore. The idola ters crowded around him seized him, led him before the marae, and formally delivered him up to their gods. Faaori, looking up at an im mense idol, struck it, and said to the idolaters, " Why do you not burn this evil spirit, and this marae ! They are Satan's : why do you suffer them to remain! What you are now regarding is all deceit." The idolaters replied, "We are all ignorant ; we have been kept in darkness by Satan a long time, and we do not know the truth." Faaori answered, " This is the truth that your teachers have brought you ; receive it, and be saved." Upon hearing which, they said to him, "When you return, tell Viriamu, (Mr. Williams,) if he will visit us, we will bam our idols, destroy our maraes, and receive the word of the true God." Together with this commu nication, we received the very important infor mation, that there were several natives at Aitu taki, from an adjacent island, called Rarotonga, who had embraced the Gospel, and were very anxious to return to their own island, with teachers to instruct their countrymen in the same blessed truths. These circumstances appeared to us providential openings for the introduction of the Gospel into the whole group of islands, respecting several of which I received informa tion when I first visited Aitutaki. Of Rarotonga, also, we had heard much from our own people ; for in many of their legendary tales, especially in those of their voyagers, Rarotonga is fre quently mentioned. In conversation with an old priest, who at that time was a decided and excellent Christian, respecting the situation of Rarotonga, he in formed me tliat there was a tradition that it was formerly united to the southern extremity of Raiatea, but that the gods had carried it away. I asked him whither they were said to have conveyed it % when he replied, that he did not know, but it was believed they had taken it to the south. Upon this, I inquired the reason of the gods carrying away so valuable a neighbour as an island and its inhabitants ! and he informed me that the natives of Raro tonga, in the exercise of their piety, had made a large drum, called Tai-moana, or the Sounder of the Seas, v/hich they sent by the hands of two priests, as a present to Oro, the god of war, whose residence was the great marae, at Opoa, in Raiatea, and that after the priests from Rarotonga had dedicated Tai-moana, some untoward circumstances occurred, which in duced the Raiateans to kill them. The gods were so much enraged that persons who had brought so valuable a present should be killed, that they took up the island, with its population, and carried it completely away. From some parts of this fabulous legend we were convinced that the island was in existence, and that it was an island of considerable importance. From another tradition, which stated what was universally believed, we learned that a chief, named Iouri, many years before, had built a large native pahi, or ship ; and, being of an enterprising spirit, he determined to go in search of other countries, when, after traversing the ocean for a length of time, he reached Raro tonga ; from which place he returned in safety to Raiatea, bringing with him a female, who became the wife of Tamatoa, the king of that island, and an ancestor of the late excellent chief of that name. From hence, also, Iouri brought a quantity of mahi, or preserved bread fruit, which was dedicated to the god Oro, at the celebrated marae at Opoa, in Raiatea, the grand emporium of idolatry to Tahiti, the Society, and the surrounding islands ; and from that time it became an object of ambition with every adventurous chief to discover other lands, and, on his return, to bring some article of value to his own island. The information thus obtained was, that Rarotonga was a large and beautiful island, with a population so great, that it was divided into nine-and-twenty districts. This traditional information, as to the existence of the island, was now confirmed beyond the possibility of a doubt, as there were several people at Aitutaki from the very island, anxiously waiting an opportunity to return home, to make known to their deluded friends and countrymen the wonderful truths of which they were in possession. After consultation and prayer with my es teemed colleagues, Messrs. Threikeld and Bourne, it was determined that Mr. Bourne and myself should embrace the first opportunity of proceeding to the island of Aitutaki, by hiring a vessel for the purpose ; that we should also take a number of native Missionaries with us, search for Rarotonga, and attempt to introduce 16 ENTIRE OVERTHROW OF IDOLATRY. the Gospel into every island of the Hervey group. And, little as we think of it now, it was a great undertaking at that time, when nothing accurately was known of the islands or their inhabitants. Four Missionaries, with their wives, were selected from our church at Raiatea, and two from Tahaa. These were set apart for their work by a solemn service on the evening pre ceding our departure. Our people took so lively an interest in the undertaking, that, by their willing contributions, they completely equipped the Missionaries for the voyage, and for their stations, without any expense to the Society. After aboutfive days' pleasant sail, we reached Aitutaki. A number of canoes crowded around us, rilled with men, every one of whom was anxious to get on board our ship. We had, however, determined not to allow any canoes alongside, until we had seen either the chief or one of the teachers ; for, had the natives been hostile, they could easily have captured our small vessel. We received a grateful salutation from every canoe that approached us. Some of the natives cried out, " Good is the word of God : it is now well with Aitutaki ! The good word has taken root at Aitutaki!" Finding, however, that we did not repose entire confi dence in their assertions, some held up their hats,* others their spelling-books, to convince us of the truth of what they stated. As we approached the settlement, we beheld, from the vessel, a flag-staff with a white flag flying, which satisfied us that the teachers were alive. At length the chiefs canoe came alongside, when we learned from Tebati, one of the first who embraced the Gospel, that the maraes were burned ; that the idols which had escaped the general conflagration were in the possession of the teachers ; that the profession of Christi anity was general, so much so, indeed, that not a single idolater remained; and that a large chapel was erected, nearly 200 feet in length, plastered, and awaiting my arrival to open it. This news was as delightful as it was unex pected. When the teachers came on board, they not only confirmed all that had been told us, but added, that the Sabbath was regarded as a sacred day, no work of any kind being done on it ; that all the people, men, women, and children, attended Divine service ; and that family prayer was very general throughout the island. At healing this good news, joy beamed in every countenance, and gratitude glowed in every heart. We hastened to the shore to be eye-witnesses of what had been effected. The natives crowded around the boat, and having to drag it a considerable distance, they amused and delighted us ; for, instead of the unsightly gesticulations and lascivious songs with which I was greeted on my first visit, some were now spelling long words, and others were repeating portions of the catechism, or a prayer ; another asking a blessing on his food ; and others sing- * The European-shaped hat was worn only by the Christian party, the idolaters retaining their heathen head-dresses, war-caps, &c, ing a verse of a hymn : indeed, every one ap peared anxious to show what progress he had made in the new religion. Shortly after landing, we convened a meeting of the chiefs and people, at which we expressed our joy at hearing and seeing that they had demolished their maraes, embraced the Gospel of Christ, and erected so fine and large a house for the worship ofthe one living and true God. We also informed them that we had brought two more teachers, who, with their wives, would reside with them, and to whom they must show kindness. We further intimated, that, if agree able, we would open the chapel on the following morning,'when they must lay aside their heathen ish ornaments, wash themselves clean, and clothe themselves decently ; to which they consented. We asked them if they had any reply to make. They said no, but wished that we would continue to talk with them, for they were delighted to hear us. After this interview, we went to see the chapel. It was a fine building, from 180 to 200 feet in length, and almost thirty feet wide, wattled and plastered, and built after the model of our chapel at Raiatea. The pulpit was rather sin gular, both in its size, construction, and appear ance, being about two yards square, made of wattling, and plastered with the same materials as the walls of the chapel. I gazed upon the building with wonder and delight. We then went to the teachers' house, and found it to be a neat, well-built cottage, plastered and divided into five rooms. We commended them sin cerely for the diligence they had evinced, and for the good example they had thus set to the people. Posts, for houses on a similar plan, were collected in every part of the settlement ; many dwellings were already erected, and others were in progress. Bedsteads had been made, and hung with white native cloth, in imitation of those of their teachers. Little did I expect to see so much accomplished in so short a time. Eighteen months ago they were the wildest people I had ever witnessed : now they had become mild and docile, diligent and kind. Next day, while in the midst of an interesting conversation, our attention was arrested by a ringing sound. This was produced by striking an axe with a stone, which contrivance was their substitute for a bell. The ringer, or rather striker, was followed through the settlement by* a number of men and women, decently dressed in white cloth, and, when the congregation was assembled, we entered the spacious chapel. The six teachers, with their wives, together with Papeiha amd Vahapata, took their seats in front of the pulpit. As they were all clothed in European dresses, their appearance excited much surprise and interest; indeed, it was to the Aitutakians an ocular demonstration of the beneficial effects of Christianity. My esteemed colleague commenced the service with reading, singing, and prayer. I then preached my first sermon to them, from one of the most delightful texts in the Bible, "God so loved the world," &c. ; and I may add, at all the islands I have visited, from that time to the present, my first address has invariably been founded, either upon INCIDENTS AT AITUTAKI. 17 that passage, or upon 1 Tim. i. 15, " This is a faithful saying," &c. It was, indeed, a delight ful sight to behold from 1500 to 2000 people just emerged from heathenism, of the most uncultivated appearance, some with long beards, others decorated with gaudy ornaments, but all behaving with the greatest decorum, and attend ing, with glistening eyes and open rhouth, to the wonderful story, that- " God so loved the world, as to give his only-begotten Son." Many of them, however, were dressed very neatly ; and I could not help contrasting their ap pearance with that which they presented on our first visit. At that time, also, they were constantly killing, and even eating each other, for they were cannibals ; but now they were all, with one accord, bending their knees together in the worship of the God of peace and love. The grandfather of the young king expressed a wish to accompany us to Raiatea ; and, as it would afford him an opportunity of witnessing the beneficial effects of the Gospel in the Society Islands, and be a source of much gratification to our own people, we thought it desirable to accede to his request. We were desirous also that the young king, his grandson, might ac company him ; for we had an impression that they might be of great service to us at the vari ous heathen islands which we intended to visit. The natives of Rarotonga also were desired to prepare themselves for their voyage. The Aitutakians endeavoured to dissuade us from going to Rarotonga, by assuring us that the Rarotongans were a most ferocious people, that they were horrid cannibals, and exceedingly treacherous ; and they feared, if we went, that we should lose our lives. This was very im portant, although discouraging information. Wishing for a few quiet hours to consult re specting our future proceedings, we determined to spend the evening on board the ship. The gods and bundles of gods, which had escaped destruction, thirty-one in number, were carried in triumph to the boat; and we came off to the imhi ¦^^^^^^: -* -frX| ^*-l2fex^^^lB ¦Ilili* vessel with the trophies of our bloodless con quest, " rejoicing as one that findeth great spoil." After much consultation on the subject, we determined, at all events, to go in search of Rarotonga, concluding that the work must have a commencement ; that it would, at all times, be attended with danger ; that natives of the island had been providentially thrown in our way ; that we had come for the purpose of attempting to introduce the Gospel among them; and that, therefore, after taking every precaution which prudence suggested for our own safety, we would commit ourselves to the protection of Him in whose work we were engaged. We concluded, also, to take Papeiha with us, as he would be of great service in our intercourse with the people. During the time we spent at Aitutaki, many incidents occurred, of which the following is a specimen : — • While walking through the settlement, we saw two grim-looking gods in a more dishonour able situation than they had been wont to occupy, for they were sustaining upon then- heads the whole weight of the roof of a cook ing-house. Wishing to make them more useful, we offered to purchase them from their former worshipper. He instantly propped up the house, took out the idols, and threw them down ; and, while they were prostrate on the ground, he No. 2. gave them a kick, saying, " There — your reign is at an end." On receiving two fish-hooks, he was highly delighted. What a revolution of sentiment and feeling ! A few months before, this man was a deluded worshipper of these senseless stocks ! After giving the teachers such advice and instructions as we deemed necessary, and ex horting tbe chief and people to abandon all thoughts of war, to treat captains and crews of ships with kindness, to be upright and honest in their dealings with them, to be kind to their teachers, and diligent in attending to their in structions, we took our leave of Aitutaki with feelings of the liveliest and most devout grati tude to God, having derived from the visit great encouragement to proceed in our work. We traversed the ocean for several days in search of Rarotonga, but without success. Dur ing this time I received from Papeiha an in teresting detail of the dangers to which the teachers had been exposed, the labours in which they had been engaged, and the circumstances by which the people of Aitutaki had been in duced to abandon idolatry. It would occupy too much space to nan-ate more than a few particulars. On landing, they were led to the maraes, and given up formally to the gods ; the poor deluded people, little imagining that, in a few short months, by the instrumentality of the c 18 FAVOURABLE IMPRESSIONS. TBmfw very persons they were thus dedicating to them, " theirgods would be famished out of the land." Subsequently, war had thrice broken out, and all their property had been stolen from them. But, when I asked Papeiha if they were not discouraged by these frequent wars — " No," he replied, " we knew that all was iii the hand of God ; and we believed that he would make it a means of overthrowing idolatry in the island." The first favourable impression appears to have been produced by a tour which the teach ers made of the island. They stayed a few days at every district, conversing with the in habitants, and teaching them the alphabet, and the Lord's Prayer. On reaching the district of Tautu, they held, in the presence of a great assemblage of people, an argument with an old priest, who vociferated, " Te-erui made all lands, he made Aitutaki ; and after he had made it he gave it its present form, by moulding it with his hands." The teachers answered that it was not so ; that God alone had power to create, and that he made Aitutaki, and every other land. The priest continued vociferating about the greatness of Te-erui, and asserted that he was the first man. The teachers asked him who was Te-erui' s parent. He replied, " O Te-tareva." They then inquired of him whence Te-tareva came : he said, " From Avaiki." Wishing to know where Avaiki was ; he said, " It is beneath : Te-tareva climbed up from it ; and because he arrived at the top he was called by that name ;" whereupon the teachers said " This land, then, was made before Te-tareva arrived!" " Most certainly," replied the priest. " Then," continued they, " how can Te-erui be the maker of a land which you say was made before even his parent Te-tareva came up from beneath !" This appeared to perplex the priest, and he was silent. They then addressed the assembled multitude, upon the being of God, affirming, that before anything was made he only existed, and that he was without beginning, and is without end. • From this topic they pro ceeded to speak of angels, and of one portion of them falling from their original happiness, which was followed by a detailed account of the crea tion of the world. All this was new to the people ; and the interest excited by the an nouncement appears to have been intense ; for, if the slightest noise was made, there was a general cry of " Be still, be still, let us hear." Thus encouraged, the teachers went on to describe the creation of our first parents ; their being placed in the garden of Eden ; their trans gression, with its consequences ; and the love of God in giving his dear Son to die a sacrifice for sinful man. On hearing which they ex claimed, with one accord, " Surely this is the truth ; ours is all deceit." From that time many began to listen attentively, and to believe what they heard. CHAPTER V. Papeiha's Narrative continued — Remarkable Incidents at Tahiti — Effect upon the Aitutakians at seeing Lime burnt — Unsuccessful search for Rarotonga— Go to Mangaia — Incidents there — Abandon it, in consequence of the cruel Treatment the Missionaries' Wives ex perience. The progress of Christianity at Aitutaki appears to have been gradual, the converts at times suffering much from the rage of their heathen countrymen, until the month of December, 1822, rather more than a year after my first visit ; when two circumstances contributed to the utter overthrow of idolatry in this island. The first was the arrival of the vessel from Raiatea, which we had promised to send. The teachers had told the people that a ship would come to inquire after their welfare, and to bring them presents and information from their friends. This was believed by a few ; but the greater part called them " Two logs of drift wood, washed on shore by the waves of the ocean, " and said that no ship would ever come to inquire after them. Her arrival, however, set the matter at rest ; and, as the captain showed kindness to the chiefs, and made several of them presents of axes and other useful things, their opposition to the teachers was not a little subdued.. There being no quadrupeds in the island, but a few millions of rats, we sent from Raiatea a number of pigs and goats; with a variety of useful articles, which our people had contributed . The teachers gave the pigs and goats to the king's grandfather, and he, on the following morning, distributed them among the various chiefs of the island. A powerful impression was thus very generally produced in favour of Christianity. " Behold," said the people, " we INCIDENTS AT TAHITI. 19 called these men drift-wood, and they have rich friends, who have sent an English ship to in quire after them, and bring them property, such as we never saw before! We ridiculed and called them liars, and behold they are men of truth !" A few days after the vessel had sailed a general wish was expressed by the people to renounce heathenism, and place them selves under Christian instruction. The old grandfather of Tamatoa, however, was firm in his determination to adhere to his heathen super stitions ; for being, at this time, in the midst of an idolatrous feast, which was of several weeks' continuance, notwithstanding the wishes of the people, the old chieftain determined to remain at the marae and complete the sacred ceremonies. While yet there, a beloved daugh ter was taken dangerously ill. The priests were immediately on the alert, presenting nume rous offerings, and invoking the gods from 'morning to evening, day after day, in order to induce them to restore the child to health. The disease, however, increased, and the girl died. The chief was so much affected at the death of his daughter, that he determined at once to abandon the gods who were so ungrate ful as to requite his zeal with such manifest unkindness, and therefore sent his son early next morning to set fire to his marae. Two other maraes near it caught fire, and were also consumed. From thence the son, enraged with the gods for destroying his sister, proceeded to a large marae, before which the people were presenting their offerings, and attempted to set it on fire ; but was prevented by the wor shippers, who seized and dragged him away. By such circumstances does God, in number less instances, work upon the minds of men. This remark may be illustrated by two import ant incidents which occurred at Tahiti, one of which resembled that which took place at Aitutaki. *" When Pomare, the king of Tahiti, first de termined to embrace Christianity, and attempt the introduction of it among his people, before taking any decided steps, he convened a num ber of powerful and influential chiefs, and stated his wishes to them. Very many made strong objections to the proposed, innovation ; but Tenania, and his wife, who were reigning chiefs of a neighbouring island, cordially ap proved of the king's proposition, stating that they themselves had almost come to a deter mination to burn their god. This feeling had been induced by the death of a beloved and only daughter, who was to inherit their titles and estates; and, as might be expected, was the object in which their affections centered, and on whom their hopes were placed. She was a fine girl, about fifteen or sixteen years of age ; and when she was unexpectedly taken ill, every priest of note, far and near, was applied to, and every god propitiated with the most costly offerings which it was in the power of this mighty chief to command. Still the dis ease increased, and the child died ; and as this happened only a short time before Pomare made his important proposition, Tenania and his wife were well prepared by it to enter most cordially into the king's wishes ; for they were bitterly enraged against the gods they had in vain endeavoured to conciliate. Thus Pomare had the influence of a powerful chief on his side, on the very first announcement of his in tentions. Tapoa, another chief of equal name, was present at this important consultation. He was a mighty warrior, the Buonaparte of the Tahitian and Society Islands ; and, having conquered all the latter, had come to Tahiti, ostensibly to assist Pomare in regaining his ascendancy in that island, but actually to con quer it for himself. Tapoa was a bigoted idolater, and, at the meeting in question, ex pressed his full determination to oppose, in every possible way, so impious an innovation as the destruction of the gods. Although ill at the time, he removed immediately to Tahiti, for the purpose of making arrangements for the battles he expected to fight ; but disease made rapid inroads upon his constitution, and he died very shortly after he had attended the meeting of his brother chieftains. It is the general opinion of intelligent natives to the present day, that, had Tapoa lived, Christianity could not then have been introduced among the people. These events, therefore, show us that, although the age of miracles has ceased, God has ample means of effecting the purposes of his love by the ordinary interpositions of his providence, which are equally mighty to the pulling down of the strongholds of heathen superstition, and in removing obstacles to the progress of his truth. As at Tahiti, so at Aitutaki, the downfal of idolatry was accelerated by ordinary occurrences, in which, however, a Divine agency was too conspicuous to escape observation. So general and powerful was the impression on the minds of the people of Aitutaki, by the circumstances I have narrated, that, on the Sabbath day after the death of the chief's daughter, the people of several districts came, cast their idols at the feet of the teachers, and professed themselves wor shippers of Jehovah. During the week the rest followed ; so that, by the next Sabbath, not a professional idolater remained in the whole island. On the third Sabbath in Decem ber, just about fifteen months after the teachers landed on their shores, they had the delightful satisfaction of seeing the whole of the inhabitants convened to worship the one living and true God. Having no house which would contain so great a number of people, they assembled under the shade of a grove of Barringtonia and mope, or chestnut-trees, whose interwoven leaves and thick foliage were at intervals pene trated by the rays of the sun, while the cooling breeze from the ocean swept softly among the branches. At the conclusion of the services of this memorable day, Papeiha requested the people to attend a general meeting which was to be held on the following morning, when subjects of importance would be brought before them. At the appointed hour, the whole of the in habitants of the island assembled, and, after 02 20 VISIT TO MANGAIA. having spoken to them of the immense labour they formerly bestowed in the erection of their maraes in the worship of their false gods, he exhorted them to let their " strength, devoted- ness, and steadfastness in the service of the true God, far exceed." He then made the two following, propositions : — first, " That all the maraes in the island should be burned, and that all the remaining idols should be brought to him, in order that he might forward them to us at Raiatea, that we, with our people, might also rejoice in the triumphs of the Word." The second proposition was, " That they should commence immediately building a house in which to worship Jehovah." To both these proposals the assembled multitude yielded their cordial assent. As soon as the meeting broke up, a. general conflagration of the maraes took place ; and so complete was the destruction, that, on the following morning, not a single idol temple remained unmutilated. The whole population then came in pro cession, district after district, the chief and priest leading the way, and the people following them, bearing their rejected idols, which they laid at the teachers' feet, and then received from them in return a few copies of the Gospels and elementary books. Thus were the labours of two comparatively weak instruments rendered " mighty through God" in effecting the utter overthrow of an idolatry, dark, debasing, aud sanguinary, which had shrouded the by-gone generations of this verdant little island, and held them bound in its fetters. They commenced, immediately, the erection of their chapel. The construction of the Aitu taki houses being different from those of Tahiti, and not well adapted for a large building, the teachers had to attend and direct the builders in every particular. When the frame-work was r.p, they took a reed's length of thatch and thatched up to the ridge pole ; and, when the people saw how it was done, they were so diligent in their good work, that in two days the whole roof, 200 feet in length, was com pleted. Having been taught at Raiatea the art of making lime from coral rock, the teachers de termined to plaster the chapel, and therefore desired the chiefs to send their people to cut down a large portion of fire-wood ; and when this was done, they requested them to send to the sea for a quantity of coral rock, which was brought to the shore and piled upon the wood. The natives did as they were desired, but could not imagine what all this singular process of preparation was to effect. At length, the teach ers requested them to set light to the fire- wood ; and, as soon as it began to blaze, they could contain themselves no longer, but commenced shouting, " Oh these foreigners, they are roast ing stones ! they are roasting stones ! come, hurricane, and blow down our bananas and our bread-fruit ; we shall never suffer from famine again ; these foreigners are teaching us to roast stones." The Missionaries told them to wait pa tiently, and they would seethe result. At day light the following morning they hastened to the spot, and, to their utter astonishment, the burnt coral was reduced to a beautiful powder ; and they were so surprised and delighted at its softness and whiteness, that they actually whitewashed their hats and native garments, and strutted about the settlement, admiring each other exceedingly, A space in the chapel being wattled, the teach ers mixed up a portion of the " roasted stone" with some sand, and plastered it on the space which had been prepared, taking care to cover it up with mats, and to send the people away, lest, prompted by their curiosity, they should scratch it down before it became hard. Early on the next morning they all hastened to see this wonderful sight. The chiefs and common people, men, women, and children, hurried to tbe spot ; and. when the covering was removed, a sheet of beautifully white plastering was pre sented to their astonished view. All pressed forward to examine it ; some smelling it, some scratching it, whilst others took stones and struck it, exclaiming, as they retired, " Wonderful, won derful ! The very stones in the sea, and the sand on the shore, become good property, in the hands of those who worship the true God, and regard his good word." Thus singular and beneficial was the impression produced by the introduction of useful arts among this people. Not succeeding, after six or eight days' search, in discovering Rarotonga, we steered for Man gaia. On reaching the island, we descried a number of the natives, on a sandy beach, waving a white flag, which is a signal universally under stood in the islands ofthe Pacific, as intimating a wish for friendly intercourse, or, rather, that the parties waving it should be approached. .We replied by a similar signal, to induce them to come off to us ; but as they showed no dis position to accept our invitation, a boat was lowered from the vessel, and Papeiha, with two other teachers, approached the shore. We gave them strict injunctions not to land, but to con verse with the natives from the boat ; stating who we were, and the object of our visit, and to endeavour by all means to induce the chief of the island to come off with them. The boat returned without success. After some time two canoes approached us, and our boat went to wards them ; on perceiving which, they paddled away as fast as it was in their power, leaped on shore, seized their spears, and placed them selves in an attitude of defence. The boat again returned without accomplishing the object of our wishes. The natives came off a third time, when we sent our boat again towards them, and, by the exhibition of knives and mother-of- pearl oyster-shells, they were induced to allow themselves to be brought to the vessel. After we had so far succeeded, we found equal diffi culty in getting any one of them to ascend the ship, although we presented to them the chiefs from Aitutaki, and the people of Rarotonga, who used all their eloquence to convince them that there was nothing to fear, for that ours was " a ship of God." After much persuasion, one man ventured on board ; and the other, as soon as he perceived that the canoe was unloosed from the boat, paddled off in great glee, and BRUTALITY OF THE NATIVES. 21 appeared determined not again to place himself in so much jeopardy, by approaching the vessel. The man who had ventured on board was much agitated : and every muscle in his Herculean frame appeared in motion. He inquired par ticularly the vessel's name, saying, that it was the second they had seen; Tute (Captain Cook's) being the first. Being near the landing-place, we proposed that he should accompany the teachers to the shore ; and, apparently de lighted with the proposition, with hasty steps he descended the ship's side into his canoe, under a pretence of throwing out the water ; but, finding himself once more safely seated in his own little bark, he untied the rope and paddled away as if for his life, not staying even to gaze upon the dangers he had escaped. Thus our hopes were again blasted. In a con sultation upon the subject with the teachers, Papeiha said to us that he should have no objection to land among them. There being no openings in the reef, through which the boat could pass to the shore, with a readiness and devotedness that heightened him in the estima tion of every one present, he offered to leap into the sea, and swim through the surf. Being accoutred for his daring exploit, he went into the boat, and, on reaching the reef, which ex tended but a few yards from the shore, he per ceived that the natives were all armed, some with stones in their slings, and others with their spears poised, ready in a moment to defend their island against the expected invasion. Papeiha addressed them, saying, that we were peaceably disposed, and that he was coming on shore ; but unless they would tie their spears in bundles with their slings, he would not venture among them. They immediately did as he proposed, when this devoted man dived into the sea, and was born on the top of a billow to the shore. Encouraged by his kind reception, he stated to the chiefs and the as sembled multitude who we were, and what was the object of our visit ; and also informed them that we had with us two teachers and their wives, whom it was our wish to settle among them. They told him that they should be glad to receive instruction, and requested that he would go to the vessel, and return with the teachers immediately. Papeiha accordingly came off, and informed us of all that had taken place ; stating, at the same time, that he thought they were an inoffensive people, and that no danger was to be apprehended from them. Some property was immediately put into the boat; and two teachers, with their wives, attended by our veteran pioneer, went to the shore. By the time of their return, the natives had unloosed their spears, and again presented a formidable appearance, but, upon being desired to bind them up, as they had done before, they did so, and our people landed. No sooner had the teachers reached the shore, than there was a general seizure of their persons and property. One of them had a saw, which the natives grasped, broke into three pieces, and tied to their ears as ornaments. A box of bonnets, intended as presents for the chiefs wives, was dragged through the water. Of their bedsteads, one took one post, another another, and ran off with their booty. A number of bamboos of cocoa-nut oil were landed, which they poured so profusely on each other's heads, that it streamed down their bodies till they glistened as they stood in the sunbeams. Among other things, there were two pigs, animals they had never seen before. These were taken by a chief, who, casting off his own garments, de corated the pigs in the insignia of chieftainship, and sent them into the presence of their majesties, the gods. But what completed the catastrophe "was their conduct to the poor females, the teachers' wives, whom they carried into the woods, and were proceeding to treat with great brutality, when, terrified at the report of a small cannon which we fired off from the vessel, they ran away. We immediately sent the boat, and brought our people off to the vessel ; and cer tainly their appearance was truly deplorable. Their hats and bonnets had been torn from their heads : they had been dragged through water and through mud, and their shirts and gowns were hanging in ribands about them. Papeiha upbraided the chief with his perfidious conduct in inviting them on shore, and then suffering them to be ill-treated. He told him, also, that they, like himself and his people , were formerly ignorant of the true God, and the way of sal vation by Jesus Christ ; but that Christians from England had come to instruct them, and that now they were desirous of imparting the know ledge of the same precious truths to others. The chief wept, and assured him of his sorrow ; but stated, that, in his island, " all heads being of an equal height," his influence was not sufficient to protect them ; and therefore, much as he himself wished them to stay, he would rather they did not come on shore again. The chief, it must be allowed, did everything in his power to protect them, and succeeded in rescu ing one of the females when in the extremity of peril. The husbands, being thrown and held down by the natives, were prevented from ren dering any assistance to their wives ; and our valuable Missionary, Papeiha, nearly lost his life, for they put a tiputa* over his head, and commenced twisting it for the purpose of strang ling him ; but happily he had the presence of mind to introduce his hand into the aperture, which preserved his throat. Thus our pleasing anticipations were frus trated, and our poor people suffered " the loss of all things," in attempting to introduce the Gospel into Mangaia. We left the island with feelings of deep regret, but resolved to embrace the first opportunity of sending two single men, who, we had every reason to hope, would suffer no other incon venience than the loss of their property. Ac cordingly a, few months after our return to Raiatea, as the Deputation intended to touch at * The tiputa is, like the Spanish poncho, a piece of cloth about three quarters of ayard wide and three yards Ion™ with a slit in the centre, through which the head is put" so that the garment hangs down -before and behind. 22 CONVERSION OF THE KING OF ATIU. Mangaia on their way to New South Wales, it was determined that some native teachers should accompany them. Davida and Tiere, two unmarried members of the church at Tahaa, offered their services to carry the Gospel to that island, and, on reaching it, these two devoted men, as Papeiha had done before them, leaped into the sea and swam to the shore, taking nothing with them but the light dresses which they wore, and a portion of the New Testament in the Tahitian language, which was carefully wrapped up and tied upon their heads. Con trary to expectation, they were kindly received, an afflicting dispensation of Providence having very much subdued the violent spirit of the . people, and prepared the way before them ; for, soon after our visit, a disease broke out which proved exceedingly fatal; the infant and the aged, the chieftain and the peasant, falling alike beneath its deadly influence. Ascribing this calamitous visitation to the vengeance of the " God ofthe strangers," whom they had ill- treated, they collected all the property which had been taken from us, and cast it into an immense cavern in one of the mountains ; making a vow to " the God of the strangers," that, " if he would suspend the execution of his vengeance, and conduct his worshippers again to their island, they would receive them kindly, and give them food to eat." Thus again we had the pleasing task of re cognising the timely interposition of an all-wise and overruling Providence, adapting the means he employs to the circumstances of the people whose minds are to be Influenced. And it must be allowed that the event just narrated was calculated to produce as powerful an im pression upon the minds of such a people, as if they had been the eye-witnesses of a miraculous display of Divine power. CHAPTER VI. Visit to Atiu — Conversion of the King — The power of Scripture Truth— The Discovery of Mauke— Introduc tion of Christianity into it and Mitiaro— Lord Byron's Testimony— Regard to the Sabbath-day by a Native Crew— Go again in search of Rarotonga. On leaving Mangaia, we steered for Atiu. To this island, our brother Missionary, Mr. Ors- rnond, had sent two teachers, some two or three months before our arrival. We found them in a most pitiable condition, having been stripped by the natives of every article of property, suf fering exceedingly from hunger, and much disheartened by their want of success. We had not been long near the island, when we per ceived a large double canoe approaching us, in the centre of which, on an elevated stage, was seated the principal chief. His person was tall and slender, and his aspect commanding. He was clothed in a white shirt, having a piece of Indian print girt around his loins ; his long and beautiful black hair hung .gracefully over his shoulders, or waved in the passing breeze, as, with the motion of his body, he kept time to the rowers. We gave him a hearty welcome on board. Our friend from Aitutaki was so full of zeal for the conversion of his brother chief tain, that as soon as he reached the deck he led him away from us, and commenced his work by informing him that the maraes of Aitutaki were demolished, the great idols burnt, and the smaller ones onboard the ship, tc be conveyed to Raiatea,_the island from which the teachers came who had instructed him. To this he added, that a large whits house made of" toka tunu," burnt or roasted stone, bad been erected, and dedi cated to the worship of Jehovah, who was the only true God. " All our offerings to our false gods," continued this now Christian chief, his countenance gleaming with animation as he spoke, " cannot procure us pardon : but God has given his Son Jesus Christ to die for us, and through Him mercy is bestowed. I am come," said he, "to advise you to receive the good word. Our gods were one formerly, mme are now all abandoned, many of them destroyed ; let us both worship one God again, but let it be the true God." In confirmation of his state ments, he led the astonished chieftain into the hold of the vessel, and exhibited to his view their once dreaded, and, as they imagined, powerful gods, which were lying there in degra dation. By some circumstance, which I do not now recollect, this chief was induced to remain on board during the night, and the following day, being Sabbath, he attended worship. In the course of my address, I read and commented upon what is said by David and Isaiah in re ference to idols. The mind of Roma-tane was powerfully impressed by these vivid represent ations of the folly of ' idolatry, especially by the words, " with part thereof he roasteth roast, and is satisfied : and the residue thereof he maketh a god, and worshippeth, it, and prayeth unto it, and saith, Deliver me, for thou art my god." Nothing could be better calculated to make an impression on the mind of an intelligent South Sea islander than these inimitable verses of inspired truth ; indeed, the effect is likely to be far greater than that produced on the mind of an English reader. The natives have two words not very much unlike, but expressive of opposite ideas, — moa and noa, the moa meaning sacred, and noa the very reverse of sacred. All that pertains to the gods is the superlative of moa; and all that pertains to food, and the cooking of food, the superlative of noa. The idea now, for the first time, darted, with irre sistible force into the mind of Roma-tane ; and he perceived at once the excessive folly of making a god and cooking food from one and the same tree ; thus uniting the two opposite extremes, the moa and the noa. The astonished chief appeared for some time lost in wonder. At length he retired and spent the whole of the night in conversation with the teachers and chiefs from Aitutaki about the wonderful truths he had heard, frequently rising up, and stamp ing with astonishment that he should have been deluded so long, and expressing his determina tion never again to worship his idol gods. HIS ZEAL AT ALITIARO. 23 " Eyes, it is true," said he, " they have, but wood cannot see ; ears they have, but wood cannot hear." Very early the following day, the teachers came to us with this pleasing intelligence ; and, in a subsequent conversation with the chief, he expressed to us his full determination to demo lish his maraes, to burn his idols, and to com mence immediately erecting a house for the worship of Jehovah. We proposed that he should accompany us to the Society Islands ; to which he objected, saying, that he should not go under the same favourable circumstances as his brother chief from Aitutaki ; besides which, he wished at once to commence the good work, and expressed a desire to purchase an axe from us, with which to cut down trees for the posts of " God's house." The chief was now in haste to leave us ; but, having heard that there were two small islands in the vicinity of Atiu, one of which was unknown to Europeans, we determined to go in search of them ; and, learn ing that Roma-tane was the chief, we proposed that he should accompany us, and use his in fluence in procuring a favourable reception for the teachers who were repulsed from Mangaia. In addition to this motive, we thought that a few days' further intercourse with us might prove beneficial to our new convert, and were therefore glad when he acceded to our proposal. The first evidence which he gave of his sincerity was an authoritative command that no person should cut and scratch their heads and faces on account of his absence ; which they commonly do, under such circumstances, with sharp stones and sharks' teeth. On our arrival at Mitiaro the king sent for the resident chief of the island, to whom he stated that the object of his visit was to exhort him and the people to burn the maraes, abandon the worship of their gods, and place themselves under the instruction of a teacher whom we were about to leave with them, and who would teach them the word and worship of the true God, Jehovah. He wished, moreover, that the house they were erecting for himself should be converted into a house of prayer, under the direction of the teacher. The people listened with astonishment, and inquired if the gods would not be all enraged, and strangle them. " No," replied the king, " it is out ofthe power of the wood, that we have adorned and called a god, to kill us." " But," said one, must we bum " Tarianuif" or Great Ears.* " Yes," replied the king, " commit him and all the evil spirits to the flames." He then requested them to behave with kindness to Taua, the teacher, and give attention to his instructions. Having asked the king if he would not come to the celebration of the great festival which he had ordered them to prepare, he replied that he should, but that it would be on different busi ness. " I shall come," said the chief, " to behpld your steadfastness in this good work, and your kindness to the teachers you have received." * The name of a god of which the king himself was the priest. Having been graciously prospered to the utmost bounds of our expectation at Mitiaro, we proceeded, with grateful hearts and excited expectations, in search of Mauke, which we succeeded in finding without much difficulty, the chief having directed us correctly. On arriving at this island, the king conducted the teacher and his wife to the shore. Tararo, the chief, with a number of the people, were wait ing on the beach to welcome their king. The first words he uttered as he leaped on shore were, " I am come to advise you to receive the word of Jehovah, the true God, and to leave with you a teacher and his wife, who will in struct you. Let us destroy our maraes, and burn all the evil spirits with fire : never let us worship them again. They are wood, which we have carved and decorated, and called gods. Here is the true God and his word, and a teacher to instruct you. The true God is Jehovah, and the true sacrifice is his Son Jesus Christ." He exhorted them also to erect a house in which to worship the true God, and to be diligent in learning his good word. After the astonishment produced by the king's address had subsided a little, the natives replied, that, as he assured them it was a " good word and brought salvation," they would receive it, and place themselves under the instruction of the teacher. Roma-tane then invited the principal chief Tararo and his wife to attend family wor ship that evening, to which they consented. After this they inquired of the king when they might expect him at the great festival which they were preparing for him ; and at another, called Takurua, at which the most obscene ceremo nies were performed. He replied, " all those infamous customs, connected with the worship of their false gods, should now be abandoned ; but that he would visit them again, to behold their steadfastness in the good word." After this he exhorted the people to behave kindly to Haavi and his wife, and to supply them with plenty of food. He then gave them a new house, which had been erected for himself, shook hands with them affectionately, and came on board the vessel. Were three islands ever converted from idolatry in so short a time ! so unexpectedly ! — islands almost unknown, and two never before visited by any European vessel ! In, as it were, one day, they were in duced to consent to the destruction of objects which former generations had venerated, and which they themselves looked upon as most sacred. It is a pleasing reflection, that the very first vessel which visited the islands of Mitiaro and Mauke carried to them the glad tidings of sal vation. In this people the words of the Psalmist have a striking fulfilment : " As soon as they hear of me, they shall obey me ; the strangers shall submit themselves unto me." The sun had risen with his wonted splendour, gilding the eastern heavens with his glory ; and little did the inhabitants of Mauke and Mitiaro imagine, that before he retired beneath the horizon in the western sky, Ichabod would be written upon the idolatry of their ancestors. 24 CAPTAIN LORD BYRON'S TESTIMONY. How sudden and unexpected, at times, are the gifts of a bountiful Providence ! How unlooked for, unsought, the communications of God's mercy ! The king of Atiu came on board of our vessel to gratify his curiosity, and was at that time a bigoted idolater, having even threatened to put the teachers to death; but was induced to embrace the truth himself — to use his influence in overthrowing the supersti tions of ages in two islands — and then to return to his own with a full determination to do the same there. Could we be restrained from ex claiming, " It is the Lord's doing, and it is marvellous in our eyes!" Our troubles at Mangaia were forgotten in the joy we now ex perienced, ahd the present failure at that island was compensated by the abundant success which attended us here. The next vessel which visited Mauke was his Majesty's superb frigate, the Blonde, com manded by the Hon. Captain Lord Byron, who had just conveyed the bodies- of the deceased chiefs of the Sandwich Islands to their own country. From the published narrative of that voyage I present the following extract t — Extract from the Voyage of H. M. Ship Blonde, Captain the Right Hon. Lord Byron, Commander. " On the 8th of August, to our great surprise, land was descried from the mast-head ; and, as it was uncertain, from its position, whether it was one of the islands discovered by Captain Cook, we bore up for it. A boat was lowered, and Mr. Maiden, with a reconnoitring party, proceeded towards the shore, with strict injunc tions, however, to be very cautious in endeavour ing to ascertain the disposition of the natives, before he attempted to land among them. On our approaching the island, we attempted, by signs, to induce a man to swim off to the boat ; this he naturally enough refused to do ; but, from his gesticulations, we understood that there was no landing-place there ; yet on the other side of the island we should find one. " Next morning we proceeded to the Ice- side of the island, and, perceiving several canoes coming oft* to us, we lay-to for them. The first that reached us was a single man, whose costume soon convinced us that we were not the first visiters of this solitary place. He wore a straw hat, shaped like a common English hat ; and, besides his maro, or waist- cloth, he wore a cloak of tapa, of the same form with the South American poncho. While we were questioning our visiter, another canoe of very singular construction came alongside of us. Two persons, who, by their dress and appear ance, seemed to be of some importance, now stepped on board, and, to our great surprise, produced a written document from that branch of the London Missionary Society settled at Otaheite, qualifying them to act as teachers in the island of Mauke. They were very fine- looking men, dressed in cotton shirts, cloth jackets, and a sort of petticoat of very fine mat, instead of trousers. " They w-ere much astonished at everything they saw on beard the frigate, though it ap peared they were not ignorant of the use of guns and other things ; but they evidently had never seen so large a vessel. The galley-fire, and the players on wind instruments in the band, seemed to surprise and delight them more than anything. Our bread they ate, after smelling it; but it is impossible to describe their faces of disgust on tasting the wine. " As soon as their curiosity was satisfied, we determined to avail ourselves of their local know ledge as guides, and to go on shore. We em barked in two boats, taking one of the Mission aries in each ; but we found the surf on the beach so violent that we got into the natives' canoes, trusting to their experience for taking us safely through : this they did with admirable dexterity ; and our passage in the canoes con vinced us that no boat of ours could have effected a landing. When we arrived, it appeared as it the whole male population had assembled to greet us ; the only two women, however, were the wives of the Missionaries, decently clothed from head to foot. Each individual of this numerous assembly pressed forward to shake hands, and seemed unhappy till this sign of friendship had passed : this ceremony being over, they conducted us towards their habita tions, which were about two miles inland. Our path lay through a thick shady wood, on the skirts of which, in a small open space, two handsome canoes were building. They were each eighty feet long ; the lower part, as usual, of a single tree, hollowed out with great skill. The road was rough over the fragments of coral, but it wound agreeably through the grove, which improved in beauty as we advanced ; and at j length, to our surprise and pleasure, terminated in a beautiful green lawn, where were two of the prettiest white-washed cottages imaginable — the dwellings of the Missionaries. " The inside of their dwellings corresponded with their exterior neatness. The floors were boarded : there were a sofa and some chairs of native workmanship ; windows, with Venetian shutters, rendered the apartments cool and agreeable. The rooms were divided from each other by screens of tapa, and the floor was covered with coloured varnished tapa, resembling oil-cloth. We were exceedingly struck with the appearance of elegance and cleanliness of all around us, as well as with the modest and decorous behaviour of the people, especially the women. " After partaking of the refreshment offered us by our hostess, which consisted of a baked pig, bread-fruit, and yams, we accompanied the Missionaries to their church. It stands on rising ground, about four hundred yards from the cottages A fence composed of the trunks of coca-nut trees surrounds the area in which it stands. Its form is oval, and the roof is sup ported by four pillars, which bear up the ridge. It is capable of containing two hundred persons. Two doors and twelve windows give it light and air ; the pulpit and reading-desk are neatly carved and painted with a variety of prettv designs, and the benches for the people are arranged nearly round. Close to the church is NATIVE EXPRESSIONS OF WONDER. 25 the burying-place, which is a. mound of earth covered with green sward; and the whole has an air of modest simplicity, which delighted no less than surprised us." After giving a short account of the introduc tion of Christianity among this interesting people, the writer proceeds : — " Thus, in one day, and that the first in which a vessel from the civilised world touched there, the superstitions of ages were overturned, and the knowledge of the true God brought among a docile, and, generally speaking, inno cent people. " On our return to the beach, one ofthe mis sionaries accompanied us. As we retraced our steps through the wood, the warbling of the birds, whose plumage was as rich as it was new to us — the various-tinted butterflies that flut tered across our path — the delicious climate— the magnificent forest-trees — and above all, the perfect union and harmony existing among the natives — presented a succession of agreeable pictures' which could not fail to delight us." I called at the island shortly after the visit of the Blonde. The Missionaries and people spoke with gratitude and delight of the kindness shown to them by Lord Byron and other gentle men, while they exhibited the valuable presents which had been received from their generous visiters. The work at Atiu was equally rapid. Messrs. Tyerman and Bennet were the next visiters to that island ; and the first intelligence they re ceived on approaching it was, that the whole population had renounced their idols, and had built a large chapel. This great work had been accelerated by the arrival of- a boat of mine, which had been sent to Tahiti, to com municate the painful intelligence of the death of Mrs. Threlkeld, the. wife of my excellent coadjutor. She arrived in safety at Tahiti, but, on her return to Raiatea, lost her way ; we therefore concluded that she had sunk, and that the crew had perished at sea. But in this we were happily mistaken; for, after having been driven about the ocean for six weeks, during which time they suffered exceedingly from hunger and thirst, they reached Atiu. Here, by the attention of their brethren the teachers, and the hospitality of Roma-tane, they soon regained both flesh and strength. Several of them immediately united with the teachers in preaching the Gospel and instructing the people : the effect of which was, that the re maining half of the population, till then un converted, believed, and cast away their idols. " Now we know," said many, " that this reli gion is true ; for these people could not have come here to deceive us ; they were driven by the waves of the ocean, and, behold, they have their books with them ; and the God to whom they prayed has preserved them." Here, again, we have another striking indication of an over ruling Providence, and are shown how dis tressing events are often made subservient to God's designs of mercy : " His ways are past finding out." The crew in this boat would, in all probability, have perished, had it not been for a little pot of rice, which a friend had sent to Mrs. Williams. They had exhausted all their food, and long before had drunk every drop of water ; when they divided out the rice, and ate it, a grain at a time, moistening their mouths, by dipping the fibrous husk of the cocoa-nut in oil, and thoroughly masticating it. They spent their time in reading the Scriptures, singing hymns, and praying to God to preserve them from perishing by famine, or being drowned in the ocean. So great was the regard they paid to the Sabbath that the individual who had charge of the boat informed me, that on one occasion a large fish continued near them for a considerable time, which they could easily have caught; but, although nearly famished they held a consultation whether it was right for them to take it, and determined " that they would not catch fish on a Sabbath- day." God graciously heard their prayers; conducted them to Atiu ; rendered them useful there, and afterwards restored them to their relatives and friends. I mention this circum stance to show the tenderness of their con sciences, and not as approving of the ignorance in which it originated. Had they known the meaning of the Saviour's words, " I will have mercy, and not sacrifice," they would of course have taken the fish. A variety of interesting little incidents L oc curred at Mauke and Mitiaro, where .the natives had never before seen Europeans, or European animals. The simple-hearted inha bitants were much astonished at our appearance, took hold of our hands, smelt us, turned up our. sleeves, examined us most minutely, and, being delighted with the whiteness of our skin, con cluded that we must be very great chiefs.. _ . When the boat was put into the sea,-, they involuntarily shouted, " It wiU -upset ! it will upset ! it has no outriggger !" On seeing the goats, they called to their companions to come and look at the wonderful "birds with great teeth upon their heads." These innocent ex pressions of ignorant astonishment, with others too numerous to mention, show the impression made upon a barbarous people by their first intercourse with civilised man. Our fish-hooks they looked upon with ineffable contempt ; and, placing them beside the thick hooks made from cocoa-nut shells, pearl-shells, and wood, exclaimed, "If the fish break these that are so thick and strong, alas ! for such slender things !" We had still one more island to seek ; and, finding Roma-tane exceedingly intelligent, we inquired of him if he had ever heard of Raro tonga. " Oh, yes," . he replied ; " it is only a day and a night's sail from Atiu ; we know the way there." This information delighted us ; but, when we inquired the position in which it lay, he at one time pointed in one direction, and at another in quite the opposite. But this was soon explained ; for the natives, in making their voyages, do not leave from any part of an island, as we do, but, invariably, have what may be called starting-points. At these places 26 RAROTONGA DISCOVERED. they have certain land-marks, by which they steer, until the stars become visible ; and they generally contrive to set sail so as to get sight of their heavenly guides by the time their land marks disappear. Knowing this, we determined to adopt the native plan, and took our vessel round to the " starting-point." Having arrived there, the chief was desired to look to the land-marks, while the vessel was being turned gradually round, and when these ranged with each other he cried out, " That's it! that is it!" I looked immediately at the compass, and found the course to be S.W. by W. ; and it proved to be as correct as if he had been an accomplished navigator. I mention this circumstance, be cause I think it of universal importance to all persons, in every scientific or other expedition, who seeks information from natives, to allow them to communicate it in then- own way. I was struck a few days ago, in reading the address of R. King, Esq., the surgeon of the Northern Expedition, with the statement " That the expedition had failed to derive advantage from the information of the natives, by perplexing them with questions, and pre senting doubts, instead of allowing them, with charcoal, to draw a rough chart upon a piece of board," &c. So it was with us ; and, had we not adopted the method we did, in all proba bility Rarotonga would have been unblessed with the knowledge of salvation to the present day. When we had accomplished all we could at Atiu, a large double canoe cam.e off for our interesting guest, to whom we presented an axe or two, " to cut down trees for posts for the house of God," with some other useful articles. He then took an affectionate farewell of us, seated himself upon his elevated stage, beat time to the rowers, and hastened on shore to carry the important purposes of his mind into execution ; — not, as he came on board, a bigoted idolater, but a convert to the truth. CHAPTER VII. Rarotonga discovered — Pleasing and distressing Inci dents there — Papeiha's devoted Conduct— Conversation between a Native Sailor and the King — Remarkable Incident of a Heathen Woman — Return Home— Exhi bition ofthe Idols— Native Speeches, &c. Aftek leaving Atiu, we were baffled -and per plexed for several days by contrary winds. Our provisions were nearly expended, and our patience all but exhausted, when, early in the morning of the day on which we discovered the island, the captain came to me, and said, " We must, Sir, give up the search, or we shall all be starved." I replied, that we would continue our course till eight o'clock, and, if we did not succeed by that time, we would return home. This was an hour of great anxiety ; hope and fear alternately agitated my mind. I had sent a native to the top of the mast four times, and he was now ascending for the fifth ; and when we were within half an hour of relinquishing the object of our search, the clouds which enveloped its towering heights having been chased away by the heat of the ascending sun, he relieved us from our anxiety by shouting " Teie teie, tatiafenua, ncil" Here, here is the land we have been seeking ! The transition of feeling was so instantaneous and so great, that, although a' number of years have intervened, I have not forgotten the sensations which that announcement occasioned. The brightened countenances, the joyous expressions, and the lively congratulations of all on board, showed that they shared in the same emotions ; nor die we fail to raise our voices in grateful acknowledgement to Him who had graciously " led us by a right way." It would be pleasant to linger here, and to describe the varied feelings we experienced, as the lovely island unveiled its beauties to our view. The high mountains, the rocky emi nences, and the luxuriant valleys, called forth our admiration ; the recollection of the degraded state of the inhabitants extorted the tear of sympathy ; while the doubtful nature of our re ception awakened intense solicitude. We "wondered and held our peace, to wit, whether, the Lord would make om- journey prosperous or not." On reaching the island, the canoe we pur chased at Aitutaki was sent on shore, with one of the natives of Rarotonga, Vahineino, and Papeiha. Meeting with a most favourable re ception, a consultation was immediately held with an immense assemblage of the natives, under the shade of a grove of Temanu trees ; when the teachers stated the object of our voyage, informed the people of the renunciation of idolatry at the various islands we had visited, and added, that we had brought their own people from Aitutaki, with Christian teachers, whom it was our wish to leave at their island, to instruct them in the knowledge of the true God, and the way of salvation, by his Son Jesus Christ. All appeared delighted, and the king determined to come on board and conduct them to the shore. We gave him a most cordial welcome, and introduced to him his people; among whom was his own cousin. He was particularly delighted to see her; they rubbed noses most cordially, and fell on each other's neck and wept. After much interesting intercourse, it was arranged that the teachers, with their wives, the natives of Rarotonga, and Papeiha, should accompany the king on shore. They did so ; and we stood off for the night, rejoicing and praising God for all the delightful and im portant events of the day. The king, whose name is Makea, is a hand some man in the prime of life, about six feet high, and very stout ; of noble appearance, and of a truly commanding aspect. His complexion is light ; and, at the time of which I write, his body was most beautifully tatooed, and slightly coloured with a preparation of turmeric and ginger, which gave it a light orange tinge, and, NATIVE SAILOR AND THE KING. 27 in the estimation of the Rarotongans, added much to the beauty of his appearance. Early on the following morning the teachers, with their wives, came off to the vessel ; and, to our surprise and deep regret, gave us an account of the terrible treatment the females had ex perienced during the greater part of the night, who exhibited their tattered garments in confir mation of their tale of woe. It appears that a powerful chief, who had conquered the principal part of the island, had come with a large retinue, for the purpose of taking one of the female teachers as his wife. He had already nineteen, and the teacher was to have been the twentieth, and the chief of the seraglio. Tapairu, the cousin of Makea, who was a person of influence, and a woman of great intrepidity, argued, wept, and even fought for the preservation of those from whom she had received so much kindness ; and to her alone, under God, may we attribute the deliverance on that trying occasion. All the chiefs were anxious that the teachers should remain, affirm ing that it would be very good for the men to teach them the word of God; and for the chiefs to have their wives. These statements will give the reader some idea of the licentiousness of heathenism, as it exists before one ray of Christian light has beamed upon its darkness. It so outrages all decency, that the heart is hurried away in horror and disgust from the contemplation of the deep moral degradation into which our race is sunk.Discouraged by the reception we had met with, we were about, for a time, to abandon this inviting field of labour, when our excellent friend Papeiha, instead of uniting with us in useless regrets, offered to remain alone at Ra rotonga, provided we would send a coadjutor, whom he named, from Raiatea. We rejoiced in the proposition ; and, leaving his property in the vessel, after taking an affectionate farewell of us, this truly devoted man got into a canoe and went on shore, carrying nothing with him but the clothes he wore, his native Testament, and a bundle of elementary books. The two men and four women natives of Rarotonga, whom we had brought from Aitutaki, had all embraced Christianity some time before, and promised steadfastly to maintain their profession among their heathen countrymen. Thus Papeiha was not left desolate, but surrounded by a little - company who were ardently attached to him, and who were indebted to his instructions for all they knew of the religion of the Gospel. We left him with a prayer that his little flock might become the germ of a Christian church in Rarotonga, and that by their instrumentality the incorruptible seed of the Word might be scattered throughout its numerous population. Nor were we disappointed; for, by the time Tiberio.'Papeiha's colleague, arrived, which was about four months after our departure, he and his little band had received many additions to their number! And when our esteemed friends, Messrs. Ty erman and Behnet, visited the island, which was but little more than a year after its discovery, the whole population had renounced idolatry, and were engaged in erecting a place of worship, six hundred feet in length ! To this speedy and delightful result of our labours, the various conversations which our people had held with the natives may, in a great measure, have contributed. Our native sailor, Faaori, who was the bearer of the mes sage from Aitutaki, was busily employed during the whole of our stay in hearing and answering their questions. One inquired of him where Tahnoana, the great drum, was, which the two priests, Paoauri and Paoatea, took to Raiatea ! Another demanded, "Why did you Raiateans kill those men, whose death induced the gods to remove our island to its present situation!"* The king was anxious to know where great Tangaroa was. Faaori replied " He is burned, and we shall never worship him again." He then asked if many of the people were not strangled by the gods in anger ; and was assured that not a single individual was hurt. The king then inquired who burned the gods, — the Cookees,f or Tamatoa and his people! Faaori told him that the Cookees had taught them the folly of idolatry, and had given them instruction in the word and worship of Jehovah, the true God, and that they themselves destroyed the maraes and burned the gods. The king in quired of Faaori who was the first man, according to the Cookees' account! He re plied, Adam. The people affirmed that it was Tiki. Faaori then asked them who was the first woman! they answered, Tiki's wife. He inquired of them where she had come from ! To this question they could give no answer. He then told them the first woman's name was Eve, and that she was a rib taken out of the first man that Jehovah made. They inquired how that was possible! He informed them that God caused a deep sleep to fall upon the first man, and took out a rib, of which he made the first woman. This was all new to them, and they listened with intense interest to his statements — many exclaiming, " Perhaps this is truth." They then asked whether the bodies of those who embraced this Word would die ! Faaori told them that the body would die, but that the soul was described in the word of God as of the greatest value, and that the souls of all who believed in Jesus Christ would live for ever. Having inquired how the Raiateans acted in war, he informed them that, while in the service of Satan, they were exceedingly cruel to each other ; that women were barbar ously treated, and that children had skewers run through their ears, and were strung together ; but that now they had ceased to fight, and, instead of being pierced with spears, or beat to death with the clubs of the warriors, * This evidently shows that the Rarotongans have the same traditions as the Raiateans; and by the variety of information they possessed relative to the Society Islands generally, but most especially Raiatea, that being the grand emporium of idolatry, it is certain that at some former period more frequent communication must have existed between the islanders. + A name given bv the natives to all linghsli people, from their having heard of Captain Cook. EXHIBITION OF IDOLS— NATIVE SPEECHES. they died in peace in their own habitations, surrounded by their friends. "And," continued this useful man, " out of pure compassion, we have come to bring these blessings to you, before you entirely destroy each other by your wars, and the worship of your infamous gods." The natives then asked Faaori what the " tuetue " was ! As he did not comprehend this, they knelt down, shut their eyes, and began to mutter ; when he understood their meaning, and informed them that it was prayer, and that, while they were ill-treating the teachers, they were praying to God Jehovah to change their hearts, and incline them to receive the word of salvation. But perhaps the following most remarkable circumstance may have contributed in no small degree to induce the people thus speedily to embrace the truth : — A heathen woman had, by some means or other, been conveyed from the island of Tahiti to Rarotonga, and on her arrival she informed the Rarotongans of all the wonders she had seen ; stating that they were not the only people in the world; that there were others entirely white, whom they called Cookees ; that Captain Cook had been to her island ; and that, subsequently to his visit, the servants of Jehovah, and Jesus Christ, the white man's God, had come and were still residing there ; that at her island they had ceased to use stone axes for hewing their trees, for those servants of Jehovah, and others, had brought sharp things which they called cpahi, with which they could cut them down with the greatest facility ; that they had also ceased to use human bones as tools for making canoes and building houses, for the same people had brought them sharp hard things, with which they could effect their work with far greater ease ; that their children did not now cry and scream while they had their hair cut, as they formerly did, when it was performed with sharks' teeth, for the Cookees had brought them bright things, which were so sharp that the operation afforded pleasure rather than pain ; and that they had no need now to go down to the water to look at themselves, because these wonderful people had brought them small shining things, which they could carry about with them, and in which they could see them selves as plainly as they could see each other. These, with a variety of other " mea tu ke," or very strange things, which this heathen female told the astonished inhabitants of this secluded garden of the ocean, excited so much interest, that the king, Makea, called one of his children " Tehovah," (Jehovah,) and another " Teetee- try" (Jesus Christ). An uncle of theking, who we hope at this time is a truly good man, erected an altar to Jehovah and Jesus Christ, to which persons afflicted with all manner of diseases were brought to be healed; and so great was the reputation which this marae obtained, that the power of Jehovah and Jesus Christ became great in the estimation of the people. With grateful hearts we now turned our faces homewards ; where, after eight or ten days' sail, we arrived in safety. And, as other warriors fuel a pride in displaying the trophies of their victories, we hung the rejected idols of Aitutaki to the yard-arms and other parts of the vessel, entered the harbour in triumph, sailed down to the settlement, and dropped anchor amidst tbe shouts and congratulations of our people. On the following Friday evening the idols were suspended about the chapel, the chan deliers of which were lighted up as before. Service was commenced by singing, in the native language, the Jubilee Hymn, " Faaoto 'tu," "Blow ye the trumpet, blow," &c. Having given a brief outline of the voyage, the chiefs from Aitutaki were introduced to the assembly ; when several, addresses were delivered by the ¦ natives, of which tbe two following are speci mens : — " This, dear friends," said Tuahine, " is not the first day of my joy. These varua ino were seen through the telescope, while hanging to the yard-armsof the vessel, as she entered the harbour. Behold ! we now see them hanging here. There are some things we term the poison of the sea ; these idols hanging here were the poison of the land, for both body and soul were poisoned by them. But let us rejoice, their reign is over. We did not think that they would have been obtained so soon." Addressing himself to the regardless and un converted portion of the assembly, he said : — " Behold ! these are still your gods, although you do not acknowledge them ;" and then he exhorted them, earnestly and affectionately, to turn to Jesus, by whose power alone these idols were conquered. " And how," added he, " can you resist his power! The gods of wood are food for the fire, but the God without form is beyond your strength : his head cannot be reached ! These gods are conquered ; but the invisible God will remain for ever. The idols now hanging in degradation before us were for merly unconquerable ; but the power of God is gone forth, by which men become Christians, and savages brethren in Christ." A second arose and said ; — " We have been praying that God would exert his power, and cause his word to grow, that his good kingdom might come ; and now, behold every man, with his own eyes, may see the effects of that power. These idols have not been obtained by spears clotted with human blood, as formerly ; no guns, no clubs, no other weapon but the powerful Gospel of our Lord Jesus Christ. Formerly all was theirs, pigs, fish, men, women, and children ; and now, behold them suspended in contempt before us ! This is not the commencement of our joy. We saw the idols hanging about the vessel, and gladness sprang in our hearts. They called our ship the ship of God, and truly it was so, for it carried the Gospel to distant lands, and brought back the trophies of its victory. Does praise grow in every heart ! Is joy felt by all ! Then let us not only rejoice that ' devils are subject to us, but also that our names are written in the book of life.'" , I obtained from the chief of Aitutaki a short account of the relics of idolatry. Twenty-five of these I numbered, and transmitted, with their MR. BOURNE'S ACCOUNT. 29 names and history, to the deputation then at Tahiti ; six others were sent to England, and many of them are now in the Missionary Mu seum. The following selection may give the reader a general idea of the whole : — No. 2. An idol named Te-rongo, one of the great deities, called a /caitangata, or man-eater. The priests of this idol were supposed to be in spired by the shark. No. 8. Tangaroa ; the great national god of Aitutaki, and of almost all the adjacent islands. He holds the net with which he catches the spirits of men as they fly from their bodies, and a spear with which he kills them. No. 15. A rod, with snares at the end, made of the fibres of the cocoa-nut husk, with which the priest caught the spirit of the god. It was used in cases of pregnancy, when the female was ambitious that her child should be a son, and become a famous warrior. It was also em ployed in war-time to catch the god by bis leg, to secure his influence on the side of the party performing the ceremony. (See page 55, No. 2.) No. 18. Ruanuu; a chief from Raiatea, who, ages ago, sailed in a canoe from that island, and settled at Aitutaki. From him a genealogy is traced. He died at Aitutaki, and was deified, as Te atua taitai tere, or the conduct or of fleets. The Raiateans have several interesting traditions connected with' Ruanuu. To this idol was appended an old tattered silk handkerchief, and the foot of a wine glass ; both of which were obtained from Captain Cook's vessel, and dedi cated to Ruanuu, " the god or guide of fleets," for conducting that celebrated navigator to their shores. No. 25. Taau, with his fan, &c. ; the god of thunder. When the thunder peals, the natives said that this god was flying, and produced this sound by the flapping of his wings. While procuring from the chief the descrip tions above given, he begged of me to allow the idols to be burned in cooking food, and not sent to England, as they would expose his folly. Pomare, it will be recollected, wished his to be sent, in order " that English people might see what foolish gods Tahiti worshipped." CHAPTER VIII. Mr. Bourne's Voyage — Accompanied by Mr. and Mrs. Pitman, with Mrs. Williams and Family, the Author sails for Rarotonga — Dangers experienced in landing — Idols delivered up— Chapel erecled— Writing on a Chip ; the Wonder it excited— Mr. Pitman's narrow Escape- Books prepared in the Language— A Sabbath at Raro tonga. The Hervey group was next visited by my es teemed colleague, Mr. Bourne, who was much delighted with the great progress that had been made at all the -islands. He opened several places of worship, and baptized a great number of the natives. Our friend, the chief of Atiu, had performed all that he had promised ; and, having completed the chapel, he was employed in erecting for himself a plastered house, seventy-three feet in length, and thirty in breadth. Just before Mr. Bourne's arrival, the captain of an English whaler which had been at the island, left the following written testimony to the kind attention he had received from the inhabitants : — " I visited this island for the purpose of ob taining refreshments ; and, although in some measure prepared to expect civility, their exces sive kindness exceeded my utmost expectations. They appear a mild and inoffensive people, and have no warlike instruments among them. AVe remained here on Sunday, and never, in any country, saw such attention paid to the Sabbath." In reference to Aitutaki, Mr. Bourne says : — " They have built a coral pier, six hundred feet in length, and eighteen feet in breadth. The number of plastered houses in the settle ment is one hundred and forty-four, in many of which are bedsteads and sofas. The female teachers have taught the women to make good bonnets. They are diligent in learning, and numbers can read. Family and private prayer is very general. Everything has remained quiet since our last visit ; neither war nor rumour of war has been seen or heard, although formerly it was their greatest delight, and the bodies of their slain enemies formed the horrible repast at the conclusion of every engagement." Respecting Rarotonga, after having given an account of the large congregations to which he preached, the numbers he baptized, and the general progress which had been made, Mr. Bourne observes : — " Much has been said in Europe concerning the success of the Gospel in Tahiti and the Society Islands, but it is not to be compared with its progress in Rarotonga. In Tahiti, European Missionaries laboured for fifteen long years before the least fruit appeared. But two years ago Rarotonga was hardly known to exist, was not marked in any of the charts, and we spent much time in traversing the ocean in search of it. Two years ago the Rarotongans did not know that there was such good news as the Gospel. And now I scruple not to say, that their attention to the means of grace, their regard to family and private prayer, equals whatever has been witnessed at Tahiti and the neighbouring islands. And, when we look at the means, it becomes more astonishing. Two native teachers, not particularly distinguished among their own countrymen for intelligence, have been the instruments of effecting this wonderful change, and that before a single Mis sionary had set his foot upon the island. I could not help earnestly desiring the presence of my brother Williams, that, as we shared in the disappointments experienced in our last voyage, we might share the joy which the change that has since taken place is calculated to pro duce." By a vessel that touched there some short time after, I received letters from Papeiha and his colleague, stating that they enjoyed unin terrupted prosperity, and expressing a wish that I would come and spend a few months with them, as the work was "so heavy that they 30 NEW SETTLEMENT— GROTESQUE COMPANY. could not carry it." I therefore determined to embrace the first opportunity of doing so. * Mi', and Mrs. Pitman, who were at New South Wales, on their way to the islands, when the Deputation arrived there, resolved, upon the advice and representations of those gentle men, to settle at Rarotonga. With this inten tion, on their arrival at the Society Islands, they came to reside with us at Raiatea, to obtain a knowledge of the language, arid wait until a companion should arrive from England ; the delicate health both of Mr. and Mrs. Pitman rendering it unadvisible that they should proceed there alone. On being made acquainted with our determination to revisit Rarotonga, they gladly embraced the opportunity of accompany ing us. After a tedious passage, we landed, on Sabbath, the 6th of May, 1827, amidst the greatest concourse of people I had seen since we left England. In doing so we were exposed to very considerable danger, for there being no proper harbour, we were obliged to get into the boat at a distance of three miles from the shore. The wind was very boisterous, the sea exceed ingly rough, and our boat so old and leaky, that Mrs. Williams was obliged to sit in the bottom, baling out the water. We landed, however, in safety amidst the congratulations of the multi tude, who had just left the chapel after morning service, and who, compared with what they were when I first visited them, "were clothed, and in their, right mind." All the females wore bonnets, and were dressed in white cloth, whilst the men wore clothes and hats of native manu facture. The change thus presented was pecu liarly gratifying. On the foUowing days our communication with the ship was as dangerous as when we landed ; and on the third morning we received a letter from the captain, stating, that his vessel had sustained so much injury, that he could remain no longer. Mr. Pitman and myself immediately went on board, got our clothes and a few other things into the boat, wrote a hasty note or two, and left the vessel. We were, however, much appalled at our situation ; for we had but two oars ; the boat was very deeply laden ; the sea was running high ; it blew a gale of wind ; and we were six or seven miles from the shore. Providentially, a large double canoe, that had been to fetch some natives from the ship, came to our assistance ; and, after several hours' hard labour, we happily reached the land. The clothes, flour, and sugar which we obtained, recompensed us for our fatigue, though we were obliged to leave much of our property in the vessel. I did not intend to have remained more than three or four months at Rarotonga; but, no opportunity being afforded of leaving the island, we continued there a year : and, although pecu liarly distressing at the time, we can now clearly see how wisely and graciously it was ordered ; for this year, like the preceding, was fraught with events of great importance, in connexion with my subsequent movements for extending the blessings ofthe Gospel in numerous other islands of the Pacific. We found the teachers and people just about to abandon the old settlement, a new one having been formed on the eastern side of the island. As the Thursday after our arrival was the day appointed for the removal, we determined not to interfere with this or any other arrangement, until, by a more accurate acquaintance with the affairs of the station, we should be enabled to take the management of the mission into our own hands. On Wednesday after noon we attended service, when one of the teachers addressed the assembly ; after which, the multitude gave us a welcome by a hearty shake of the hand. As there were be tween two and three thousand of them, and they considering that the sincerity of their affection was to be expressed by the severity of the "squeeze, and the violence of the shake, we were not sorry when the ceremony was over, for our arms ached severely for hours after. Early the following morning, with nearly the whole of the inhabitants of the island, we pro ceeded to tbe new station, to which we found but little difficulty in getting our things con veyed, as every person was desirous of carrying some part of our property. One took the tea- keetle, another the frying-pan ; some obtained a box, others a bed-post ; even the chief himself felt honoured in rendering assistance, and during the journey he ceased not to manifest his admiration of the devices printed upon the articles of earthenware with which he was in trusted, and to exhibit them to the crowd that surrounded him. A heavy fall of rain had rendered the ordinary road unfit for travelling, or otherwise the walk would have been delightful ; but, as the kind people conveyed goods, wives, and children, upon their Herculean shoulders, all delighted with their occupation, the journey was by no means unpleasant. On our arrival, we found ' that the teachers had very comfortable houses, one of which they most cheerfully gave up to us. A day or two afterwards, they requested us to take our seat outside the door ; arid, on doing so, we observed a large concourse of people coming towards us, bearing heavy burdens. They walked in pro cession, and dropped at our feet fourteen immense idols, the smallest of which was about five yards in length. Each of these was com posed of a piece of aito, or iron wood, about four inches in diameter, carved with rude imi tations of the human head at one end, and with an obscene figure at the other, wrapped round with native cloth, until it became two or three yards in circumference. Near the wood were red feathers, and a string of small pieces of polished pearl shells, which were said to be the manava, or soul of the god. Some of these idols were torn to pieces before our eyes : others were reserved to decorate the rafters of the chapel we proposed to erect; and one was kept to be sent to England, which is now in the Missionary Museum. It is not, however, so respectable in appearance as when in its own country; for his Britannic Majesty's officers, fearing lest the god should be made a vehicle PLATE OF IDOLS— CHAPEL ERECTED. 31 for defrauding the king, very unceremoniously took it to pieces ; and, not being so well skilled in making gods as in protecting the revenue, they have not made it so handsome as when it was an object of veneration to the deluded Rarotongans. An idol, of which the annexed figure is a correct representation, was placed on the fore-part of every fishing canoe ; and when the natives were going on a fishing excursion, prior to setting off, they invariably presented offerings to the god, and invoked him to grant them success. Surely professing Christians may learn a lesson from this practice. Here ¦• we see pagans of the, lowest order imploring the blessing of their gods upon their ordinary occupations. Christians, go and do likewise ! On the following Sabbath, a congregation of about four thousand assembled; but, as the house was a temporary building, and would not accommodate half the people, they took their One ofthe national idols. Soul ofthe idol. The fisherman's god. 32 ACCIDENT TO MR. PITMAN. seats outside. This induced us to determine to erect immediately a place of worship. With this view the chiefs and people were convened, and arrangements made for commencing the building ; and so great was the diligence with which the people laboured, that, although ill supplied with tools, the house was thoroughly completed in two months. It was one hundred and fifty feet in length, and sixty wide ; well plastered, and fitted up throughout with seats. It had six large folding-doors. The front windows were made in imitation of sashes, whilst those in the back resembled Venetian blinds. It was a large, respectable, and sub stantial edifice ; and the whole was completed without a single nail, or any iron-work what ever. It will accommodate nearly three thou sand persons. In the erection of this chapel, a circumstance occurred which will give a striking idea of the feelings of an untaught people, when observing, for the first time, the effects of written commu nications. As I had come to the work one morning without my square, I took up a chip, and with a piece of charcoal wrote upon it a request that Mrs. Williams would send me that article. I called a chief, who was superintend ing his portion of the work, and said to him, " Friend, take this ; go to our house, and give it to Mrs. Williams." He was a singular-look ing man, remarkably quick in his movements, and had been a great warrior ; but, in one of the numerous battles he had fought, had lost an eye. Giving me an inexpressible look with the other, he said, " Take that ! — she will call me a fool and scold me, if I carry a chip to her." " No," I replied, " she will not; take it, and go immediately ; I am in haste." Perceiving me to be in earnest, he took it, and asked, "What must I say!" I replied, " You have nothing to say ; the chip will say all I wish. " With a look of astonishment and contempt, he held up the piece of wood and said, " How can this speak! has this a mouth!" I desired him to take it immediately, and not spend so much time in talking about it. On arriving at the house, he gave the chip to Mrs. Williams, who read it, threw it away, and went to the tool- chest ; whither the chief, resolving to see the result of this mysterious proceeding, followed her closely. On receiving tbe square from her, he said, " Stay, daughter, how do you know that this is what Mr. Williams wants!" "Why," she replied, " did you not bring me a chip just now!" "Yes," said the astonished warrior, " but I did not hear it say anything." " If you did not, I did" was the reply, " for it made known to me what he wanted, and all you have to do is to return with it as quickly as possible." With this the chief leaped out of the house ; and, catching up the mysterious piece of wood, he ran through the settlement with the chip in one hand, and the square in the other, holding them up as high as his arms would reach, and shouting as he went, " See the wisdom of these English people ; they can make chips talk! they can make chips talk !" On giving me the square, he wished to know how it was possible thus to converse with persons at a distance. I gave him all the explanation in my power ; hut it was a circumstance involved in so much mystery, that he actually tied a string to the chip, hung it round his neck, and wore it for some time. During several following days, we frequently saw him surrounded by a crowd, who were listening with intense interest while he narrated the wonders which this chip had performed. The life and labours of my esteemed and excellent colleague had nearly terminated, while erecting the chapel in which he has since so long and so successfully preached the Gospel. He and myself had gone, as usual, to mark out and superintend the work, when one of the chiefs requested Mr. Pitman to go and instruct him how to fasten a window-sill ; and, while doing. so, a man on the thatch, unobserved by him, was dragging up a heavy piece of wood, which slipped, and, falling on Mr. Pitman's head, levelled him to tbe ground. He was taken up senseless, and conveyed home. I examined the bruise, and was truly grateful to find that no bone was broken, no material injury sustained ; for, providentially, the heavy end of the log reached the ground before Mr. Pitman was struck, otherwise his work on earth would have been finished. In mentioning this event to his friends, this devoted servant of Christ says, " Thus it hath pleased the Lord to spare me a little longer in his vineyard. O that my life may be more than ever devoted to his service!" The first three months which we spent with Mr. Pitman were devoted to the instruction of the people, and in obtaining a more correct knowledge of the peculiarities of their language, with such other information as was necessary to regulate our future proceedings for the welfare of the mission. The people were ex ceedingly kind to us, and diligent in their attendance at the schools and on all the means of grace. They made, however, but very little progress in reading ; and we considered them dull scholars, compared with their sprightly brethren in the Society Islands. Indeed, it was to us a matter of astonishment that not a single person in the island could read, although the teachers assured us they had been unremit ting in their endeavours to instruct them. It is true they were teaching them in Tahitian, as it was our wish to extend the use of that dialect as far as possible ; but not succeeding, we de termined immediately on preparing some books in their own language ; and with this view I drew up an elementary work, and translated the gospel of John and the epistle to the Galatians, which were printed a few months after ; and, from the moment the people received books in their own dialect, their progress has been so rapid, that, at the present time, there is a greater number of persons who can read at Rarotonga than at any other of our stations; and I may here add, that I think it a circum stance of very rare occurrence that a religious impression is produced upon the minds of a people, except by addressing them in their mother tongue. THE CHAPEL— A SABBATH'S OCCUPATION. 33 From the knowledge we had obtained of the population, the distances of the districts from each other, the difficulty of procuring food, the political divisions of the island, together with the relative influence of the different chiefs, we were convinced of the necessity of having two, and perhaps, ultimately, three distinct stations ; and, as we expected to remain at Rarotonga but two or three months longer, it was arranged that- we, with the inhabitants of two districts, should return to the former settlement, whilst Mr. Pitman took charge of the new one, which, although but one division of the island, was nearly as populous as the others united. As the settlement to which I was returning had been abandoned for some months, great exer tion was requisite to restore it to order. The large chapel was much dilapidated. This, from the circumstances of its erection, was rather an interesting building, but it was destitute of elegance ; for, although plastered and floored, and looking exceedingly well at a distance, the workmanship was rough, and the doors were formed of planks lashed together with cinet, which also supplied the place of hinges. One of its most striking peculiarities was the presence of many indelicate heathen figures carved on the centre posts. This was accounted for from the circumstance, that, when built, a consider able part of the people were heathens ; and, as a portion of the work was allotted to each district, unaccompanied by specific directions as to the precise manner of its performance, the builders thought that the figures with which they decorated the maraes would be equally ornamental in the main pillars of a Christian sanctuary. The building was 250 feet in length, and 40 feet wide. Having put the settlement in order, and had the chapel repaired, we devoted our energies to the instruction of the people. Their attendance on the means of grace, and the anxiety they evinced to understand the truths of the Gospel, were truly encouraging. At the conclusion of every service, both on Sabbath and other even ings, a great number followed us home, took their seats under the shade of the banana and plantain trees, by which our habitations were encircled, and spent an hour or more in making inquiries respecting the subjects of our address. Indeed, the manner in which they spent their Sabbaths was deeply interesting. At sunrise they held a prayer-meeting to implore the Divine blessing oh the engagements of the day. This they conducted entirely themselves. At nine o'clock the congregation assembled again, when the Missionary performed Divine service, just as it is conducted in England, — prayer being offered, the sacred Scriptures read, and hymns sung in their own beautiful language ;* after which, a sermon is preached to them. Prior, however, to the commencement of the service, they met in classes, of ten or twelve families each, and distributed among themselves the respective portions of the sermon which * The natives sing exceedingly well, and we have taught them most of our most popular tunes. They ge nerally bike two, and sometimes three parts of a tune. No. 3. each individual should bring away ; one saying, " Mine shall be the text, and all that is said in immediate connexion with it ;" another, " I will take care of the first division ;" and a third, " I will bring home the particulars under that head." Thus the sermon was apportioned before it was delivered. At our more advanced stations, where the New Testament was in the hands of our people, we invariably named pas sages of Scripture which were illustrative of the particulars under discussion. For instance, if the Missionary was preaching upon the love of Christ, his first division might be to describe the nature and properties of the Saviour's love ; and, under this head, if he referred to its great ness, after having illustrated his point, he would desire his hearers, without specifying the verse or verses, to read with attention the third chap ter of Paul's Epistle to the Ephesians, where they would find some sentiments applicable to that part of the subject. Opening their Testa ments, they would find the chapter referred to, and make a mark against it. A second divi sion might be the unchangeable nature of the Saviour's love ; and, having concluded his ob servations on this, the preacher would desire the congregation to read carefully the eighth chapter of Paul's Epistle to the Romans, where they would find some passages illustrative of that particular. Again, opening their Testa ments, the chapter would be sought and marked. Thus we should proceed through the discourse. At a convenient time the respective classes met, and, after commencing their social service with singing and prayer, one of the most intellfgent of their number began by inquiring, "With whom is the text!" and proposed a variety of questions upon it. After this he asked for the divisions of the discourse ; and, when one had been given, he would say, " To what portion of Scripture were we referred!" The chapter, having been named, was then read very care fully ; and the verses thought to be applicable were selected. This we found a most efficient and excellent method of proceeding, as it not only induced the people to pay great attention to the sermon, but to search the Scriptures with interest, and also to exercise their minds upon the meaning and application of what they read. This social exercise was regarded as a prepara tion for the more public examination, conducted by tbe Missionary, which took place in the cha pel, between the hours of one and two, when all the classes assembled ; and seldom was there a sentiment or sentence of importance in the discourse which was not then repeated by one or other of the congregation. CHAPTER IX. The Adoption of a Code of Laws by the People of Raro tonga— To what extent a Missionary should interfere in Civil Affairs— Conspiracy, with its results— Difficulties at Rarotonga arising from Polygamy and other Hea then Usages— the character of Works expected from the pen of a Missionary- Cieoumstances were continually occurring which rendered it imperative that the chiefs of 31 ADOPTION OF A CODE OF LAWS— A CONSPIRACY. Rarotonga should follow the example of those at Tahiti and the Society Islands, and adopt a code of Christian laws as the basis of the admi nistration of justice in their island ; for, as their civil polity was ultimately interwoven with their sanguinary idolatry, when the one was sub verted, the other perished in its ruins ; whilst those ancient usages, which were in accordance with the spirit of their religion of necessity sank into decay when the people were brought under the mild influence of Gospel principles. From time immemorial the inhabitants of this lovely spot had been addicted to theft ; and, as vast numbers of those who professed Christianity- were influenced by example merely, no sooner had the powerful excitement produced by the transition from one state of society to another subsided, than they returned to the habits in which, from their infancy, they had been trained. Prior to the introduction of Christianity, they had several methods of punishing the delinquent, or rather of avenging themselves for the injury received. For this purpose the friends and relatives of the aggrieved party would go to the house of the offender, and take by force what ever article of value they found there, even the mats on which he slept. Not unfrequently would the house be broken down, the banana- trees laid prostrate on the ground, and every article of produce destroyed. At other times the thief would be murdered on the spot ; in addition to which, Makea, the king, would fre quently command that the body should be cut in pieces, and the limbs hung up in different parts of the kainga, or farm, on which the depredations had been committed. In one of the adjacent islands, a man caught a„little boy, about eight years of age, in the act of stealing food : he instantly seized the thief, tied a heavy stone to his leg, and threw him into the sea. The boy sank to the bottom, and would soon have paid for the crime with his life, had not one of the native teachers, who saw him thrown into the water, immediately plunged in, and rescued him from his perilous situation. It was evident to the chiefs that none of these san guinary modes of punishment were in accord ance with the merciful spirit of the religion they now professed ; and, wishing that their civil and judicial polity should be so, they very naturally applied to us for advice. Thus it will be seen that there was a necessity laid upon us to act in these affairs ; and, while we gave the chiefs clearly to understand that our objects were purely of a spiritual character, we were con vinced that, under existing circumstances, it was as much a duty to direct them in the form ation of a code of laws, as it was to instruct them in the principles of Christianity itself; for, in thus acting, we were simply advising them to apply those principles to social life, and to substitute them for the ferocity and revenge by which all classes had been previously in fluenced. Our circumstances at this time were very similar to those in which we had been placed at Raiatea, a narration of which, although a digression, as they terminated in the esta blishment of a regular code of laws in that island, may not be unacceptable. A number of wild, dissolute young men, and others who, when heathens, had been accus tomed to live by plunder, not liking the re straints which Christianity imposed upon them, determined to overturn the government of the island, and entered into a regular and organised conspiracy for that purpose. In order to effect their wicked designs, it was resolved to murder me, my colleague, and Tamatoa the chief, who countenanced everything calculated to extend Christian principles and Christian practice. I was in the habit of spending every second or third Sabbath at the neighbouring island of Tahaa, which was about eight miles from our settlement, but always went on the Saturday, The four men who had volunteered their ser vices to convey me were among the conspira tors, and had engaged, when about half-way, to throw me into the sea, while their associates despatched Mr. Threlkeld and Tamatoa. An apparently trivial circumstance prevented my going on that day. I had repaired and painted the boat on the preceding Wednesday, and, not having sufficient paint-oil, was under the neces sity of using a considerable portion of a substi tute made from the cocoa-nut, which prevented the paint from drying according to my expec tations ; so that, when we prepared to launch the boat, we found her unfit for the voyage, and were thus prevented from taking the journey. The young men came to me several times dur ing the day, and appeared exceedingly anxious that we should go ; but I told them, that, as the paint was not dry, it was utterly impossible. I was not aware at the time what induced them to be so very urgent, and as little imagined that the simple circumstance above alluded to was the means which Providence employed to pre serve me from an untimely death and a watery grave. This shows what momentous conse quences are at times poised upon comparatively trivial events. Thwarted in their plans, they determined on the following day to carry theni openly and at once into execution ; and, while we were sitting at dinner, one of them was sent to our house for that purpose. He was dressed in a most fantastical manner, having his head decorated with leaves, and wearing a pair of trousers as a jacket, his arms being passed through the legs ; he wore also a red shirt in stead of trousers, his legs being passed through the arms, and the band buttoned round the waist. He came, brandishing a large carving- knife, and danced before the house, crying, " Turn out the hog, let us kill him ; turn out the pig, let us cut his throat." Annoyed with his conduct, and not apprehending any danger, I arose from the table to desire ¦ him to desist. On opening the door, one of the deacons, almost breathless with running, met me, thrust me back, and exclaimed, "Why do you go out! why do you expose your life ! you are the pig he is calling for : you will be dead in a moment." The deacon then informed me of the danger I had escaped, and of the plot which had just been discovered. Thus two days in succession DIFFICULTIES ARISING FROM POLYGAMY, ETC. 35 had I been in most imminent danger, and yet was preserved without the slightest exertion on my own part. Many such merciful preserva tions we are all, more or less, constantly expe riencing. This alarming circumstance, how ever, was attended with distressing conse quences. Mrs. Williams was near the hour of maternal solicitude ; and the agitation of mind she experienced was so great, that it occasioned the premature birth of a lovely babe, which, after exciting our painful anxieties for a week, fled to the region of the blessed, leaving us to mingle our tears of parental sorrow for its loss. It was the first bereavement we had experi enced, and we felt it most keenly. On the fol lowing day the chiefs held a meeting, and deter mined to put the four ringleaders to death. We remonstrated with them, when, after a whole day's discussion, they yielded to our wishes, and spared the lives of the conspirators. In the course of conversation the chiefs inquired what the English people would do under such circumstances ; when we informed them that in England there were established laws and judges, by which all offenders of every kind were tried and punished. They then wished to know what judges and laws were ; and, upon having the nature of the office of judge, and the cha racter of a code of laws, explained to them, they said, " Why cannot we have the same !" They, therefore, nominated a judge, pro tem pore, by whom the criminals were tried, and the ringleaders sentenced to four years' banish ment to an uninhabited island. This occur rence induced the chiefs and people of Raiatea to adopt, as the basis of public justice, a code of laws, which Mr. Threlkeld and myself assisted in preparing. The laws were but few in number, and drawn up in the plainest and most perspi cuous language, entirely devoid of all the tech nicalities and repetitions by which the statutes of enlightened and civilised countries are too frequently rendered obscure and perplexing : for it appeared to us of the greatest importance that they should be so simply and clearly ex pressed, that they might be easily understood by the people for whom they were framed. We determined, also, as far as possible, to lay a permanent foundation for the civil liberties of the people, by instituting at once that greatest barrier to oppression — trial by jury. The same code, a little modified, was, after much delibe ration and consultation, adopted by the chiefs and people of Rarotonga ; and thus we trust that the reign of despotism, tyranny, and private revenge, under which the inhabitants of this secluded garden had so long groaned, has for ever terminated. The laws enacted related to theft, trespass, stolen property, " land eating,"* lost property, Sabbath-breaking, rebellion, marriage, adultery, the judges, jury, &c. &c. We did not think it advisable to recommend the enactment of any law relative to murder, because we were doubtful as to the punishment which should be * A term we shall have frequent occasion to use. It signifies the forcible and unjust possession of each other's land. awarded to this crime, and were both of opinion that no necessity existed for the immediate pro mulgation of a law on the subject, and that the people were not sufficiently advanced in know ledge to enter upon the discussion. The chiefs and people were themselves induced, some considerable time after, by a most tragical and distressing circumstance, to pass the law which we had omitted ; and, at an assembly in which almost every inhabitant of the island was present, it was unanimously determined that deliberate murder should be punished with death. This was entirely their own act, so that its consequences will rest with themselves. When the event took place to which I refer, we were grateful that we had not advised this enactment, for otherwise we could not have saved the lives of the two culprits, whose sen tence we succeeded in getting commuted from death to banishment. I am not, however, satisfied that we were strictly just in our inter ference on that pecuharly trying occasion ; for the woman and her guilty associate had bar barously murdered the sick husband, in order that they might be united in marriage. There were two most delicate and perplexing subjects which required adjustment, prior to the final establishment of the laws. The first re ferred to a plurality of wives. This was a matter of much deliberation between my esteemed colleague and myself, before we decided how to act. Prior to the introduction of Christianity, polygamy existed to a very con siderable extent ; and, when a person having a plurality of wives offered himself as a candidate for baptism, the teachers had required that the individual should make a selection of one of them, and also provide for the support of those whom he put away. The measure succeeded beyond what might have been reasonably anti cipated ; and of the number who complied with this condition, only about twenty or twenty-five persons occasioned any trouble ; but among these was the king, which considerably increased our difficulty. When we conversed with them on the subject, some said that they had re turned to each other, because they had not been left at liberty in their choice ; whilst others alleged that they supposed the separation would be only temporary, and that, had they known it was to be permanent, they should have made a different selection. Acting upon this information, Mr. Pitman and myself thought the best, and, indeed, the only way to overcome the difficulty entirely, would be to convene the people, recommend that those who were dis satisfied should be allowed to select publicly either of their wives, and then be united to her in marriage in the presence of the whole assembly. The maintenance of the rejected wife or wives and children was also a very serious consideration, for it is not at Rarotonga, as at Tahiti and the Society Islands, where pro visions are abundant, a matter of slight import ance ; but a female depends almost entirely on her husband. Knowing that the king's course would form a precedent, we commenced by re questing him to name publicly the individual he D 2 36 DIFFICULTIES ARISING FROM POLYGAMY, ETC. intended to make his companion for life ; and of his three wives he selected the youngest, who had borne him one child, in preference to his own sister, by whom he had had three children, and his principal wife, who was the mother of nine or ten. He was then married to her in tbe presence of his people. On the following morning, Pivai, the prin cipal wife, took a mat to sleep upon, the mallets with which to make cloth for the husband who had abandoned her, and the beloved children she had borne him, and left the king's house to take up her residence in the solitude of widowhood. Scarcely a person in the settlement could refrain from tears, at seeing so worthy and amiable a woman, the mother of so large and fine a family, in those painful circumstances; and very considerable indignation was evinced on the occasion. We ourselves deeply sympathised with her ; for she was a woman universally esteemed, and from all that we knew of her we believed she was worthy of that esteem. A few days before leaving, she came to our house, and, while con versing with Mrs. Williams upon the subject, said, although her affection for her husband was very great, and she was truly distressed at the prospect of being separated from him, she had made up her mind to the painful event, con vinced that it was preferable ; for, as his affec tions were set upon his youngest wife, if she remained, she should become the occasion of his living in sin ; and rather than this, she would endure the separation, distressing as it might prove. This we regarded as a pleasing evidence of the power of Christian principle upon her mind. She took the opportunity of leaving the house while her husband was at school ; and, on his return to it, he was much affected at finding his faithful companion gone ; for, although his affections were placed on the youngest wife, he had a great esteem for Pivai, who had borne him so large a family, and had proved faithful and industrious for so many years. The king behaved honourably in giving her the produce of about twenty farms, the tenants of which were to obey her orders and do her work. This devoted and affectionate woman spent the whole period of her widow hood, which continued for three or four years, in making native garments of the very best quality for her late husband and children ; always taking the utmost pains, and displaying the greatest skill, in what she made for the former, thus testifying her unabated affection. After about four years the wife of Tinomana, the chief of a neighbouring settlement, died, and Pivai was united to him in marriage, by which she is again raised to the dignity she enjoyed prior to the painful separation from her former husband. We have reason to believe that Tino mana is a truly good man, and that they are remarkably happy in each other. Having this precedent, we advanced to the consideration of the other cases, and found but little difficulty in settling this truly perplexing affair. The measures adopted terminated ex ceedingly well ; for, from that time to the present, no inconvenience has been experienced. I am aware that there may be a difference of opinion upon this delicate subject; but I cherish the hope that a candid and comprehen sive consideration of existing circumstances will lead to the conclusion that our proceedings were both suitable and salutary. Had those who were determined to take back their wives been allowed to do so, it would have universally restored polygamy ; and thus all that had been effected by the teachers towards the removal of this evil would have been rendered nugatory. I have felt disappointed when reading the writings of Missionaries, at not finding a fuller account of the difficulties they have had to con tend with, and the measures by which these were met. It appears to me that a work from the pen of a Missionary should not contain just what might be written by one who has never left his native country, but a plain statement of the perplexities with which he has been com pelled to grapple, and the means adopted to overcome them ; that if judicious and beneficial, others, placed in similar circumstances, may profit by his experience ; and, if otherwise, that they may avoid falling into similar errors. Should his plans in some cases have been less prudent than might have been desired, he has nothing to fear from the scrutiny of wise and good men, who will consider the situation in which he was placed, and the necessity under which he was laid of devising and executing measures in novel circumstances ; where, un directed by any precedent, he was thrown entirely upon the resources of his own judg ment. Other difficulties were presented by the peculiar and intricate character of some of the ancient usages which we were anxious to see abolished. One of these was a very Unnatural practice, called kukumi anga. As soon as a son reached manhood he would fight and wrestle with his father for the mastery, and, if he obtained it, would take forcible possession of the kainga or farm previously belonging to his parent, whom he drove in a state of destitution from his home. Another perplexing custom was the ao anga. When a wife was bereft, by the band of death, of her husband, the relations of the latter, instead of paying the visit of mercy and kindness " to the fatherless and widow in their affliction," would seize every article of value belonging to the deceased, turn the dis consolate mother with her offspring away, and possess themselves of the house, the food, and the land. Another difficulty was produced by what they call kai kainga, or land-eating, which is getting unjust possession of each other's lands ; and these, once obtained, are held with the greatest possible tenacity ; for land is ex ceedingly valuable at Rarotonga, and on no subject were their contentions more frequent and fierce. On investigating this last practice, we found it to be a species of oppression in which so many were involved, and also a point upon which the feelings of all were so exquisitely sen sitive, that to moot it would be to endanger the peace of the island. We therefore thought it WRITINGS EXPECTED FROM A MISSIONARY— MRS. WILLIAMS' ILLNESS. 37 most advisable to recommend the chiefs to allow it to remain for the present in abeyance. After these preliminary matters had under gone mature deliberation, and the laws in re ference to them were agreed upon, a general assembly was convened ; when the whole code, having been distinctly read and carefully ex plained, was unanimously adopted by the chiefs and the people, as the basis on which public justice was to be administered on the island of Rarotonga. From what I have related, it will be evident that the year I spent with Mr. Pitman at Raro tonga was one of anxiety, difficulty, and toil ; and feeling our "lack of wisdom, we asked of God, who giveth to all men liberally, and up- braideth not." Some, perhaps, many object, that the above are points with which a Mis sionary ought not to meddle. I cannot here enter into a lengthened discussion, as to the extent to which the Missionary may wisely interfere with the civil institutions of the people, but may just observe, that it would be criminal were he, while seeking to elevate the moral character of a community, and to promote among it the habits and usages of civilised life, to withhold any advice or assistance which might advance these designs. Inmost cases, as it was at Rarotonga, the civil and judicial polity of the heathen, and all their ancient usages, are interwoven with their superstitions ; and, as all these partake of the sanguinary character of the system in which they were embodied, and by which they were sanctioned, they maintain a perpetual warfare with the well-being of the community. The Missionary goes among them, and, by the blessing of God upon his labours, they are delivered from the dominion of the idolatrous system which had governed them for ages, and in its stead embrace Christianity. Subsequently they become acquainted with new principles ; are taught to read portions of the word of God, which are translated and put into their hands ; and soon perceive that these ancient usages are so incompatible with Chris tian precepts, that such a superstructure cannot stand on a Christian foundation. To whom, then, in this dilemma, can they apply for advice, but to the persons from whom they have derived their knowledge ! And what less can the Missionary do than give it freely and fully ! I would not, however, be supposed to advocate the assumption of political authority by the Missionary; for, on the contrary, I am con vinced that he should interfere as little as pos sible ; and, whether it be in civil, legal, or political affairs, that he should do so solely by his advice and influence. But there are occasions, especially in newly-formed missions, when he must step out of his ordinary course, and appear more prominent than he would wish ; for frequently a word from the Mis sionary, rightly timed, will do more towards settling a dispute, healing a breach, burying an animosity, or carrying a useful plan into execu tion, than a whole year's cavilling of the natives themselves. And here, in answer to the charge that the Missionaries in the South Seas have assumed even regal authority, I may observe, that no Missionary in the Pacific ever possessed any such authority; that his influence is entirely of a moral character : and I may add, that there are no instances on record where men have used their influence less for their own aggrandisement, or more for the welfare of the people. CHAPTER X. Mrs. Williams's Illness — She gives her consent to the Author's visiting the Samoa Islands — Resolve to build a Ship — Make a pair of Bellows — Deficiencies in books upon the useful arts — The Rats eat the Bellows — Make a pair of Wooden ones — Messenger of Peace completed — Voyage to Aitutaki — The King accompanies the Author — Return with a singular Cargo— Pleasing Incidents ou our Arrival. The next circumstance of importance which occurred while at Rarotonga was Mrs. Williams's illness. My mind had for some time before this been contemplating the extension of our labours to the Navigators' Islands and the New Hebrides ; and, as far back as 1824, I wrote to the Directors of the Missionary Society upon the subject. As" the Gospel was now established at the Her vey Islands, I began more seriously to think of taking a voyage to those distant groups; and priorto my leaving Raiatea, I communicated my wishes to Mrs. Williams ; who, on learning that the islands I proposed to visit were from 1800 to 2000 miles distant, and that I should be absent about six months, exclaimed, " How can you suppose that I can give my consent to such a strange proposition! You will be eighteen hundred miles away, six months ab sent, and among the most savage people we are acquainted with ; and if you should lose your life in the attempt, I shall be left a widow with my fatherless children, twenty thousand miles from my friends and my home." Finding her so decidedly opposed to the undertaking, I did not mention it again, although my mind was still fixed upon the object. A few months after this she was laid upon a bed of affliction ; her illness came on so rapidly and severely, that in a few hours she was in a state of insensibility, and we greatly feared that it would terminate fatally: the prospect was truly distressing. Bereavements, at all times, inflict a deep and painful wound, and leave a fearful chasm in the domestic circle ; but to have had the part ner of my days, the mother of my babes, taken away with a stroke, in an insulated situation, remote from the kind and soothing attentions of friendship, and the endearments of home, would have left me cheerless and disconsolate. God, however, was pleased to hear our cries ; and, after a week or ten days, she was partially restored to health. On entering her chamber, one afternoon, addressing me in affectionate terms, Mrs. Williams said, that she had been endeavouring to discover the design of God in sending this sudden and heavy affliction : and her thoughts turned to the opposition by which she had induced me to relinquish, for a- time, mv voyage to the Navigators' Islands ; and, 38 BUILDING A SHIP— CONSTRUCTION OF A PAIR OF BELLOWS. fearing that, if she any longer withheld her consent, God, perhaps, might remove her alto gether, she continued — " From this time your desire has my full concurrence ; and when you go I shall follow you every day with my prayers, that God may preserve you from danger, crown your attempt with success, and bring you back in safety." I was rather surprised at the cir cumstance, not having mentioned my wish for months : however, I looked upon it as the first indication of Providence favourable to my de sign, and began immediately to devise the means by which I might carry it into execution. After some deliberation, I determined to attempt to build a vessel ; and, although I knew little of ship-building, and had scarcely any tools to work with, I succeeded, in about three months, in completing a vessel, between seventy and eighty tons burden, with no other assistance than that which the natives could render, who were wholly unacquainted with any mechanical art. I thought, at first, of getting the keel only at Rarotonga, and completing the vessel at Raiatea; but, as the king, chiefs, and people urged me to build it at their island, promising me at the same time every assistance in tlreir power, I yielded to their wishes. As many friends have expressed a desire to know the means by which this great work was effected, I shall be rather more minute in detailing them than I should otherwise have been. My first step was to make a pair of smith's bellows ; for it is well known that little can be done towards the building of a ship without a forge. We had but four goats on the island, and one of these was giving a little milk, which was too valuable to be dispensed with ; so that three only were killed ; and with their skins, as a substitute for leather, I succeeded, after three or four days' labour, in making a pair of smith'sbellows. These, however, did not answer very well ; indeed, I found bellows-making to be a more difficult task than I had imagined, for I could not get the upper box to fill properly ; in addition to which my bellows drew in the fire. I examined publications upon mechanic arts, dictionaries, and encyclopaedias, but not one book in our possession gave directions suf ficiently explicit for the construction of so com mon an article ; and it appears to me a general deficiency in all the works I have seen on the useful arts, that they do not supply such simple instructions and explanations as would direct to the accomplishment of an important and useful object by means less complex than the machinery of civilised countries. When, for example, we were anxious to make sugar, and for this purpose carefully read tbe article on sugar-boiling in the most popular Encyclo paedia in our possession, not having the ap paratus therein described, we derived no practi cal benefit from it. If, in addition to a thorough and scientific description of the most perfect methods, there were appended plain and simple directions for manufacturing the article without the expensive machinery in common use, it would certainly be of immense service to persons situated as we, and emigrants to new colonies, have been. These remarks are applicable to soap-boiling, salt-making, paper-manufacturing, and a variety of other processes of a similar nature. Missionaries, and others leaving the country, when in search of information upon various important subjects, generally fail in their object, by seeking it where everything is effected by complex machinery, and all the improvements of the present uge are found in perfection. It was so with us. We were taken to places of the above description ; we gazed, we wondered, and were delighted, but obtained no practical information ; for few imagine that there is any other way of effecting an object than that which they see. All persons going to uncivilised countries, especially Missionaries, should seek that knowledge which may be easily applied, as they have to do everything themselves, and in situations where they cannot obtain the means in general use elsewhere. It may, by some, be thought unwise to go back a hundred years, and employ the tedious processes then in use, rather than embrace the facilities which the experience of succeeding ages has afforded. But such an opinion, although specious, is un sound. Let the circumstances of the Mis sionary, and the state of the people to whom he goes, be taken into the account, and it must be at once obvious, that the simplicity of the means used two or three hundred years ago would better suit both his condition and theirs than the more complex improvements of modern times. On our arrival at Raiatea, I took my oldEnglish bellows to pieces ; not, as the tale goes, to look for the wind, but to ascertain the reason why mine did not blow as well as others. I had not proceeded far when the mystery was ex plained, and I stood amazed at my own igno rance ; for, instead of making the pipe com municate only with the upper chamber, I had inserted it into the under as well, by which the wind escaped, and the llame was drawn in. To complete my perplexities, the rats, which at Rarotonga were like one of the plagues of Egypt, as if by general consent, congregated during the night in immense numbers, and devoured every particle of the goats'-skins ; and on entering the workshop in the morning, I was mortified by the discovery that nothing remained of my unfortunate bellows but the bare boards. This was really vexatious, for I had no material to supply the loss. Still bent upon the accomplishment of my object, and while anxiously considering the best means " to raise the wind," for that was essential to my success, it struck me that, as a pump threw water, a machine constructed upon the same principle must of necessity throw wind. I therefore made a box, about eighteen or twenty inches square, and four feet high ; put a valve at the bottom, and fitted in a damper, similar to the piston in the cylinder of a steam-engine. This we loaded with stones to force it down with velocity, and attached to it a long lever by which it was again raised. Before placing it near the fire we tried it, and were delighted CONSTRUCTION OF A SHIP. 39 with our success ; but, on bringing it in con tact with that devouring element, its deficien cies were soon developed. In the first place, we found that there was too great an interval between the blasts, and, secondly, that like its predecessor it sucked in the fire so fast, that in a few minutes it was in a blaze. We soon ex tinguished the flames, and remedied the evil by worked them alternately ; thus keeping up a making a valve at the back of the pipe com municating with the fire, which opened to let out the wind, and shut when the machine was filling. To overcome the other inconvenience, we concluded, that if one box would give us one blast, two would double it ; and we there fore made another of the same dimensions, and continual blast, or rather a succession of blasts. Eight or ten men were required to work them ; but labour was cheap, and the natives were delighted with the employment. With this contrivance we did all our iron-work, using a perforated stone for a fire-iron, an anvil of the same material, and a pair of carpenter's pincers for our tongs. As a substitute for coals, we made charcoal, from the cocoa-nut, tamanu, and other trees. The first iron the natives saw worked excited their astonishment exceedingly, especially the welding of two pieces together. Old and young, men and women, chieftain and peasant, hastened to behold the wonder ; and when they saw the ease with which heated iron could be wrought, they exclaimed, " Why did not we think of heating the hard stuff also, instead of beating it with stones! What a reign of dark hearts Satan's is!" Nothing, however, in the ship excited more interest than the pumps; even the king was so much de lighted, that he frequently had his favourite stool carried on board, and entertained himself for hours in pumping out the bilge-water. As we had no saw, we split the trees in half with wedges ; and then the natives adzed them down with smallhatchets,whichtheytiedto acrooked piece of wood as a handle, and used as a sub stitute for the adze. When we wanted a bent or twisted plank, having no apparatus for steam ing it, we bent a piece of bamboo to the shape required, sent into the woods for a crooked tree, and by splitting this in half obtained two planks suited to our purpose. Having but little iron, we bored large auger-holes through the timbers, and also through the outer and inner plank of the vessel, and drove in wooden pins, termed trenails, by which the whole fabric was held firmly together. As a substitute for oakum, we used what little cocoa-nut husk we could obtain, and supplied the deficiency with dried banana stumps, native cloth, or other substances which would answer the purpose. For ropes we obtained the bark of the hibiscus, constructed a rope machine, and prepared ex cellent cordage from that article. For sails we used the mats on which the natives sleep, and quilted them that they might be strong enough 40 VOYAGE TO AITUTAKI— SWARM OF RATS. to resist the wind. After making a turning- lathe, we found that the aito, or iron-wood, answered remarkably well for the sheaves of blocks. By these means the whole was com pleted in fifteen weeks ; when we launched a vessel, about sixty feet in length, and eighteen feet in breadth, and called her " The Messen ger of Peace," which she has proved to be on many occasions. The hanging of the rudder occasioned me some difficulty ; for, having no iron sufficiently large for pintles, we made them from a piece of a pickaxe, a cooper's adze, and a large hoe. They answered exceedingly well ; but, being doubtful of this, I prepared a sub stitute for a rudder, in case any part of it should give way. Thinking it prudent to try our vessel before we ventured to Tahiti, which was seven or eight hundred miles from us, I determined on a visit to our interesting station at Aitutaki, which was only about 170 miles distant. As the king, Makea, had never seen any other island, he determined to accompany me. Raising our wooden and stone anchors, and hoisting our mat sails, I took my compass and quadrant, and put to sea, accompanied only by natives. We had not proceeded above six miles from the shore when, in shifting the sails, the na tives not observing what was said to them, and not being acquainted with maritime usages, let the foresail go, and, as the wind was very strong, it broke our foremast. Providentially, however, about twelve or fifteen feet above the deck was left standing ; and, having cleared the wreck, and hoisted a part of our sail on the broken mast, we turned back, and were thank ful to find that we should reach the land, although several miles to leeward of the har bour. We filled a cask with stones, which, in addition to our wooden auchor, we hoped might hold the vessel outside the reef ; and if not, I resolved on the desperate alternative of running upon it, by which the vessel, in all probability, would have been dashed to pieces ; but this was preferable to being driven from the island with a scanty supply of provisions, and the ship in a crippled state, in a track where there was not an island within a thousand miles. Happily we had a number of natives on4board, and by making them all work, we succeeded by sunset, contrary to expectation, in reaching the harbour in safety. We got a new mast, repaired our damages, and in a few days sailed again. Having a strong and favourable wind, we reached Aitutaki on Sab bath morning, in time to conduct the services of the day. After remaining eight or ten days, with much interest to ourselves, and, we hope, advantage to the people, we returned to Rarotonga with a most singular cargo, principally consisting of pigs, cocoa-nuts, and cats ; the king having ob tained about seventy of the first, and a number of the last. Notwithstanding the singularity of our importation, it was peculiarly valuable to the inhabitants of Rarotonga ; for, prior to this, they had no other than a breed of small native pigs, of which there were but few, as they were particularly tender and difficult to rear ; and the cats were so valuable that one was quite a trea sure, as the rats were astonishingly numerous ; so much so, indeed, that we never sat down to a meal without having two or more persons to keep them off the table. When kneeling at family prayer they would run over us in all directions ; and we found much difficulty in keeping them out of our beds. One morning, on hearing the servant scream, while making the bed, we ran into the room, and found that four of these intruders, in search of a snug place, had crept under my pillow ; they paid, however, for their temerity with their lives. Our friends, Mr. and Mrs. Pitman, experienced equal in convenience from these troublesome and disgust ing little animals. Some of the trunks were covered with skin, on which the rats commenced very effectual operations, as they had done before upon my unfortunate bellows ; and Mrs. Pitman, having one night neglected to put her shoes in a place of safety, sought for them the following morning in vain ; for these nocturnal ramblers, being in search of a supper, had devoured them ; and a pah- of shoes in the South Seas is no con temptible loss. This, however, was a serious affair for their fraternity ; for our friends com plained to the authorities of the station, who forthwith issued a decree of extermination against the whole race of rats ; and, after school, man, woman, and child armed themselves with a suit able weapon, and commenced their direful oper ations. Baskets were made of the cocoa-nut leaves, about five or six feet in length, in which to deposit the bodies jjf the slain, and in about an hour, no less than thirty of these were filled. But, notwithstanding this destruction, there did not appear the slightest diminution, from which it will be perceived that cats were not the least valuable animal that could be taken to the island. These, however, did not destroy so many rats as the pigs, which were exceedingly voracious, and did much towards ridding the island of the intolerable nuisance. Besides hogs and cats, Makea and those who accompanied him obtained a considerable quantity of native cloth and mats, which are highly esteemed and of considerable worth at Rarotonga. Another valuable portion of our cargo was a large supply of cocoa-nuts ; for, a short time before our first visit, a very dis astrous war had taken place, in which the king and his party were beaten, and driven for a time to take refuge in a natural fortress in the moun tains. The victors then cut down and destroyed all the bread-fruit and cocoa-nut trees, so that on the north, west, and south sides of the island, which were conquered by the inhabitants of the east, not an old cocoa-nut tree was to be seen. This supply, under these circumstances, was consequently of great value for seed. The king made a distribution of his treasures among his chiefs and friends : all were therefore delighted with the voyage. Having never been to sea before, Makea had many wonders to tell. One of his expressions was, " Never again will I call those men warriors who fight on the shore ; the English only, who battle with the winds and waves of the ocean, THE KING ALARMED— MR. WILKS'S LETTER. 41 are worthy of that name." On our voyage to Aitutaki we had a strong wind and a heavy sea, and during the night the waves gave the vessel many severe blows, at which his majesty was much alarmed, and asked me very seriously if she would not be knocked to pieces ; and, on being assured that there was no danger, he was for a time satisfied, but not so fully as to allow me to be for one moment out of his sight. The weather being very boisterous, I was under the necessity of frequently going on deck during the night ; but on every such occasion the king fol lowed me, and appeared to feel safe only at my side. As the wind was unfavourable, and we were three days and three nights in returning to Rarotonga, on the second evening the king began to get anxious and restless, fearing that we had missed the island, and were sailing "ite tareva kaua," or into wide gaping space. And when on the third evening the sun had retired beneath the horizon, and no land was descried, Makea became exceedingly distressed, almost despairing of again beholding his beloved isle. I endea voured to console him by requesting him to go to sleep till the moon should rise, when I pro mised that he should see the land. He replied by a very significant question, Im moe ia e tama f " Can I sleep, friend !" and determined to re main on deck until the time I mentioned, when, to his inexpressible joy, Rarotonga was in sight. His varied and singular expressions evinced the delightful emotions which the sight of the island kindled in his breast. Nothing appeared to excite so much astonishment as the accuracy with which we could tell the time when land would be seen. His inquiries were unceasing, how it was possible we could speak with so much precision about that which we could not see. On entering tbe harbour we were struck with the appearance of our house; for, as the ship had been built just in front of it, much rubbish had been collected, the fence surrounding the front garden was broken down, and the bananas and shrubs destroyed. This was the state of things when we left tbe island, but now not only was the fence repaired, and the garden well cul tivated, but the dark red mountain plantain, and golden banana, fully ripe, were smiling a wel come to us through the splendid leaves which surrounded the trunks that bore them. It appears that Mrs. Williams had intimated to the females who attended her for instruction, that it would afford her pleasure to have the pathway and garden put in order by the time of my arrival. They were delighted with the sug gestion, and answered, " We will not leave a chip against which, on his return, he shall strike his feet." The following morning they com menced making the pathways. For this pur pose they placed large flat stones for curb edging, and filled the intervals with kirikiri, or small broken pieces of branching coral thrown up by the sea ; and strewed black pebbles amongst them, which, being intermingled with the white coral, gave to the broad pathway a neat and lively appearance. They then planted the sides with full grown ti * trees, interspersed with the * Dracana terminalis. gigantic taro, or kape. * By their request their husbands undertook to repair the fence round the house, while they ornamented the enclosure with banana and plantain trees, bearing fruit which would be ripe about the time of our ex pected return ; and the kind people appeared amply rewarded, by observing the pleasure which their work afforded us. CHAPTER XI. Mr. Buzacott' s arrival — Receive Letters from England from the Rev. Matthew Wilks. &c. — Also from Raiatea — Character and Death of Tuahine — We leave Raroton ga — Useful Arts introduced among the People — Voyage iromRarotonga to Tahiti — Makea s Return. Shortly after our return from Aitutaki, we were cheered by the arrival of Mr. and Mrs. Buzacott ; and as they were to occupy the station we were about to leave, they took up their resi dence with us. The very day after they landed, Mr. Buzacott, who is an excellent mechanic, put on his apron, turned up his sleeves, and be gan to work at the forge. On seeing this the people were much delighted, especially Makea, who exclaimed, " This is the man for us ! this is the man for us !" Mr. Buzacott, on being intro duced to my bellows, exclaimed, " What have you here !" and, when I informed him, he laughed heartily, and wished to break them to pieces, and with the materials to make a proper pair ; but although they were unwieldy in their dimensions, unsightly in their appearance, and quite unbellowslike in their construction, yet they answered the purpose well ; and while I had no objection that my ingenious young brother should try his skill, I wished to have some proof of it before I consented to destroy the useful machine necessity had compelled me to invent. By the timely arrival of these kind friends, our wants were supplied, and our troubles, in a measure, terminated. To our esteemed fellow- labourers, also, Mr. and Mrs. Pitman, it was a source of great satisfaction ; for being in deli cate health, they had at one time questioned the propriety of remaining at Rarotonga after our departure : but by the arrival of Mr. and Mrs. Buzacott their anxieties were entirely removed. Prior, however, to this important accession to the Rarotonga mission, they had formed so strong an attachment to the people and the people to them, that they had generously determined to remain on this isolated spot, amidst those who had just emerged from barbarism, and at a dis tance of six hundred miles from any of their brethren ; and God has since graciously rewarded them for their devotedness to his service. By Mr. Buzacott I received many letters, one of which was from my beloved and venerable pas tor, the Rev. Matthew Wilks, and its insertion here will be gratifying to myself, and not less so to the numerous friends who venerate his memory. " My DEAR, DEAR WILLIAMS, " Dear to me as the apple of my eye, * * * I do love you. My heart leaps when 1 think of you ; I do pray for you — I pray that you may * Caladium odoratum. 42 TUAHINE'S CHARACTER— TUAHINE'S LETTER. never be weary in well doing — I pray that you may abound in every good word and work — I pray that you may be the living epistle of Christ, known and read of all men — I pray that you may live long, and be useful all your life long ; and when you and 1 are called to render an ac count, that we may hear our Master say, ' Enter ye into the joy of your Lord.' Then we will answer, ' Yes, Lord, through thy infinite mercy.' " Then we with all in glory Shall thankfully repeat The amazing pleasing story Of Jesus' love so great. " In this blest contemplation. We shall for ever dwell ; And prove such consolation As none below can tell. " News. — Old Tab. yet stands where she did — and, for the most part, fills as she did — many die off and enter their rest. We have had two very great losses — Mr. Wilson, and my dear brother Hyatt. I cannot be long, being now turned 80 — and have this week been cupped. Of all the. mortals that inherit the kingdom of God I shall be the most unworthy, and yet I hope I shall arrive safely. " Pray give my very kind love to your brethren : live together, co-operate, make a common cause in your exalted labours. The Lord fill your new chapel with truly Christian worshippers, and make it one of his resting-places ! * * * Grace, mercy, and peace be with you all, and believe me, in undissembled love, to be your once affec tionate pastor and patron. "M. Wilks." At the same time I received communications from my own station at Raiatea, and was grieved to find that my truly valuable deacon, Tuahine, had been taken to his rest. He was one of the two lads who began first to call upon the name of the Lord Jesus in Tahiti. A lengthened ac count of this interesting individual would no doubt be acceptable to the reader, but I fear to attempt anything beyond a bare outline of his history ; for I am anxious to curtail and com press the information I have to communicate into as small a compass as possible. When the great work of conversion com menced at Tahiti, one of the Missionaries, on going into the bushes for meditation and secret prayer, there being no place for retirement in the native habitations, heard a sound, which on listening attentively he discovered to be the voice of prayer. It was the first time that any Mis sionary's heart had been gladdened by hearing a native of Tahiti use the language of devotion. This individual had been impressed by some remarks from Pomare ; and, anxious to possess a friend to whom he could unbosom his feelings, he applied to Tuahine, who had for a long time lived in the mission families. Happily, Tuahine's mind was in a similar state, and they resolved to retire frequently to the valleys for conversa tion and prayer, by which exercises these salu tary and delightful impressions were deepened. After a time, several young persons united with them ; and this little band, without any Mission ary to guide them, agreed to refrain from the worship of their idols, and from the wicked practices to which their countrymen were ad dicted, to observe the Sabbath-day, and to wor ship Jehovah alone. As Christianity spread, Tuahine rendered essential service to the Mis sionaries, by directing the inquiries of the new converts, and teaching in the schools. Possess ing an accurate acquaintance with his own lan guage, and, by his long residence with the Mis sionaries, having obtained a considerable amount of scriptural knowledge, he was qualified to afford valuable assistance in translating the Scrip tures, which he did, first to Mr. Nott, and after wards to myself. Frequently has he sat eight and ten hours a-day aiding me in this important work ; and to him are we in a great measure indebted for the correctness with which we have been enabled to give the oracles of truth to the people. When we removed to Raiatea he ac companied us, and, as might have been expected, his counsel and assistance, especially in the schools and in teaching us the language, were most invaluable. When I was absent from home he was left in charge of the station ; and his addresses, which were most beautiful speci mens of native eloquence, resembling more the mildness of a Barnabas than the thunder of a Boanerges, were exceedingly acceptable to the people. The neatness of his style, the correct ness of his language, and the simplicity and beauty of his similes, never failed to rivet the at tention of his hearers. He had also a surprising gift in prayer. Many times have I listened with intense interest to the glowing language of devotion which flowed from his lips. He was much respected by the people ; maintained an honourable course many years ; discharged the office of deacon with diligence and fidelity, and died at the age of about forty-five, in the enjoy ment of the consolations of the Gospel. A day or two before his death he wrote to me the fol lowing letter: — Raiatea, November Wth, 1827. " Oh, dear Friend, " May blessing attend you and your family, through Jesus Christ our Lord. I have written this letter on the day, that my body is completely destroyed with sickness. I am con vinced of the near approach of death, for I per ceive that my illness is very great. The 11th of November is the day on which I write : I write with great difficulty, for my eyes are now dim in death. My compassion for my family is very great ; I therefore write in death to you, my dear friend, about my family. We do not belong to Raiatea, neither myself nor my wife ; we both belong to Tahiti ; but from love to the word of God, and attachment to you, our teacher, we have forsaken our lands, and now I am about to die. It is death that terminates our close connexion. This is what I have to say to you, my dear friend, about my family ; do not let them remain at Raiatea ; take them to Tahiti, in your own large boat ; convey them there your self ; letno one else. They belong to Papeete : there are their parents and their land. My perplexity is very great, occasioned by my dear family crying and grieving around me. They TUAHINE'S DEATH— UAEVA'S LETTER. 43 say, ' Who will convey us back to our lands !' I refer them to you ; replying, ' Mr. Williams is our friend.' We miss you very much in my ill ness, and grieve greatly at your absence. Now, my dear friend, let me entreat you not to forget my dying request. Do not follow the custom of my countrymen, and say, when I am gone, ' Oh, it is only the command of a corpse.' This is what they say, and then seize his little property. I have been endeavouring to lengthen out my breath to see you again, but I cannot ; my hour is come, when God will take me to 'himself, and I cannot resist his will. Perhaps this is the time the Lord has appointed for me. And now, my dear friend, the great kindness you have shown me is at an end ; your face will not see my face again in the flesh — you and I are se parated. Dear friend, I am going now to the place we all so ardently desire. " May the grace of the Lord Jesus Christ be with you and your family ! " Tuahine. "P.S. — Take care of my family." His loss was very severely felt, for the affairs of the state began to get into confusion soon after his death. His colleague, on whom the charge of the mission devolved, although a sen sible man, was not equal to the greatness ofthe work, which he himself, with much Christian simplicity, confesses in the following letter : — " Raiatea, March, 17*A, 1828. Dear friend Mr. Williams, " May the blessing of God and the grace of the Lord Jesus Christ be with you. This is my communication. Where are you! What are you doing! Is it well with you! Are you dead ! Alas, how long it is since our eyes saw each other's features ! Tuahine is dead. He will never see your face again : perhaps that alsc may be the case with me. He died in November. *¦ We have had visits from Mr. Barff and Mr. Piatt. Mr. Pritchard is now with us, and we like him very much. Ten families have joined us lately : they were previously living almost like heathens. Mr. Barff has baptized them. Only two members of our church have acted inconsistently since you left. " Dear friend, the work of a minister in super intending a church is a great work ; it is more than I can carry ; it is also a fearful work. I am as a presumptuous child, who, with his parent by his side, thinks himself great and clever, but, when unsupported by his parent, learns his deficiency. It is well said by our Lord, that the disciple is not wiser than his teacher. " Dear friend, I am anxiously desiring your return, for I have expended all my little stock of knowledge ; and, as you are aware, I have a people to instruct who are as wise as myself; they generally, however, express themselves pleased with my addresses " Do not come in tbe vessel you are building, lest Mrs. Williams and the children should be drowned in the sea. Hasten home, as we expect our brethren and friends from Huahine to be present at our missionary meeting in May. "Your premises are overgrown with weeds; your large boat is being eaten by the worms, and your cattle are running wild ; for the people whom you left in charge of them are neglectful. I thought it best to tell you all this, that you may not be surprised on your arrival. " Blessing on you through Jesus ! "Uaeva." We continued at Rarotonga about a month after the arrival of Mr. and Mrs. Buzacott, and spent that time in strengthening our vessel with iron, supplied by Mr. B.; in erecting his new house ; teaching him the language, and com municating important information relative to the mission. It was a matter of deep regret to our The Messenger of Peace, as she appeared when leaving Rarotonga for Tahiti. 44 THE KING'S ARRANGEMENT— SUGAR BOILING, &c. beloved friends, that we were compelled to leave them so soon. The king, who intended to accompany us to Raiatea, gave instructions to his people for the regulation of their conduct during his absence ; made the necessary arrangements with his chiefs, and nominated a Regent to act for him till he should return. Every thing being prepared, and having resided twelve months at this im portant station, during the most critical period of its history, we took an affectionate leave of our beloved coadjutors and their kind people, truly thankful that, on being relieved from this heavy charge, I was resigning it into the hands of brethren so well qualified to fulfil its duties. The inhabitants of this lovely spot evinced con siderable feeling at the prospect of losing us. For more than a month prior to our departure, little groups would collect in the cool of the evening, and, when sitting around the trunk of some tree of gigantic growth, or beneath the shade of a stately banana, would sing in plaintive tones the stanzas they had composed to express their sorrow at our anticipated separation. On the evening of our departure several thousands ac companied us to the beach ; and, as the boat left the shore, they sang with one voice, and we think we may add, with one heart, Kia ora e Tama ma I te aerenga i te moana e I " Blessing on you, beloved friends ; blessing on you in journeying on the deep." This tbey repeated at very short intervals, the sounds becoming fainter and fainter as we proceeded, until they were lost in the distance. The effect was so overpowering that not a person in the boat could refrain from weeping. The Rarotongans improved much in every respect during our residence among them. The females were completely transformed in their appearance, for, although both the teachers were single men, they had taught them to make bonnets; but I must add, that their taste in forming the shape did not admit of equal com mendation with their desire to raise the character and promote the comfort of the female sex. These deficiencies, however, were supplied by Mrs. Pitman and Mrs. Williams, who made some hundreds of bonnets, and rendered many of the natives proficients in the art. They made also, for the chiefs' wives, ' European garments, and instructed them to use the needle, with which they were much delighted. Besides this, they met, almost daily, the different classes of females, to impart to them religious and other instruction. By myself, the men were taught various useful arts, such as to work at tbe forge, to erect better houses, and to make articles of furniture ; in which they have since far excelled their neighbours. At Mr. Pitman's station, I constructed a turning-lathe, and the first thing I turned was the leg of a sofa, with which the chief to whom it belonged was so much delighted that he strung it round his neck, and walked up and down the settlement, exhibiting it to the admiration of the astonished inhabitants, many of whom exclaimed, that, if they had possessed it prior to the renunciation of idolatry, it would certainly have been an object of worship, and have taken the precedence of all their other idols. We made a sugar-mill* for them, and taught them to boil sugar. As the people, before our arrival had de stroyed all the cocoa-nut trees, from which they might have procured oil, and having no other ,sm HI article of commerce, we entertained a pleasin<* hope that the manufacture of cordage and rope, from the hibiscus bark, might become a valuable substitute. With this view I constructed a rope- machine, taught them the art of rope-making, and encouraged them to prepare a great quantity, some of which was sent to New South Wales, in the expectation of finding a market for it. ; but we did not succeed according to our antici pations, and the Rarotongans are still destitute oi the means of exchange for European com on! ,™S llaS th° SeT™th } had m-lde' ha™&- constructed one upon the same principle for most of our native Mission- «ij StiltlOllSt ARRIVAL AT TAHITI— PAPEIHA'S NARRATIVE. 45 modifies. At my own station, also, being desirous of adding to the few articles which the natives were able to offer in exchange for European manufactures, I hired a person, at very considerable expense, to teach me the art of growing and preparing Brazil tobacco. Having obtained this information, we induced the natives to plant about a hundred and fifty acres, and made the necessary apparatus for pressing, &c, and, as a vessel was sailing at this time for New South Wales, I wrote to inform our undeviating friend, the Rev. S. Marsden, of our proceedings. Delighted with the informa tion, he inserted my letter in the Sydney Ga zette. Some narrow-minded merchants im mediately took the alarm, and tormented the governor, until a prohibitory duty of 4s. per lb. was imposed upon tobacco from the South Sea Islands. Thus our expense and labour were lost. It appeared to me to derogate from the dignity of a great nation, thus to crush the ener gies of an infant people. Both Mr. Pitman and myself were constant in our attendance at the schools, but, having no books in their dialect, the natives could make very little progress ; and, although they dili gently attended the means of grace, there were but few who gave evidences of a change of heart. Much knowledge, however, was im parted, and a foundation laid on which the two excellent and devoted Missionaries, who occupy these stations, have since been honoured to raise an elevated and spiritual superstructure. We never reflect upon our voyage from Raro tonga without feeling our obligations to a kind and protecting Providence. It will be readily conceived, that a vessel built under the circum stances I have described, very insufficiently fas tened with iron, caulked with the bark, and covered partly with lime, and partly with gum from the bread-fruit tree, instead of pitch, was not calculated to sustain the buffetings of many storms. But, although it blows from the E. almost continually in those latitudes, we were favoured, during our voyage of 800 miles, with a fair wind, which was so light as to appear almost sensible that it was filling sails which could not endure its fury, while the sea was so smooth that it seemed as if reserving its power for some bark better fitted to withstand it ; or, rather, we felt that He who said to the winds and waves, " Be still," continued to care for his disciples. We arrived off Papeete harbour, at Tahiti, during the night, and in the morning the crews of the ships at anchor, and the friends on shore, observed, literally, "a strange sail" at sea. Some took us for South American patriots, others for pirates, and others could not tell "what to make of us." As soon as we entered the harbour the officers of the vessels lying there, and our friends from the shore, hastened on board, to see the prodigy, and expressed not a little astonishment at every part of the ship, but especially at the rudder-irons. From Mr. and Mrs. Pritchard we received a cordial welcome. After introducing Makea to the Missionaries and authorities of the island, and recruiting our strength, in a few days we departed for Raiatea, where we arrived, the 26th of April, 1828, having been absent exactly twelve months. On landing I was thus greeted by the people : " How good it is you are come ! now our troubles will be at an end ! what should we have done had you stayed away much longer!" I was at a loss to divine the import of these exclamations, till I was informed that a serious disagreement had arisen between Ta matoa and the principal chiefs of the island. In a few days, however, these differences were settled, and we prepared for our Missionary meeting ; at which from two to three thousand persons assembled, many of whom had come from Huahine and Tahaa ; with the noble chief, also, from Rarotonga, whose presence, together with the exhibition of the rejected idols of his people, added much to the interest of the oc casion. This was the third time we had enjoyed the privilege of exhibiting to the Raiateans the abandoned idols of other islands. Many suit able addresses were then delivered, and all present seemed delighted. Makea, during his stay at the Society Islands, visited Huahine, Tahaa, and Porapora, the chiefs and people of which showed him kind attentions, and made him valuable presents. With these, after about two mouths' residence with us, we sent him home, where he arrived in safety, and was cordially welcomed by tbe Missionaries and his people. CHAPTER XII. Papeiha's Narrative — Ideas of the People on seeing him Read — Arrival of his Colleague — Arrangements for Increased Exertion — The Success which attended their Efforts— Ludicrous Incidents with a Cat — First Place of Worship erected— War with the Heathens — The en tire Subversion of Idolatry at Rarotonga — War at Raia tea— Accusations of Professor Lee. During our stay at Rarotonga, I obtained a minute and interesting account from Papeiha, of the circumstances which occurred from his first landing to the time of our arrival, a brief abstract of which I shall present to the reader. On reaching the shore, he was conducted to the house of old Makea, the father of the present chief of that name. An immense crowd fol lowed him, one of whom was saying, " I'll have his hat;" another, "I'll have his jacket;" a third, "I'll have his shirt;" but they did not carry their threats into execution : for the chief called out, " Speak to us, 0 man, that we may know the business on which you are come." Papeiha replied, that he had come to instruct them in the knowledge of the true God, and the way of eternal salvation through his Son Jesus Christ, in order that they, like the inha bitants of Tahiti, the Society, and other islands, might burn the idols of wood, of cloth, and of birds' feathers, which they had made and called gods. Immediately there burst from the multi tude an exclamation of surprise and horror; "What! burn the gods! what gods shall we then have, and what shall we do without the gods !" 46 PAPEIHA'S NARRATIVE— CONVERSION OF TINOMANA. The teacher and his party commenced family worship morning and evening, at which many persons attended ; and, after the first Sabbath- day services, about twenty joined them, among whom was Davida, the eldest son of the present king, who has continued steadfast, and is now rendering essential service to the mission, as superintendent of Mr. Buzacott's schools, and leader of the singing. Frequently has Papeiha showed me the stone from which, overshadowed by a grove of banana-trees, he delivered his first address to the wondering inhabitants of Rarotonga. Shortly after this, Tinomana, the chief of Arorangi, a district about eight miles from Pa peiha's residence, sent for him, and expressed a wish to know something about Jehovah and Jesus Christ. This chief, with the whole of the people of his district, were living in the mountains, where Tinomana himself was horn. As this was the weakest district of the three, its inhabitants were subject to peculiar oppres sion from their more powerful neighbours, who plundered them of their food and property with impunity. When a sacrifice was required, they would invariably seek it from this oppressed people ; and so great was their danger, that, when they wanted fish, they were obliged to steal down to the sea in the dead of the night, and return before day-break, to avoid being plundered or murdered by parties from the other districts. Papeiha, after having explained the leading doctrines of the Gospel to this chieftain, very judiciously pointed out to him the advantages which he would derive from the reception of Christianity ; and showed, that by this means, peace and good-will would so reign through the land, that he would no longer be compelled to live in the mountains, but might take up his abode near the sea, and, with his people, enjoy his possessions as securely as the inhabitants of the victorious districts. The chief was considerably impressed with these representations ; and, after meditating for some hours upon what he had heard, he came to Papeiha, and said, that he felt greatly disposed to burn his gods, but was afraid, " lest they should be enraged, and strangle him in the night." The teacher assured him that he had nothing to apprehend, as they were destitute of any real power. In the evening Papeiha and his party engaged in prayer, when many of the people of the district united with them, and for the first time since the island had been inha bited, bowed their knees to the God of Heaven, and listened to the voice of devotion. When Papeiha had spread his mat, and laid himself down to rest, Tinomana brought his, and, having placed it by his side, told him that he came to be taught to pray to Jehovah. De lighted with the request, Papeiha comm enced a short prayer, which the chief repeated after him ; but overcome with fatigue he dropped off to sleep. He had, however, scarcely closed his eyes, when the anxious chief awoke him, saying, " I've forgotten it ; . go over it again." After causing him to repeat it many times, once more he fell asleep, and again wa6 awoke. This was repeated frequently through the night. In the morning, Papeiha returned home, and Tinomana accompanied him part of the distance, reciting, during the journey, the prayer which he had learned. On taking his leave, he informed the teacher that he was much delighted with what he had heard ; and that he would go home and think seriously upon the subject ; for, as it was a matter of great importance, it was not well to be in haste. Papeiha had not long returned, when another opportunity was afforded him for bearing his testimony to the truth, in the presence of a multitude of heathen, on the very spot where' " Satan's seat was." The people were assem bled at a marae, offering great quantities of food to the gods. Many priests, pretending to be inspired, were shouting and vociferating, with all tbe wildness of heathen frenzy, sur rounded by worshippers who presented a strange and ludicrous appearance. Some had one side of their face and body blackened with charcoal ; others were painted with stripes of all the colours they could procure ; while many were dressed as warriors, with large caps, adorned with white cowrie-shells and birds' feathers. Our intrepid friend pressed into the midst of the assembly, and commenced addressing them on the folly of offering such quantities of food to a piece of wood which they had carved, and decorated, and called a god. Upon this, a priest stood up and affirmed that theirs was a real god, that he was a -powerful god, and that the feast they were celebrating was very sacred. Papeiha told them that the day was not far dis tant when the true God Jehovah would show them the folly of their practices, and would make the gods they now worshipped "fuel for the fire." On hearing this declaration there was great confusion, but they listened very attentively while he described the love of God in giving his Son to die for sinners. After Papeiha had ceased, the people asked him many questions, one of which was, "Where does your God live!" He replied, that heaven was his dwelling-place, but that he filled both the heavens and the earth with his presence. "We cannot see him," they rejoined, "hut ours are here before our eyes, and, if the earth was full of your God, surely he would be big enough to be seen." " And should we not run against him!" exclaimed another. To all this Papeiha made answer, " that the earth was full of air, but we did not run against it; that we were surrounded by light, but it did not impede our progress." This conversation terminated, how ever, without adding to the number of converts ; but the teacher had the satisfaction of knowing that he had**borne a faithful testimony to the truth, and that many had heard, for the first time in their lives, of salvation by the blood of Jesus Christ. As Papeiha carried his Testament with him, it frequently elicited curious remarks. While walking about the settlement, the people would say, "There! there's the god of that man! what a strange god it is, he carries it about with him, but we leave ours at the marae." FIRST IDOL DESTROYED— PAPEIHA'S NARRATIVE CONTINUED. 47 When they saw him reading, they would say that he and his God were talking together. Five months had elapsed when Papeiha was cheered by the arrival of his associate Tiberio. Although the labours of Papeiha had been un remitting, and the converts by no means nume rous, he was not discouraged ; and now that he was animated by the presence, and aided by the co-operation, of a colleague, it was deter mined that himself and his associate should employ all their energies for the accomplish ment of their object, and, undeterred by threats or danger, should go on any occasion to any part of the island where it was probable that success might reward their efforts. With this view they resolved, in the first instance, to visit all the influential chiefs, and explain to them the principles of Christinn truth, pointing out, not only the spiritual but the temporal advan tages which would accrue from the renunciation of idolatry. While carrying their resolution into effect, at some places they were kindly treated, but at others they were ridiculed, and from one or two they narrowly escaped with their lives. A few days after their return to the station, a priest came to the teachers, and expressed his determination to burn his idol, and had brought his eldest son, a boy about ten years of age, to place under their care, lest the gods, in their anger, should destroy him. Leaving the child with the teachers, he returned home, and early the next morning came bending under the weight of the cumbrous god he was bringing to be burned. A crowd followed him, calling him a madman ; but he persisted in his determina tion to embrace the word of Jehovah, and declared that he was unconcerned about the result. He then threw his idol at the feet of the teachers, one of whom fetched his saw to cut it up ; but, as soon as the people observed the saw applied to the head of the god, they all took fright and ran away. Many even of their converts were seized with the panic, and hid themselves among the bushes. After a short time they returned ; and in the presence of an immense crowd, the first rejected idol of Raro tonga was committed to the flames. In order to convince the people ofthe utter futility of their fears, when the idol was reduced to ashes the teachers roasted some bananas upon them, of which they ate themselves, and invited others to partake. No one, however,* had courage to admit so dangerous a morsel into their mouths, and waited, with no small anxiety, to witness the result of the teachers' temerity; but, like the inhabitants of Melita, " after they had looked a great while, and saw no harm come to them, they changed their minds," and said theirs was the truth. The crowd of spectators returned with feehngs so different from those with which they assembled, that in less than ten days after this event not fewer than fourteen idols were destroyed. Im mediately afterwards Tinomana, the conquered chief, sent for the teachers, and on their arrival at his residence in the mountains, he informed them that, after much deliberation, he had determined to embrace Christianity and to place himself under their instructions, and therefore wished to know what was the first step to the reception of truth. The teachers informed him that he must destroy his maraes and burn his idols, to which he instantly replied, " Come with me and see them destroyed." On reach ing the place he desired some person to take a fire-brand, and set fire to the temple, the atarau, or altar, and the unus, or sacred pieces of carved wood by which the marae was decorated. Four great idols were then brought and laid at the teachers' feet, who, having read a portion of .the tenth chapter of the gospel of St. Luke, which was peculiarly appropriate, especially from the seventeenth to the twentieth verses, disrobed them of the cloth in which they were enveloped, distributed it among the people, and threw the wood to the flames. Thus were the inhabitants of this district delivered from the reign of superstition and ignorance under which they had so long groaned. Some ofthe people were much enraged with the chief, and were very violent in the expression of their feelings, call ing him a fool and a madman for burning his gods and listening to worthless fellows, who " were drift-wood from the sea, washed on shore by the waves of the ocean." The grief of the women was excessively frantic, and their lamentations loud and doleful. Many of them inflicted deep gashes on their heads with sharp shells and sharks' teeth, and ran about, smeared with the blood which streamed from the wounds, crying in tones of the deepest melan choly, "Alas! alas! the gods of the madman Tinomana, the gods of the insane chief, are given to the flames !" Others, blackened with charcoal, joined in their lamentations. In the course of a few days all the idols in the district were brought to the teachers : some of these were destroyed, but the others they determined to send to Raiatea. On the following Saturday they left Tinomana, advising him and the other converts to have their food prepared for the next day, and to attend worship at the station. They did as they were requested, but came com pletely accoutred, as for an engagement, with war-caps, slings, and spears, fearing lest the enraged Satanees* should attack them. They were not however, molested either in coming or returning. From this time the destruction of the ensigns of idolatry proceeded rapidly throughout the island. During the next week Pa, the principal chief of the victorious party, sent for Papeiha and Tiberio, and on their arrival expressed his determination to embrace the truth. Iu the evening, while sitting in the house, their attention was attracted by a singular noise, which proved to be the yelling of a person who pretended to be inspired, and who, like the heathens of old, endeavoured to support his pretensions by distorting his features and speaking in an unnatural tone. Approaching the dwelling, he vociferated, " Pa, Pa, give me those two men! Why do you preserve two rotton sticks driven on shore by the waves! why do you listen to the froth of the sea! I am * A name by which the idolaters were designated. 48 LUDICROUS EFFECT BY THE SIGHT OF A CAT. great Tangaroa : give them to me, and I'll eat them !" The teachers proposed to each other to joke with this gentleman, and as he entered the house, to take out their knives, and demand that they should be allowed to make an incision and search for the great god Tangaroa, who, he said, was witbin him, as it would be gratifying to all parties to see this extraordinary person age. The chief heard the conversation, and warned the priest not to enter, as the teachers were ready with their knives to cut him open and search for Tangaroa. On hearing this he scampered away with far less pomp than he came, and they heard no more of him. The teachers, after an absence of about a week, during which they had witnessed the demolition of several maraes, returned, accom panied by the first-bom of every chief who had destroyed his idols. At this time a ludicrous circumstance oc curred, which will illustrate the ignorance and superstition of this people. A favourite cat had been taken on shore by one of the teachers' wives on our first visit, and, not liking his new companions, Tom fled to the mountains. The house of the priest Tiaki, who had just de stroyed his idol, was situated at a distance from tbe settlement ; and at midnight, while he was lying asleep on his mat, his wife, who was sitting awake by his side, musing upon the strange events of the day, beheld with conster nation two fires glistening in the doorway, and heard with surprise a mysterious voice. Almost petrified with fear, she awoke her husband, and began to upbraid him with his folly for burning his god, who, she declared, was now come to be avenged of them. " Get up and pray, get up and pray !" she cried. The husband arose, and, on opening his eyes, beheld the same glaring lights and heard the same ominous sound. Impelled by the extreme urgency of the case, he commenced, with all possible vehemence, vociferating the alphabet, as a prayer to God to deliver them from the ven geance of Satan. On hearing this, the cat as much alarmed as the priest and his wife, of whose nocturnal peace he had been the un conscious disturber, ran away, leaving the poor people congratulating themselves on the efficacy of their prayer. On a subsequent occasion puss, in his peram bulations, went to the district of the Satanees ; and, as the marae stood in a retired spot and was shaded by the rich foliage of trees of ancient growth, Tom, pleased with the situation, and wishing to be found in good company, took up his abode with the gods ; and, not meeting with any opposition from those within the house, he . little expected any from those without. Some few days after, however, the priest came, accom panied by a number of worshippers, to present some offerings to the god, and, on opening the door, Tom very respectfully greeted him with a mew. Unaccustomed to such salutations, instead of returning it he rushed back with terror, shouting to his companions, " Here's a monster from the deep, here's a monster from the deep!" Upon this the whole party- hastened home, collected several hundreds of their companions, put on their war-caps, brought their spears, clubs, and slings, blackened them selves with charcoal, and thus equipped came shouting to attack " poor puss." Affrighted at this formidable array of war, Tom immediately sprang towards the opened door, and darted through the terror-stricken warriors, who fled with the greatest precipitation in all directions. In the evening these brave conspirators against the life of a cat were entertaining them selves and a numerous company of spectators with a dance, when Tojn, wishing to see the sport, and bearing no malice, came to take a peep. No sooner did he present himself than the terrified company fled in consternation; and the heroic warriors of the district again armed themselves, and gave chase to this unfor tunate cat. But the "monster ofthe deep," being too nimble for them, again escaped their vengeance. Some hours after, when all was quiet, Tom, being disturbed in his residence with the gods, determined unwisely to renew his acquaintance with men ; and in the dead of the night he returned to the house, and crept be neath a coverlet under which a whole family was lying, and there fell asleep. Unfortunately, his purring awoke the man under whose cloth he had crawled, who, supposing that some other "monster" had come to disturb them, closed the doorway, awoke the people of the house, and procured lights to search for the intruder. Poor Tom, fatigued with the two previous engage ments of the day, lay quietly asleep, when the warriors, with their clubs and spears, attacked him most valiantly, and thought themselves sin gularly brave in putting an end to this formid able " monster" The king, Makea, was among the last chiefs of importance* who renounced idolatry. The object of his adoration was a goddess, the great Rangatira ; and the idolaters manifested deter mined opposition to the destruction of this idol and the burning of their marae. That, however, was effected by the party to whom it belonged ; and thus the reign of idolatry, although very many still retained their idols and superstitions, was virtually terminated at Rarotonga. The teachers then recommenced the erection of a place of worship, which being agreed to, the greater part of the inhabitants assembled, most of whom came to the work thoroughly equipped for war.* The site selected for the building was thickly covered with trees, and, as there were but four or five axes in the island, the clearing it was a great work. All, however, ap peared anxious to assist, and although their tools were rude, some using large shells, and others stone axes, yet, as the people were numerous, the work was soon effected. When the first post was fixed, Makea, who had prepared a great * It must he recollected, that the inhabitants of the different districts of this island were always in a state of hostility, and never, on any occasion, met unarmed; that there had not yet been sufficient time for the prin ciples of Christianity to produce mutual confidence amungst its professors ; and that numbers were still heathens. THE WAR AT RAIATEA. 49 quantity of food to be apportioned to the various districts, desired Tinomanatoimploreablessing; and, in order that all present might see and hear, he climbed a tree, and in that conspicuous situ ation offered up a sensible prayer. The shape ofthe building, the burningof the lime, and the plastering of the house, excited feelings, and drew forth expressions similar to those elicited at Aitutaki. Those who still remained heathen were con tinually offering provocation to the Christians, who, by not resenting their conduct, subjected themselves to still greater annoyance, and one of them, while passing through their district to his own, was most severely beaten, and had one of his ears torn nearly off. This led to a conflict between the parties, in which the Christians conquered. The victors then, as the custom was, led the captives by their long hair down to the sea-side, not however as formerly, to put them to death, and feast upon their bodies, but to pre sent them to the chiefs ; who, instead of order ing them to be injured, advised them to embrace this good religion, by which their differences would be terminated, and the reign of harmony and happiness established. To this they replied, that, as they were now convinced of the supe rior power of Jehovah, and had indubitable proof of the merciful character of this new rehgion by their lives being spared, they would at once unite with their countrymen in the worship of the only true God. The following day, they demolished all the maraes, and brought their rejected idols to the teachers. Thus terminated the war, and, with it, the whole system of idol atry in Rarotonga. A portion of land in the Christian settlement was then allotted to each individual, and many of them erected a dwelling there, and became and still continue among the most active, consist ent, and devoted Christians. * It is a very remarkable fact, that in no island of importance has Christianity been introduced without a war ; but it is right to observe that, in every instance, the heathens have been the aggressors. It was so both at Tahiti and Raia tea. And as there were many circumstances connected with the memorable battle between the Christian and heathen parties at the latter place, in which the interposition of a Divine power was most conspicuous, and which led to the entire subversion of idolatry in that and the neighbouring island, I shall take this opportu nity of recording them. Tamatoa, with most of the" chiefs of the Society Islands, attended by a large company of warriors, had gone to Tahiti to assist in reinstating Pomare in his govern ment ; and, when thus convened, the great work of conversion commenced at that island ! Hav ing been brought under its influence, the chiefs, with their warriors, returned to their respective islands, not conveying back the mangled bodies of the victims slain in battle, to offer to the gods * In giving the foregoing account of the overthrow of idolatry in the island of Rarotonga, my readers will not conclude that I approve of every measure the.teaehers adopted. All I have done is faithfully to narrate the facts. No. 4. whose protection they had invoked, but the Gos pel of peace. Upon the arrival of Tamatoa and his followers at Opoa, the place " where Satan's seat was " at Raiatea, a multitude was assembled on the sea-beach to greet them, while the priests were running to and fro, vociferating a welcome in the name of the gods, and expressing a hope that they had returned laden with victims. As the chiefs canoe approached the shore, a herald was commanded to stand upon an elevated platform, who shouted in reply, " There are no victims ; we are all praying people, and have become worshippers of Jehovah, the true God ;" and, holding up the elementary books which the Missionaries had written for them, as they had no printing-press at that time, he cried, " These are the victims — these are the trophies with which we have returned!" Soon after the ar rival of Tamatoa and his party, a meeting was convened, when the inhabitants of Raiatea were informed of what had taken place at Tahiti, and of the conversion of their friends to the Chris tian religion. They were then invited to follow their example. About a third of the people agreed to the proposition. Shortly after this, Tamatoa was taken exceedingly ill, and, every effort to restore him to health having failed, it was proposed by one of the Christians to destroy Oro, the great national idol, and set fire to the marae, suggesting that perhaps Jehovah was angry with them for not having done this before. After a consultation upon the proposition, it was agreed that a party should go and carry it into effect. Summoning all their courage, these pro ceeded to the great marae at Opoa, took Oro from his seat, tore off his robes, and set fire to the sacred house. The heathen party were so exasperated at this circumstance, that they de termined to make war upon the Christians, and put them all to death. For this purpose, they invited the chief of Tahaa to come over with his army, and assist them in effecting their object. The more effectually to accomplish their design, they erected a house, which they encircled with the trunks of cocoa-nut and bread-fruit trees, into which they resolved to thrust the Christians, and then to set it on fire, and burn them alive. Terrified at these and other frightful prepara tions, Tamatoa sent frequent overtures of peace ; but the invariable reply was, " There is no peace for god-burners, until they have felt the effects of the fire with which they destroyed Oro." As a last resource, the chief sent his favourite daughter ; and, a small shower of rain happen ing to descend just as she entered the camp, a priestess of Toimata, the daughter of Oro, com menced singing the following stanza : — " Thickly, thickly falls the small rain from theskies ; 'Tis the afflicted Toimata weeping for her sire. This roused the spirit of the people to such a pitch, that the heathens shouted simultaneously, " There is no peace to be made with god-burners until they have felt the effects of the fire with which they destroyed Oro," and determined to make the attack on the following day. The night was a sleepless one with both parties ; tor the heathens were employed m listening to tbe so THE WAR AT RAIATEA— ANSWER TO PROFESSOR LEE. vociferations of their priests, in feasting, rioting and exulting in the anticipated triumphs of the coming day; while the Christians spent the hours in prayer, and in raising an embankment of stones, behind which to defend themselves as long as possible. Early the next morning the heathen party, withflyingbanners, the shout ofthe warriors, and the sound ofthe trumpet-shell, bore down in an imposing attitude upon the affrighted Christians ; while they, on their bended knees, were supplicating the protection of God against the fury of their enemies, whose numbers, whose frightful preparations and superstitious madness, rendered them peculiarly formidable. A long shoal of sand stretched from the shore of the Christian encampment ; inconsequence of which the heathen party were compelled to land at a distance of half a mile from the spot. Before they arrived at the place of disembarkation, one of the Christians, formerly a noted warrior, said to the chief, " Allow me to select all our effective men, and make an attack upon the heathens, while in the confusion of landing. A panic may seize them, and God may work a deliverance for us." The proposition was agreed to ; but the chief himself said, " Before you go, let us unite in prayer." Men, women, and children, then knelt down outside their stone embank ment, and the king implored the God of Jacob to cover their head in the day of battle ; and on concluding, thus addressed this little band of faithful followers : " Now go, and may the pre sence of Jesus go with you!" Taking a circui tous route behind the brushwood, until he arrived opposite to the place where the heathens were landing, the commander extended his little army as far as it would reach, and gave strict orders that no noise should be made until they were emerging from the bushes. The arrangement proved most successful. The heathens were seized with consternation, and, after a short re sistance, threw away their arms, and fled for their lives ; for they expected to have met with barba rous treatment, similar to that which they would have inflicted had they been the conquerors. But, perceiving that no injury was sustained by those of their brethren who fell into the hands of the Christians, they peeped from behind the bushes, or shouted from the trees in which they had taken refuge, " Here am I ; spare my life, by Jesus, your new God." The remainder of the day was spent by the Christians in conduct ing their prisoners into the presence of the chief, who remained for several hours upon the very spot where in the morning he commended his little band to the protection of God. A herald stood by his side, and shouted, as the fugitives approached, " Welcome, welcome ; you are saved by Jesus, and the influence of the religion of mercy which we have embraced!" When the chief of Tahaa, who led the heathen, was taken, and conducted, pale and trembling, into the pre sence of Tamatoa, he exclaimed, "Am I dead !" His fears, however, were immediately dissipated by his brother chieftain, who replied, " No, bro ther; cease to tremble ; you are saved by Jesus." A feast was immediately prepared for the pri soners, when nearly a hundred large pigs were baked whole with a proportionate quantity of bread-fruit and other vegetables. The heathen sat down to eat, but few could swallow their food, being overwhelmed by the astonishing events of the day. While they were thus seated one of the party arose, and said, " This is my little speech : Let every one be allowed to fol low his own inclination; for my part, I will never again, to the day of my death, worship the gods who could not protect us in the hour of danger! We were four times the number of the praying people, yet they have conquered us with the greatest ease. Jehovah is the true God. Had we conquered them, they would, at this moment, have been burning in the house we made strong for the purpose ! but instead of injuring us, or our wives, or our children, they have prepared for us this sumptuous feast. Theirs is a religion of mercy, I will go and unite my self to this people." This declaration was lis tened to with so much delight, and similar sen timents were so universal, that every one of the heathen party bowed their knees that very night, for the first time, in prayer to Jehovah, and united with the Christians in returning thanks to Him for the victory he had on that anxious day so graciously afforded them. On the follow ing morning, after prayer, both Christians and heathens issued forth and demolished every marae in Tahaa and Raiatea ; so that, in three days after this memorable battle, not a vestige of idol worship remained in either of those is lands ! All this will acquire additional interest in the reader's estimation when he is informed, that -it took place solely under the superintend ence of the natives themselves, for at that time there was no Missionary at either of the islands. And here I would notice an assertion of Pro fessor Lee, who ascribes the progress of Chris tianity in the South Sea Islands to the aid it derived from the civil power.* Now this state ment is not founded in truth. Having wit nessed the introduction of Christianity into a greater number of islands than any other Mis sionary, I can safely affirm, that in no single instance has the civil power been employed in its propagation. It is true that the moral influence of the chiefs has, in many instances, been most beneficially exerted in behalf of Christianity ; but never, to my knowledge, have they employed coercion to induce their subjects to embrace it. And I feel satisfied, that in few cases has the beautiful prediction been more strikingly accomplished — " And kings shall be thy nursing fathers, and their queens thy nursing mothers." Had the Missionaries desired the exercise of that power, the chiefs were not in a condition to gratify them ; for they had to defend themselves against the fury of a large portion of their own subjects, by whom they were so fiercely attacked. f I am, moreover, happy, in being able to contradict the assertion of Dr. Lee, because, were it true, it would have detracted from the honour of Christ, by the interposition of whose providence the great work has been effected : " His own arm hath gotten * See Professor Lee's second letter, &c , page 57. t See also Ellis's Polynesian Researches, vol. i., p. 259. FIRST KNOWLEDGE OF EUROPEANS. 51 him the victory." Further, itwould have dero gated from the honour of Christianity, which has triumphed, not by human authority, but by its own moral power — by the light which it spread abroad, and by the benevolent spirit it disseminated ; for kindness is the key to the human heart, whether it be that of savage or civilised man ; and when, instead of being bar barously murdered, they were treated with kindness, the multitude immediately embraced the truth ; for they naturally attributed this mighty transformation in then* formerly san guinary chieftains, to the benign influence of the Gospel upon their minds. CHAPTER XIIT. A Tradition— How the Rarotongans first obtained the Knowledge of the Europeans — They pray to their Gods that Ships may visit their Island — A Ship, supposed to have been the Bounty, arrives — The Tides — The un soundness of Captain Beechy's theory — Peculiarities of Rarotonga — Buteve the Cripple — Their Wars, Savage Usages, &c. — Female Degradation — Grades in Society, &c. During our stay at Rarotonga, I obtained infor mation from the natives upon a variety of sub jects, some of which were both curious and instructive. The first I shall mention is a legend in reference to the peopling of their island. Upon this subject the natives have several tra ditions, in one of which there is a strange history of Apopo iva roa, or the long-boned giant, who is said to have walked to the island upon the sea ; but this, with many others, I shall pass over, and confine myself to the following, which, divested of those portions that are evidently fabulous, I regard as the correct account. It states that Karika, the ancestor of the present Makea family, came originally from an island to the westward, named Manuka. This Karika was a mighty warrior, a " man-killer,"and agreat navigator, who, in his peregrinations at sea, dis covered the island of Rarotonga. On landing, he found it uninhabited ; and, after remaining there some time, he again put to sea, and in this voy age he met with Tangiia. This man was a chief of Faaa, a district in Tahiti, who, by cutting down a favourite bread-fruit tree, had so much exaspe rated his brother, Tutabu aru roa, (or Tutabu, the insatiable pursuer,) that he was determined to put Tangiia and all Iris family to death. On hearing this, Tangiia launched his large canoe, and sought safety in flight ; and, taking with him his family and followers, among whom were two beautiful daughters, he sailed for Huahine, which is about a hundred miles to the westward of Tahiti, where he arrived in safety. He had not, however, been there many days, before Tutabu, with his Uni, or thousands, entered the harbour of that island, with a deter mination to destroy his brother. To escape his vengeance, Tangiia set sail immediately for Raiatea ; but was closely followed by Tutabu. Continuing his flight, he sailed to Porapora, where he had scarcely landed, when he again found his pursuer at his heels. From hence he proceeded to Maupiti, the last of the Society Islands, but here also Tutabu followed him ; when, seeing no possibility of escaping the fury of his unrelenting foe, Tangiia, with his Uni, launched upon the trackless ocean, in search of a refuge where he might happen to find it. After having been a long time at sea, he fell in with Karika, from the island of Manuka, who forthwith prepared for battle ; and, lashing his canoe firmly to that of the poor unfortunate Tangiia, was about to attack him, when he made submission, by presenting to Karika the emblems of supremacy, both civil and rehgious, saying, " Tena mai te vaevae roa"- — " Yours is the long- legged," or man belongs to you. " Tena mai te vavaepoto" — "Yours is the short-legged," or the turtle belongs to you ; which, being the most sacred fish, was considered as an emblem of supremacy in religious affairs. " Yours is the butunga, apinga, katoatoa, or the source of every treasure," reserving to himself only his " takai kete," or thefood with which the people of his own district might supply him. With this Karika was satisfied, and having made a friendly covenant with Tangiia, received from him one of his beautiful daughters to wife. The brave warrior then informed his friend of the lovely island he had discovered, told him the direction in which it lay, and promised, when he had accomplished the object of his present voyage, to return and settle there. Tangiia, taking leave of his formidable ally, steered for Rarotonga, and, on reaching it, took up his residence on the east side. Karika returned to the island some short time after, and, with his tini, settled on the north side. But they had not long enjoyed the comforts of repose, when, to the astonishment and consternation of Tangiia, the fleet of his determined enemy Tutabu was descried off the harbour's mouth. The " relent less pursuer" had determined to range the ocean in search of his adversary, and now that he had discovered him, felt confident that he should effect his destruction. Tangiia immediately despatched a messenger to inform his friend Karika of Tutabu's arrival, and to request his assistance in the ensuing battle; hoping that, by an union of their forces, they might conquer him. Karika accordingly collected his tini, and went forthwith to the assistance of his friend. A desperate engagement ensued, in which Tutabu was conquered and killed. They next had to bake him ; but this they found more difficult than to kill him; for, although they heated a large oven thoroughly, and put many hot stones inside him, they found on opening the oven that it was cold, and Tutabu quite uncooked. Failing here, they conveyed the body to the next district, where they prepared another oven, and used a different kind of wood for fuel, but with no better success. This process they repeated in every district in the island, with a similar result, until they came to the last, at which they succeeded. For this reason they gave to the district its present name of Taana, which signifies "well done, or baked over ao-ain." There is in this tradition a great deal E 2 52 FIRST KNOWLEDGE OF EUROPEANS. more of the fabulous than I have mentioned, especially in relation to the canoe in which Tangiia came to Rarotonga, which is said to have been built in the invisible world, and to have been conveyed by the birds to the top of a mountain during one night, and on the next, to have been removed from thence by the same extraordinary carriers to a large canoe-house erected by Tangiia for its reception. This cele brated ship had nine or ten remarkable names, taken from so many striking circumstances con nected with its building, the manner in which it was conveyed to this world, and other incidents, the relation of which might perhaps gratify the curious, but, from the press of more important matter, I can only add, that its principal name was Tarai-po, or "built in the invisible world." This account, divested of the fabulous, is certainly supported by existing circumstances ; for, in the first place, the Tahitian and Society islanders have other traditions respecting both Tangiia and Tutabu, which state that they were both great travellers, that they had a serious quarrel about their lands, and that they dwelt in the district of Faaa in Tahiti. Hence it may be fairly assumed, that such persons did actually exist, and that they were not, like the long- boned giant, the mere creations of fancy. This opinion is also supported by the fact, that the islands from which these progenitors are said to have come, are about equal distances from Rarotonga, Tahiti being to the east, and Manuka to the west of it. The language also of the present inhabitants is pure Tahitian, with an infusion of the hard consonants and nasal sounds which characterise the dialects of tbe west. To these we may add another striking evidence, derived from the political divisions still exist ing in the island. The people are, to the present day, two distinct bodies, designated Ngati Karika or the descendants of Karika ; and Ngati Tangiia, the descendants of Tangiia ; the former still oc cupying the north side of the island, and the latter the east. It is also worthy of remark, that the superior chieftainship is still vested in the Karika family ; for, although the Ngati Karika have been beaten many times, indeed generally, by the descendants of Tangiia, yet the conquerors agree in allowing them the supremacy which they have possessed from time imme morial. The present Makea is the twenty- ninth of that family.* The first knowledge and intercourse of the Rarotongans with white people appears also to be worthy of notice ; for, although Captain Cook did not discover the island, we found that the inhabitants had a knowledge of him before our arrival, which they received partly from the heathen woman of whom I have previously spoken, and partly from some natives who were • When we were preparing to depart for Raiatea, the uncle of Makea, whom ne appointed as Regent, delivered a most interesting address, in which he enumerated the ancestry of the king, commencing with Makea Karika; and for every one of whom he had a peculiar designation, descriptive of his character, as was the case with the Pharaohs of Egypt I much regret that I did not obtain a correct report of thin address, as I listened to it with pe culiar interest. drifted from Tahiti down to Rarotonga in a canoe. These arrived while the islanders were engaged in a war ; and, supposing that the island was uninhabited, two of their number went to a dis tance in search of eels, where they fell into the hands of the natives. Their companions ex pecting to be killed, launched their canoe and put again to sea, leaving their two friends be hind them. The inhabitants, however, treated them kindly, when they began to disclose the wonders they had seen; informing them that they were not the only people in the world, but that a race existed entirely different from them selves, who were quite white, and were called Tute or Cook; that they traversed the ocean for months together as on dry land ; that their canoes were immensely large, and instead of being tied and lashed with cinet, were held to gether with " kurima " or iron : and that though they had no outrigger, they did not overturn. All this was astonishing information ; but the Cookees were moreover represented by the trumpeters of their fame as a very impious people, who cared not for the gods, but walked with the greatest unconcern about the maraes, and even ate the sacred food. On hearing this, the astonished inhabitants exclaimed, " Why do you not drive them away, and ' seize all their property!" To which it was replied, that they were like the gods, and were out of their power; adding, " If we attempt to hurt them, they blow at us." " What," said the Rarotongans, "will blowing at you hurt you !" When they were informed that it was " not blowing at them with the mouth, but with long things they call pupuhi,* out of which comes fire and a stone, which kills us in an instant, before we can get near them with our spears." These two men happened to have a small hatchet with them, which had been obtained from Captain Cook's vessel, and which they gave to the chief ; who, instead of applying it to its proper purpose, kept it very carefully to cut his food. Onhearing all this important intelligence, the natives commenced praying to their gods to send Captain Cook to their island in his large canoe, to bring them axes, nails, and guns. The following was the substance of their prayer, which was given to me by an old priest : " 0, great Tangaroa, send your large ship to our land ; let us see the Cookees. Great Tangiia, send us a dead sea, send us a propitious gale, to bring the far-famed Cookees to our island, to give us nails, and iron, and axes : let us see these outriggerless canoes." They then voci ferated the names of all their gods, invoking them to unite their energies in the accomplish ment of this greatly-desired object; and con cluded by a presentation of food, and a promise of making still greater offerings, if they would conduct the ship to their island. Not very long after this, a large ship did actually arrive ; and from the description the natives gave me of her, I have no doubt but that it was tbe Bounty, after she had been taken by the mutineers. This vessel did not anchor, but one of the • The native name for guns. TIDES. 53 natives took his little canoe, and summoning all his courage, ventured to go on board. On returning to the shore, he told his astonished countrymen that it was a floating island ; that there were two rivers of water flowing on it ; that two large taro plantations, with sugar cane, bread-fruit, and other trees, were growing there ; that the keel scraped the bottom of the sea ; for he dived as deep as man could go, and could not see its termination. I account for these singular statements, by supposing that the pumps were at work while the man was on board, which he mistook for rivers, or streams, and that the two plantations, bread-fruit trees, &c, were the large boxes which were fitted up throughout this vessel for those exotics, which it was the specific object of the Bounty to con vey from Tahiti to the West Indies. From this vessel was obtained a pointed piece of iron, about two feet six inches in length, which the natives immediately dedicated to the gods ; and finding that they could pierce the ground so much more easily with the iron than with their wooden tools, they were in the habit of borrow ing it from the gods ; and when the food thus planted was ripe, they invariably carried three portions to the marae, the first of which was dedicated as an expression of gratitude to the deities for causing the food to grow ; the second, in payment for the loan of the iron ; and the third as a present, to induce them to conduct ships there, that they might obtain more of that valuable article. Upon a variety of other interesting topics, in reference to Rarotonga, I shall be equally brief. Some, indeed, I must pass over altogether. An observation or two, however, upon the tides, should not be omitted. It is to the Missionaries a well-known fact, that the tides in Tahiti and the Society Islands are uniform throughout the year, both as to the time of the ebb and flow, and the height of the rise and fall ; it being high-water invariably at noon and at midnight ; and, consequently, the water is at its lowest point at six o'clock in the morning and evening. The rise is seldom more than eighteen inches or two feet above low-water mark. It must be observed, that mostly once, and frequently twice in the year, a very heavy sea rolls over the reef and bursts with great violence upon the shore. But the most remarkable feature in the periodically high sea is, that it invariably comes from W. and S. W., which is the oppo site direction to that from which the trade-wind blows. The eastern sides of the islands are, I believe, never injured by these periodical inun dations. I have been thus particular in my observations, for the purpose, in the first place, of calling the attention of scientific men to this remarkable phenomenon, as I believe it is restricted to the Tahitian and Society Island groups in the South Pacific, and the Sandwich Islands in the north. I cannot, however, speak positively respecting the tides at the islands east ward of Tahiti ; but at all the islands I have visited in the same parallel of longitude to the southward, and in those to the westward, in the same parallel of latitude, the same regularity is not observed ; but the tides vary with the moon, both as to the time and the height of the rise and fall, which is the case at Rarotonga. Another reason for which I have been thus minute is to correct the erroneous statements of some scien tific visitors. One of these, the notorious Kot- zebue, observes, — " Every noon, the whole year round, at the moment the sun touches the meri dian, the water is highest, and falls with the sinking sun till midnight." Captain Beechy, when speaking upon the tides, states, — " The tides, in all harbours formed by coral reefs are very irregular and uncertain, and are almost wholly dependent upon the sea-breezes. At Oututaunoa, it is usually low -water about six every morning, and high-water half an hour after noon. To make this deviation from the ordinary course of nature intelligible, it will be better to consider the harbour as a basin, over the margin of which, after the breeze springs up, the sea beats with considerable violence, and throws a larger supply into it than the narrow channels can carry off in the same time ; and consequently, during that period the tide rises. As the wind abates the water subsides, and, the nights being generally calm, the water finds its lowest level by the morning." This statement is certainly most incorrect ; for not only have I observed for years the un deviating regularity of the tides, but this is so well understood by the natives, that the hours of the day and night are distinguished by terms descriptive of its state. As, for example, instead of asking, "What is the time!" they say, " Where is the tide !" Nor can the tides, as Captain B. observes, be " wholly dependent on the sea-breeze;" for there are many days during the year when it is perfectly calm, and yet the tide rises and falls with the same regularity as when the trade-winds blow ; and we very fre quently have higher tides in calms than during the prevalence of the trade-wind. Beside which, the tides are equally regular on the westward or leeward side of the islands, which the trade- wind does not reach, as on the eastward, from which point it blows. But the perfect fallacy of Captain Beechy's theory will he still more apparent, if it be recollected that the trade- wind is most powerful from mid-day till about four or five o'clock, during which time the tide is actually ebbing so fast that the water finds its lowest level by six o'clock in the evening ; and that in opposition to the strength of the sea- breeze. Captain Beechy adds, " that the nights being calm, the water finds its lowest level by morning ;" whereas the fact is, that the water finds its highest point at midnight, when it is perfectly calm. How, then, can the tides be dependent on the sea-breeze ! It is to me a matter of regret that scientific men, when writing upon these subjects, do not avail themselves of the facts which Missionaries might supply ; for while we make no preten sions to great scientific attainments, we do not hesitate to assert, that it is in our power to furnish more substantial data on which to philo sophise, than co*Uld be obtained by any tran- 54 STATE OF CULTIVATION— A SPIRITUAL BEGGAR. sient visitor, however profound in knowledge, or diligent in research. Without making any further observations on the beautiful appearance of the rocks, hills, and valleys of Rarotonga, I shall hasten to observe one or two particulars in which it differs from the Society and other Islands ; leaving several other points to be noticed in a concluding chapter. One valuable peculiarity of this lovely island is, the extent of its low land. In many of the islands, the mountains approach so near to the sea as to leave but little arable land ; but this is not, to my recollection, the case in any part of Rarotonga. Its soil also must be ex ceedingly rich, or the climate peculiarly adapted to the fruits which grow there ; for, on our arrival, we were astonished to see the taro* and kape, the ti and sugar-cane growing luxuriantly nearly down to the edge of the sea. The whole island was also in a high state of cultivation, and I do not recollect having witnessed anything more beautiful than the scene presented to me, when standing on the side Of one of the hills, and looking towards the sea-shore. In the first place, there are rows of superb chestnut-trees, inoearpus, planted at equal distances, and stretching from the mountain's base to the sea, with a space between each row of about half a mile wide. This space is divided into small taro beds, which are dug four feet deep, and can be irrigated at pleasure. These average about half an acre each. The embankments round each bed are thrown up with a slope, leaving a flat surface upon the top of six or eight feet in width. The lowest parts are planted with taro, and the sides of the embankment with kape or gigantic taro, while on the top are placed, at regular intervals, small beautifully shaped bread fruit-trees. The pea-green leaves of the taro, the extraordinary size and dark colour of the kape lining the sloping embankment, together with the stately bread-fruit-trees on the top, present a contrast which produces the most pleasing effect. There is a good road round the island, which the natives call ara medua, or the parent path, both sides of which are lined with bananas and mountain plantains ; which, with the Barring- tonia, chestnut, and other trees of wide-spread ing foliage, protect you from the rays of the tropical sun, and afford even in mid-day the luxury of cool, shady walks of several miles in length. The houses of the inhabitants were situated from ten to upwards of thirty yards from this pathway, and some of them were ex ceedingly pretty. The path leading up to the house was invariably strewed with white and black peebles ; and on either side were planted the tufted-top "i-tree or draccena, which bears a chaste and beautiful blossom, interspersed al ternately with the gigantic taro. Six or eight stone seats were ranged in front of the premises, by the side of the " parent pathway." These were relics of antiquity, some of which were regarded with much veneration by the people, who, while they pointed to them, would say, " Here, my father, grandfather, or the great * Arum esculentum. chief so-and-so sat." They were generally formed of two smooth stones, the one serving as a seat, and the other sunk in the earth to form the back. Here, in the cool of the evening, after the labours of the day, with a wreath of flowers on their brow, anointed with a sweet-scented oil, and wearing a new tiputa or the shining pakaku,* sat the inmates of the house to chat with any loquacious passenger about the events of their own little world. It was thus I met with the spiritual beggar Buteve. In passing one evening from Mr. Buzacott's to Mr. Pitman's station, my attention was ar rested by seeing a person get off one of these seats, and walk upon his knees into the centre of the pathway, when he shouted, " Welcome, servant of God, who brought light into this dark island ; to you are we indebted for the word of salvation." The appearance of his person first attracted my attention; his hands and feet being eaten off by a disease which the natives call ko- kovi, and which obliged him to walk upon his knees ; but, notwithstanding this, I found that he was exceedingly industrious, and not only kept his kainga in beautiful order, but raised food enough to support his wife and three children. The substitute he used for a spade in tilling the ground was an instrument called the ko, which is a piece of iron-wood, pointed at one end. This he pressed firmly to his side, and leaning the weight of his body upon it, pierced the ground, and then scraping out the earth with the stumps of his hands, he would clasp tbe ba nana or taro plant, place it in the hole, and then fill in the earth. The weeds he pulled up in the same way. In reply to his salutation, I asked him what he knew of the word of salva tion. He answered, "1 know about Jesus Christ, who came into the world to save sin ners." On inquiring what he knew about Jesus Christ, he replied, " I know that he is the Son of God, and that he died painfully upon the cross to pay for the sins of men, in order that their souls might be saved, and go to happiness in the skies." I inquired of him if all the peo ple went to heaven after death! "Certainly not," he replied ; " only those who believe in the Lord Jesus, who cast away sin, and who pray to God." " You pray, of course !" I con tinued. " O yes," he said, " I very frequently pray as I weed my ground and plant my food, but always three times a-day, beside praying with my family every morning and evening." I asked him what he said when he prayed. He answered, " I say, ' O Lord, I am a great sinner, may Jesus take my sins away by his good blood ; give me the righteousness of Jesus to adomme, and give me the good Spirit of Jesus to instruct me, and make my heart good, to make me a man of Jesus, and take me to heaven when I die.' " "Well," I replied, "that, Buteve, is very excel lent, but where did you obtain your knowledge !" " From you, to be sure ; who brought us the news of salvation but yourself !" " True," I re plied, " hut I do not ever recollect to have seen * Native cloth, in the manufacture of which the Ra rotongans excel. THEIR WARS DESOLATING— CRUEL PRACTICES IN WAR. 55 you at either of the settlements to hear me speak of these things, and how do you obtain your knowledge of them!" "Why," he said, "as the people return from the services, I take my seat by the way-side, and beg a bit of the word of them as they pass by ; one gives me one piece, another another piece, and I collect them to gether in my heart, and, by thinking over what I thus obtain, and praying to God to make me know, I understand a little about his word." This was altogether a most interesting incident, as I had never seen the poor cripple before, and I could not learn that he had ever been in a place of worship. His knowledge, however, was such as to afford me both astonishment and delight, and I seldom passed his house, after this interview, without holding an interesting con versation with him. Between each district was left a space of un cultivated land, generally about half a mile in width. On these wastes their battles were most frequently fought ; for the inhabitants of each district invariably used every exertion to prevent their opponents from making encroachments upon their kaingas, or cultivated lands, and therefore disputed, with the greatest pertinacity, every inch of the uncultivated waste ; nor did they, until entirely driven off, yield their posses sions to the hands of the spoiler. But since the introduction of Christianity, many of these wastes have been cultivated. Their wars were exceedingly frequent. They had just been engaged in a disastrous conflict when we discovered the island. Pa and Kai- nuku, with the inhabitants of the eastern dis trict, had been fighting with Makea and Tino mana, the chiefs of the north and west sides of the island, when the latter were beaten, and Makea, with his people, driven away from their possessions, to which, however, peace having been restored, they had returned about a month or two prior to my first arrival. The sad effects of these contests were then and are still apparent ; for the laws of savage warfare appear to be like those of civilised countries, to " burn, kill, and destroy:" and there is not one old cocoa-nut tree to be seen on the north-west or south sides of the island. A few old bread-fruit trees still rear their lonely heads, having survived the in juries which they received from the hands of the devastating conquerors. Walking one day with the king, among the groves of banana and bread fruit trees, and observing the mutilations, I asked him jocosely, whilst pointing to one of them, why all the bark was stripped off ; and, turning to another, inquired why so deep a gash was cut in it; and wished to know what had become of the cocoa-nut trees, against the stumps of which we were continually striking our feet. To this he replied, " You know very well that we were conquered, and why do you banter me! We were fools enough to fight with the trees as well as with men ; some we cut down ourselves, lest our enemies should eat the fruit of them ; and others our conquerors destroyed. If it were possible, I would put new bark on all these trees, and fill up the gashes in the trunks of the others ; for, wherever I go, they stare me in the face, and remind me of my defeat. However, young trees are growing fast, and I am planting cocoa- nuts in all directions, so that my possessions will soon be equally valuable with those of our con querors ; and I am under no apprehension of having them again destroyed, — for the Gospel has put an end to our wars !" I inquired of the chief how they killed the cocoa-nut trees with such facility, when he in formed me, that scarcely any tree could be de stroyed with greater ease. One of the methods by which they effected it was singular : — it was to place a large sea-snail, called the beach le mer, on the crown of the tree, around the sprout, and allow it to rot there. Another mode was, to beat the crown with a small stone. Soon after this was done, the tuft of plumy leaves, surround ing the top of the tree, faded and fell, leaving the barren, naked trunk, of immense length, standing for years afterwards. This is accounted for in the following manner : Almost all trees belong to one of two great divisions of the vegetable kingdom : Exogents or Endogente. The former is so named from the circumstance of their receiving increase of matter, which is arranged externally, as regards the old layers. Buds are the organs provided for supply ing the materials constituting the stem : and since in this class there is an indefinite quantity, the destruction of one or more does not in the slightest degree endanger the life of the plant. The contrary, however is the case in Endogence, (to which class the cocoa-nut belongs,) one bud alone keeping up a supply of matter necessary to the existence of the plant, by the descent of newly-formed fibre into the innermost part of the stem (not the exterior, as in Exogence). It consequently follows, that the innermost part is more susceptible of injury than the exterior ; and if the central bud, the source ofthe newly -formed matter, be destroyed, a stop is suddenly put to the process of its growth, and death ensues. Their wars, I think, may also be considered sanguinary. In the one which raged just prior to our first visit, the king informed me, that "fourscore and ten were slain," on the side of the conquerors, and " five score " on that of the conquered. Female prisoners were very fre quently put to death ; and the reason assigned for this cruel practice was, that they might, per chance, give birth, at some future period, to warriors. The poor little children had spears passed through their ears, and were carried in triumph to the marae. Of late years as soon as an antagonist was overcome in battle, the victor beat in his skull ; and taking out a portion of his brains, he placed it upon bread-fruit leaves, and carried it immediately to the gods, as an earnest of the victim he was about to bring. This practice originated in thefollowing incident. During an engagement, a man named Karavai succeeded, as he imagined, in killing his oppo nent, Oromea, and ran off instantaneously to the marae, with bread-fruit leaves, as an earnest of the victim about to be dedicated to the gods ; hut before he returned, Oromea, who was only stunned, recovered from the effects of the blow, hastened to his own district, collected his friends, 56 FEMALE DEGRADATION— GRADES IN SOCIETY— MR. PLATT'S VOYAGE. and composed the following song in ridicule of his conqueror ; which, in the evening, they tri umphantly sang, accompanied by drumming and dancing : — Tcri ran liuru uaite ataa a Karavai e .' Kua ki a Vairota e I Kare i tutulli tika ia Oromea e J Te noto ua ra te Tuporo i Te manga e ! What a carrying of bread-fruit leaves is Karavai's to his gods, 0! He has filled Vairota !* But has not killed completely Oromea; For he is now drumming and dancing merrily at Te manga, O ! t After this, in order to escape similar ridicule, the warriors determined to make sure of their victim by presenting his brains to the gods in stead of bread-fruit leaves ; concluding, that in this way they would most effectually prevent the object of their vengeance from singing and dancing in sarcastic triumph. This having been presented, as soon as the whole of the inhabitants of the district could be convened, they fastened a rope to the legs of the corpse, and then dragged it as though it were a log of wood, to the great marae, with songs of savage exultation. Females at Rarotonga, like those of the So ciety Islands, were treated as inferiors. They were neither allowed to eat certain kinds of food, which were reserved for the men and the gods, nor to dwell under the same roof with their tyrannical masters ; but were compelled to take their scanty meal of inferior provisions at a dis tance, while the "lords of creation" feasted upon the " fat of the land," and the " abundance of the sea." In one respect, the treatment of females at this island was materially worse than that which obtained in the Tahitian and Society groups ; for whilst in tbe latter females had a share of their fathers' possessions, at Rarotonga these went to the male branches of the family, and seldom, if ever, to the daughters, on the ground, as they alleged, that " their person was their portion." This circumstance may have contributed to render the females of Rarotonga less fickle and fastidious than the ladies of the Tahitian and Society Islands ; for let a man's possessions be ever so great in the latter, if his person is not attractive, they will not accept his overtures. I think, also, that the females of Rarotonga are more faithful, industrious, and affectionate than those of Tahiti. During the sickness, which prevailed shortly after our ar rival, we were delighted at beholding the tender sympathy and unremitting attention which they showed to their sick husbands. Enter their habitations when we would, by night or by day, the head of the afflicted husband was in the lap of his affectionate wife ; while she beat off the annoying flies, bathed his temples with water, or eased pain by the gentle pressure of the tau- rumi.% At Rarotonga there is not such an equality of • Name ofthe marae. f The name of his own district. JThe taurumi differs from the Indian shampooing, it being a gentle squeezing, or compression of the afhicted part with a soft hand — and the sensation is peculiarly grateful. rank as at Tahiti, but . violent shock of an earth quake ; four of which, the teachers informed me, had been experienced within the seventeen months they had resided there. They also told me that, during these shocks, the natives rushed from their houses, threw themselves upon the ground, gnawed the grass, tore up the earth, and vociferated, in the most frantic manner, to Mafuie to desist, lest he should shake the earth • to pieces. Some said that- the devolo was angry with them for allowing the lotu to be received at their islands, and begged the teachers to hide their Bibles until his rage had ceased. On asking their opinion of this phenomenon, they informed me that Tiitii ataranga supported the island of Savaii with his left hand, and that, had it been his right, long ago he would have shaken it to pieces ; but that, in a quarrel with Mafuie, the latter broke his left arm, which rendered it feeble, and which accounts for the universal weakness of that arm in men. Thus ignorant are the heathen of the works as well as the word of God! CHAPTER XXVI. Visit to Amoa— A beautiful Settlement— A Company of Female Christians— Their Appearance— The Chapel erected by themselves — Visit to Malava — Disagreement between Matetau and Malietoa — An intelligent young Chief — Sail for Manono — Curious Incidents on board — Reconciliation effected between the Chiefs, The following morning we left Sapapalii for Amoa, a station about eight miles distant, at which the inhabitants had built a chapel, and were all receiving Christian instruction. In going thither we passed through a settlement called Safatulafai, which is one of the most beautiful in the group, and which astonished and delighted me. We could more easily have imagined ourselves in an English park than in a heathen village. A broad road of hard sand ran through it; a spacious building for their public business and amusements occupied tbe centre ; and, at various distances, there were lawns of beautiful greensward, which were ap propriated to club fights, fencing, wrestling, and hoxing matches. The pathway was over shadowed by the wide-spreading branches of the tamanue, and other gigantic trees, while the neat houses of the inhabitants were partially concealed by the foliage of the bread-fruit trees and bananas, among which they were em bowered. The settlement was kept in excellent order, and had an air of respectability which could not have been looked for among a people in other respects so barbarous. Before we reached Amoa we passed through two or three other settlements, which, although large, were inferior to Safatulafai. But what rendered these most interesting was, that in one of them a chapel was finished, and in a second the in habitants were preparing to erect another. After spending a short time with the chiefs, and addressing to them a few words of encourage ment, we proceeded on our journey, and reached Amoa, which we found to be an extensive set tlement, hut inferior in beauty to that through which we had passed. It was governed, as is fre quently the case, by two chiefs of nearly equal rank. These were active young men, and very zealous in the cause they had espoused ; and we were gratified to learn that their example had been followed by all tbe inhabitants. After receiving the cordial welcome of chiefs and people, we went to the chapel, and found it rather a rough edifice, capable of accom modating about four hundred persons. A meeting was then held in the spacious public building, which answered all the purposes of town-halls in England. After several large baked pigs had been presented to us, the chiefs stated that they felt greatly honoured by our presence, and that, had I not sent to apprize i2 116 FEMALE CHRISTIANS— THEIR COSTUME. them of my visit, they should have hastened to Sapapalii. After my reply, they asked a variety of ques tions, similar to those proposed at the meeting with Malietoa: and just as this conversation terminated, our attention was arrested by tbe approach of about seventy females, bringing gifts, and following each other in goose-like proces sion. These were preceded by four men, each of whom was bearing upon his shoulders a baked pig. On entering the house, the men approached Makea and myself, and deposited their burdens at our feet. Each of the women then laid down her present, and these were so numerous, that, gigantic as my friend Makea was, he and myself were speedily concealed by the cocoa-nuts, bread-fruit, and yams, which were heaped up before us. On removing a portion from the top of the pile, that we might catch a glimpse of our friends on the other side, we perceived that the principal woman and her daughter had seated themselves by the two chiefs, one of whom she requested to be her spokesman. Through him she stated, that they had heard of my intention to come to Amoa ; but as the Christians of her settlement were only females, they could not expect to receive a visit from so great a chief as myself, and had there fore come to pay their respects to one from whom they had received the word of Jehovah. She then expressed her regret that their offering was so small, and accounted for it by saying, that none of their husbands had yet become " sons of the word ;" but still she hoped that I would accept it, as an expression of gratitude for my having brought to them the knowledge of salvation. This was a novel and interesting event, and before replying to her address, I asked the teachers what they knew about her and her female friends. " Oh," said they, "we know her well, her settlement is five miles away, and some time ago she came and resided with us a month, during which she was exceed ingly diligent in her attendance on our instruc tions. She then returned, collected all the women of her district, and so interested them by her statements, that very many have been in duced to follow her example, and renounce their heathen worship. From that time to tbe present," they added, " she has been constant in her periodical visits ; for as soon as her little stock of knowledge is expended, she returns, and stays with us a few days to obtain more, which she treasures up, and carefully carries back to herwaiting companions." The teachers also told us that she had built a place of wor ship, in which, when neither of them could attend, this female chief conducted Divine ser vice. After listening to this intelligence with surprise and delight, I expressed to her the gra tification I had derived from the interview, and exhorted them all to be particularly circumspect in their conduct, " that by their chaste conver sation they might win their husbands" to Christ. Having returned as handsome a present as I could make, our interview closed. The whole of the party presented a singular appearance ; for although they had decorated themselves in the very best style, and looked exceedingly handsome, in the estimation of themselves and their countrymen, we hoped that their ideas upon this subject would soon beimproved. The principal personage was tall and well propor tioned. Her dress consisted of a shaggy mat, dyed red, bound round her loins, which did not reach below her knees. The upper part of her person was uncovered, and anointed rather freely with sweet-scented oil, slightly tinged with turmeric rouge. Rows of large blue beads decorated her neck, and formed bracelets for her arms. Her head was shorn very bare, with the exception of a single tuft about the size of a crown-piece over the left temple. From this hung a little lock of hair, about six inches in length, which dangled carelessly about her cheek. Several of the party were the unmarried daughters of chiefs. - The costume of these differed from that worn by the married women. While both parties appeared equally proud of their blue bead necklaces and bracelets, which they valued as highly as English ladies do their diamonds and pearls, the unmarried females wore a white instead of a red mat, had dispensed with the oil and turmeric, and retained a rich profusion of graceful curls on one side of their head, the other being shorn quite bare. Those of inferior rank contented themselves with a wreath of flowers, a little rouge and oil, a blue bead or two about the neck, and a girdle of fresh-gathered leaves. Their whole deportment was consistent with modesty and propriety. My time, during our stay at Savaii, was fully occupied in paying visits similar to the above ; but my limits forbid me to give an account of them. I must therefore content myself with presenting but one more specimen of my en gagements at this place. This was a visit to Malava, a settlement about eight miles from Sapapalii. During our journey we passed through one of the nuu devolo, devil's villages. I thought, when I first heard the expression, that it was an opprobrious term ; but upon inquiry, I found that it was not so understood by the natives ; for, on asking a man who had not joined the Christian party, whether he was a " son ofthe word," he replied, " No, I am a man ofthe devil." This, with other circumstan ces, convinced me that the term was used simply for the sake of distinction, and not of reproach. In passing through this village, I observed, under the eaves of most of the houses, small pieces of white cloth, which were designed to intimate that a sacred ceremony was then being observed within, and that no person must enter the house upon pain of death. On reaching Malava, we were conducted to the "government house!" and here we were met by the chief, who, after shading hands with us, instead of rubbing noses, withdrew. He was rather tall, about the middle age, and of sedate appearance. As he wore a white shirt, a finely wrought mat as a substitute for trousers, and a hat, he presented a more civi lised appearance than most of his brethren. During his short absence, I learned from the teachers that he was one of the few who appeared ATTEMPT AT RECONCILIATION— AN INTERESTING CHIEF. 117 to be actuated by principle, and that in main taining Ms profession he had evinced undaunted courage. After about a quarter of air hour's absence, he returned, accompanied by about a hundred men and women, the former carrying pigs and vegetables, and the latter pieces of cloth; and, having seated himself, he said, " I feel highly honoured by a visit from so great a chief, a chief of religion. I am now a worshipper of Jehovah, my heart and thoughts are in love with the good word, and my sincere desire is, that speedily it may spread through the land, and that not a Faka-Devolo, a devil's man, may re main." He then begged my acceptance of the food, which had been prepared in expectation of my coming ; when I expressed my thanks, and the gratification with which I had heard his sentiments ; adding, as I did not come there to obtain property, of which we had plenty at home, I would only accept of a little of the food, and three or four pieces of the cloth, for the purpose of showing their friends in England what clothing they wore, but the rest he must allow me to return. To this, however, he would not listen. I therefore sent the food on board the vessel, and presented the cloth to Makea, Before the meeting terminated, the chief and people of another settlement, about three miles distant, came to beg for a Missionary ; and two messengers from a large settlement, about six miles further, on the same errand, and also to solicit the honour of a visit. But although the spirit was both willing and delighted, yet the flesh was too weak to allow me to gratify them. After this, we held an interesting religious ser vice in their chapel, which was the largest and best I had seen, with the exception of that at Sapapalii, and would accommodate nearly five hundred persons. This concluded, we returned home, about ten o'clock at night, almost insen sible to fatigue, from the pleasure we had en joyed in the engagements of the day. Malava was so important a station that the Missionaries had consented to allow one of their number to reside at it ; and as Boki had been instrumental in the conversion of that people, he was selected for the purpose. On reaching home, my attention was called to a circumstance which occasioned me a little perplexity. For some months past, a serious disagreement had existed between Malietoa and Matetau of Monono ; and the teachers were very anxious that they should be reconciled before I left. In order to effect this, I had despatched the vessel to fetch Matetau, sup posing that he would esteem it an honour to have an English ship sent for him ; but, unfortunately, he refused to come. Upon hearing this, Malie toa's indignation was aroused, and being con vinced that the continued hostility of these powerful chiefs would endanger the peace of the islands, I determined, if possible, to effect a re conciliation ; and with this view, proposed to Malietoa that he and his brother Tuiano, with two or three of the teachers, should accompany me to Manono, whither I intended to convey Te-ava, Matetau's Missionary. To this he at first strongly objected ; but, after describing the spirit of Christianity, as contrasted with that of heathenism, and stating that it was honourable in us and pleasing to God to be the first to seek reconciliation, he instantly said, " Then I'll go, we'll go to morrow." This important point being settled, I prepared to retire to rest ; but although it was' past mid night, and I was excessively fatigued, I was kept from reclining upon my welcome mat, by the conversation of one of the most interesting and intelligent young chiefs with whom I had yet had intercourse. His name was Riromai- ava. He was nearly related to Malietoa, and esteemed by the old chieftain so highly that he consulted him upon every subject of import ance. He had just then returned from a jour ney, and was impatiently waiting my arrival. On entering the house, to my surprise, he _saluted me in English, with " How do you do, Sir ?" I instantly replied, " Very well, i thank you, Sir ; how do you do ?" " Oh," he answered, " me very well : me very glad to see you ; me no see you long time ago ; me away in the bush making fight ; oh ! plenty of the fight, too much of the fight ! Me hear that white chief bring the good word of Jehovah, me want plenty to see you ; me heart say, ' How do you do ?', me heart cry to see you." He further told me that he had become a Christian, and added, that his sincere desire was to know and love the word of God. Upon inquiring whether he had learned to read, he replied, that he had been trying for several months, but that his " heart was too much fool," and that he had not yet succeeded. I encouraged him to persevere, and told him that the knowledge of reading was so valuable that no labour could be too great in order to its acquisition. He assured me that hewould per severe, and never be tired until he had mastered it. After this he asked me a variety of questions about England, the usages of civilised society, the principles of Christianity, and numerous other topics, which convinced me that he was worthy of the esteem in which he was held, and of the reputation he had obtained. Perceiving that I was overcome with fatigue, he retired, after requesting me to take a meal at his house in the morning, before I sailed for Manono ; and being so much interested with his intelli gent conversation, I accepted his invitation. In the course of the morning he gave me a fearful account of the cruelties practised in the late war ; and, having stated that very many of the women, children, and infirm people were burned, he exclaimed, in a pathetic manner, " Oh, my countrymen, the Samoaman too much fool, plenty wicked ; you don't know. Samoa great fool, he kills the man, he fights the tree. Bread-fruit tree, cocoa-nut tree, no fight us. Oh ! tbe Samoa too much fool, too much wicked." He then inquired very affectionately after Mrs. VVilliams and my family ; and being informed that I had two sons, called John and Samuel, and that the age ofthe latter was about that of his own little boy, he begged that he might be allowed to give him that name : to which I consented. He further entreated me to fetch Mrs. Williams, and reside at Samoa, as he 118 SAIL FOR MANONO— A RECONCILIATION EFFECTED. greatly desired to be poto (very wise), and had never till then met with one who could give him all the knowledge he desired. In reference to Mrs. Williams and the children, he asked me if " Williams woman and Williams boy " did not grieve very much at my being so very far away from them for so many months upon the sea ? " Yes," I replied, " but Mrs. Williams is as anxious as myself that the poor heathen should know about Jesus Christ and salvation, and i therefore willingly makes the sacrifice." With tears in his eyes, he then exclaimed, "We plenty sorry for them ; they must have plenty of cry for you all these moons." After ex changing presents, I took my leave of this intel ligent young chief, promising to give him as much of my company as my numerous engage ments would afford. He told me that his patri monial estate was at Upolu ; that it was a most beautiful settlement ; but that, having been beaten in a late war, he was obliged to take refuge with his relative, Malietoa. He ex pected, however, soon to be reinstated in his possessions, and hoped he should then be able to obtain a wise Missionary to instruct him.* On the following day we embarked for Ma nono, accompanied by Malietoa, Tuiano, several other chiefs, and two of the teachers. The natives evinced much feeling at our departure ; and having seated themselves by the side of the path which led to the place of embarkation, they arose as I passed, kissed my hand, and entreated me to return as. speedily as possible, to tell them more about Jehovah and Jesus Christ. A foul wind prevented our reaching Manono before the next day, and this afforded me an opportunity of discovering that Malietoa still retained many of his heathen usages ; for al though it rained heavily during the night, he would not descend from the deck, which his friends accounted for on the ground that his presence rendered a place sacred. In addition to this, we learned that no female must touch food that had been brought near to him. Upon remonstrating with the natives on the folly of these practices, they assured me that there was nothing superstitious in them, or connected with the worship of the gods, but that they were simply ceremonies of reBpect which were shown to the principal chiefs. They were curious in examining the different parts of the ship. My bed-cabin, with the bedding, pleased two of the ladies so much that they were anxious to occupy it ; but not wishing it to be soiled with their oily skins, I directed them to the lockers, as a comfortable sleeping- place. "True," they replied, "hut these are not so soft and pretty as yours ;" and they went and patted the pillows, and put them to their cheeks, saying, " Lelei malu," good, soft." However, they appeared to sleep very soundly on the lockers, except when the ship tacked, and they were rolled off upon the cabin floor. On reaching Manono I hastened on shore, and succeeded in inducing Matetau to accom- * The chief had acquired his knowledge of English from a sailor who hadbeen left at the islands sick, and who was a very decent, well-behaved man. pany me to the vessel. After introducing him to Malietoa, I stated that my object in bringing them together was to effect a reconciliation, and establish a friendship between them ; for as they were most influential chiefs, and as teachers had been placed with them both, their disagreement would be most disastrous to the cause of religion. I then proposed to leave them for a short time to tliemselves, and hoped they would be able to accomplish the much desired object. In about an hour they came to me and said, " We two have now but one heart," and that in future they would unite their influence to prevent war, and extend re ligion. I then gave the teacher and his wife in special charge to Matetau, who ordered his property to be carefully placed in his own canoe ; and when we had knelt upon the deck, and com mended them to God in prayer, they departed for the shore. I was truly thankful thus to have been ena bled to reconcile these two powerful chiefs, and to commence a mission upon this important little island under circumstances so favourable. On the Monday week I again visited Manono ; but being too unwell to land, I sent to inquire after the welfare of Te-ava, who addressed to me the note of which the following is a translation : — Manono, November 5th, 1832. Dear Friend, I like this place very well : the chief is very kind, and the people supply me with plenty of food. We held our services yesterday in the largest house in the settlement, which was quite full. The chief, with many of the people, have made a public profession of Chris tianity. , This morning we met to teach the alphabet, when the house was again filled, and the people were all anxious to be taught. We are happy and comfortable. May the Lord protect you while sailing on the sea ! We think very much about Mr. and Mrs. Buzacott. Blessing on you, through Jesus. Te-ava. After landing Malietoa and his party at the Missionary station, I proceeded to different parts of the islands of Savaii and Upolu, in search of a harbour where to anchor, refit, and procure water for our return voyage. This occupied five or six days ; and wherever we went we found the people anxious to be instructed. Indeed,the applications to visit different settlements were so numerous that I could have advantageously spent six months there instead of one. Every where they urged their claim by saying, " Our chapel is finished, and all we want is a Mis sionary." At length, by the guidance of the natives, we found a very commodious harbour, and they informed me of two others. Thus, in one island we discovered three harbours, al though it had been reported by La Perouse, Kotzebue, and others, that there was no safe anchorage in the whole group. On arriving off the harhour at Apia I went in with the boat to examine it ; and on finding it spacious, convenient, and safe, we made a signal to the vessel to stand in, which she did, HEATHENISM RENOUNCED— DEPARTURE. 119 and dropped anchor in about six fathoms of water. The Messenger of Peace was very soon crowded to excess by natives ; but as Malietoa sent his Tuulaafale, or orator, with me, silence was commanded, when, with great parade, he declared who I was and what I wanted. He then announced that Malietoa had given me his name, and that the respect due to him must be shown to me. Having made arrangements for procuring a supply of water, I went on shore, and was conducted to the house of Punipuniolu, the principal chief. After exchanging salutations, he made numerous inquiries respecting my self, and then asked my opinion of the harbour. Having told him, in reply, that it was one of the best I had seen, he requested me to com municate this to captains of ships, as he greatly desired to be visited by them. To this I re plied that I had no objection ; but as the cap tains would immediately inquire whether the chief was a Christian, I should be compelled to inform them that he was not so. " Oh, no," he exclaimed, " you must not tell them that, for I had resolved, before your arrival, to follow Malietoa's example ; and if you will wait until to-morrow morning, by which time I shall have conferred with my people, you can come on shore, and make me a Christian." Accordingly, on the following morning, I met the chief, and about a hundred and fifty other persons. On entering his house I was saluted with the great est respect, by the name of Malietoa, and ad dressed in the language used to chiefs of the highest rank. As soon as I was seated, Puni puniolu said, " I have resolved to renounce the religion of my forefathers, and wish you to make me a Christian." I informed him that nothing but a change of heart could make him a Chris tian, and that this was the work of God ; but, at the same time, I should rejoice to receive his public declaration in favour of Christianity, to write his name in a book, and to offer up to Jehovah my sincere prayers on his behalf. The chief then requested that those who wished to follow his example would remain in the house while I prayed, and that the others would with draw. On hearing this, about twenty retired, but they returned at the close of the prayer, when the chief thus addressed the assembly : " Let none of us speak contemptuously of religion. Some of you have preferred remaining in the devil's worship. Do not you revile my pro ceedings ; neither will I yours." A short time after this, while walking about the settlement with the chief, he appeared much dispirited; and on inquiring the cause, he replied, " Oh, I am in great perplexity ! I have taken a most important step ; I have become a worshipper of Jehovah, but I am quite ignorant of the kind of worship I must offer, and of the actions which are pleasing or displeasing to him, and I have no one to teach me." I then gave him all the information which circumstances would permit, and wrote to request one of the teachers to come and reside with him for a short time. During the few days I remained on the island I took several long walks into the interior of the country, of which the following brief speci men must suffice. After proceeding about three miles through an almost untrodden forest, where stately trees grew in wild luxuriance, we reached an open space, which proved to be the site of a small village. Here there was an ex tensive grass-plat, interspersed with numerous half-grown bread-fruit trees, and surrounded by the houses of the natives, with regular inter vals between them. Our appearance startled the sequestered inhabitants, for I was probably the first European they had ever seen. The chief received me with much respect, and or dered mats to be spread upon the grass, and refreshments to be brought. I then told him my errand, and inquired whether he had em braced Christianity. He replied that he had heard of the lotu, and, in common with all his countrymen, desired instruction ; but, having no teacher, he was very ignorant. Having in formed him that one of the teachers would come shortly and reside for a time with Puni puniolu at Apia, he promised to attend his in structions. We returned by a circuitous route, and observed that although exceedingly rich, very little of the land was under cultivation be yond that in the immediate vicinity of the set tlement. The chief requested me to stay and witness the poula langi, or " heavenly dance," which he was preparing for our entertainment ; but as evening twilight had gathered around us, and as we did not suppose that it savoured much of heaven, I declined the invitation. Having visited several settlements in this island, and received numberless applications to visit others, we prepared for our departure ; and, as we had to pass Manono, I determined to call there once more. On reaching it, I was delighted to find that three of the .teachers were spending a few days with their newly-arrived brother. They informed me that they had just opened two new chapels at Upolu, and that the prospects of Te-ava were most encouraging, as nearly all the inhabitants of Manono had placed themselves under his instruction. After making arrangements with them for visiting various parts of Upolu, especially Apia, the settlement of Punipuniolu, I took leave of them, and thus closed my second visit to the Samoa group. CHAPTER XXVII. Runaway Convicts, &c. — Tragical Occurrences — Retri butive Justice — Two Vessels taken at Heathen Islands —Kindness of English Captains— Meet with the Widow of Puna— Her Narrative — Ship springs a Leak- Danger to which we were exposed — Vavau — Its Dreari ness — Arrival at Tonga — Character and Labours of the Wesleyan Missionaries— Arrival at Rarotonga — Flourishing state of the Stations and Schools— The Ingenuity of the Children in procuring Slates and Pencils— Letter of one of the Children. During my second visit to the Navigators' Is lands, many facts were communicated ,to me, some of which I think it necess%ry to notice. The first is, the number of runaway sailors, and other Europeans, who reside among the people, and do them incalculable mischief. 120 TRAGICAL OCCURRENCES— FATE OF THE MURDERER. Many of these were convicts from New South Wales, who had stolen small vessels, and had thus made their escape. The Missionaries in formed me, that, subsequent to their settlement, a gang of them came there in a fine schooner, which, after stripping off her sails, and every article of value, they scuttled and sunk a few hundred yards from the shore. Some time before this, another gang came, in a stolen vessel, to the Society Islands ; and al though treated with the utmost kindness by the chief, Mahlne, they contrived, after plundering his house of all his property, among which was a blunderbuss and a small cask of powder, to decamp at midnight in Mr. Barff's whale-boat. Shortly after they had left the shore, the boat was missed, and two others, with native crews, were immediately despatched in search of them. Unfortunately, one of these fell in with them ; when the unsuspicious natives said, " Friends, we have come to fetch you back ; you must not steal the Missionary's boat and the chief's pro perty." In reply they received the contents of a blunderbuss, which blew the head of one of them to pieces. Two more were killed by the same weapon, and a fourth severely wounded. The only other person present was a little boy, who jumped into the sea, and hid himself be hind the boat ; when the wretches, supposing that they had completed the work of destruc tion, hoisted their sail and departed. The boy then climbed into the boat, and, assisted by the wounded man, rowed to the shore. On my return from one of my voyages, I found several of these men at Raiatea. They immediately came to me, and represented themselves as shipwrecked mariners. In reply to my inquiries, they said they were wrecked in 73 degrees north, and were only three weeks in reaching the Society Islands. I replied immediately, that their tale was a foolish fabrication ; that I was convinced they were convicts ; and that I should write by the first opportunity to inform the Governor of their arrival. They left- Raiatea the day after, or perhaps some of our people would have been murdered, as those of Huahine were. Subsequently, these ungrateful wretches reached the Navigators' Islands, where they en tered, with savage delight, into the wars of the natives ; and having fire-arms and powder, they made fearful havoc among them. How ever, " vengeance suffered them not to live ;" for the leader of this murderous gang very soon fell a victim to his temerity. On one oc casion, seeing a number of the opposite party clustered together, he fired his blunderbuss, heavily loaded with bullets, and killed nine upon the spot, besides wounding others ! The natives however, did not give him time to reload his murderous weapon, but rushed upon him and killed him with their clubs. The chief for whom he was fighting entertained so high an opinion of his bravery, that he cut off his head, and carefully sewed the fractured parts of tbe skull together with fine cinet. He had this in his possession when I was there ; and it was said that he worshipped it as his etu. A second of these wretched men was drowned in endea vouring to make his escape ; a third fell iu bat tle shortly afterwards ; but to the monster of iniquity, whom the natives put to death before my arrival, a longer time had been allowed. Of this individual I received the most terrific ac counts. It was stated that he had killed up wards of two hundred persons with his own hands ! Being an excellent marksman, no one could escape who came within the range of bis musket. The natives fled as soon as they- per ceived him ; and, to avoid detection, with fiend ish ingenuity he smeared himself with charcoal and oil. He seldom left the fort of the party for whom he was fighting without killing a number of the enemy, whose heads were inva riably cut off, and ranged before him during his meals. He often seated himself upon a kind of stage, smeared with blood, and surrounded with the heads of his victims. In this state his followers would convey him on their shoulders, with songs of savage triumph, to his own resi dence. The party for whom he fought, was, how ever, conquered ; and he saved his life by fleeing to the mountains, where he lived three months upon roots, or whatever else he could obtain. At length he came to Manono, and threw him self upon the mercy of the chiefs, who spared him, upon the condition that he should never again engage in their wars. But a few months after this, having received authentic information of. his secret intrigues with the opposite party, the chiefs held a consultation, at which it was determined to put him to death. , One of their number, a powerful young man, was charged with this commission ; and, selecting a few faithful followers, he proceeded, at midnight, to the murderer's house, and, by a single blow, severed his head from his -body. Mr. Stevens, surgeon 'of! the, unfortunate Oldham whaler, which was taken at Wallace Island, was sitting by his side, at the time. From him I received much information. Providentially, this gentle man left the vessel the day before the crew was massacred. I conveyed him to Rarotonga and Tahiti, where, by his medical skill, he rendered essential service to the mission families. When I was at Manono, I found the people at one part ofthe island exceedingly shy, and, on landing, the chief sent amessage, requesting me to come to his residence. He then stated, that haying ordered an Englishman to be killed, he feared that I should be angry and avenge his death. After giving me a full account of the character and practices of this monster, I told him that the King of England would not allow his subjects, who conducted themselves well, to be injured with impunity in any part of the world ; but that as this individual had been such a murderer they had nothing to fear, for the government of my country would approve of their conduct. While at the Navigators, I heard of two ves sels having been taken at-islands on which the people were still heathen. In the one case all the crew, and in the other the greater part of them, fell victims to the excited feelings of the natives. In both instances, however, the Eng lish were the aggressors. In the one, the chief's THE WIDOW OF PUNA— PUNA'S ILLNESS AND DEATH. 121 son was threatened with death, and in the other, the drunken captain and crew were in the act of dragging the chief's wife on board their ship. A short time after this disastrous event, a man- of-war visited the island, when sixty of the in habitants were killed. Surely if the natives are to be so severely punished for avenging their injuries, some method ought to be adopted to prevent our countrymen from inflicting them. The native Missionaries informed me of an interesting visit they had received from Captain Swain, of the Elizabeth whaler, who not only treated them with much respect, but gave them a variety of useful articles. He also made valuable presents to the chiefs, and en couraged them to pay great attention to the instruction of the teachers. Hearing that I was expected soon, he left a letter for me, in which, after stating many things in commenda tion of the teachers and people, he informed me, that, in addition to his own inclination to encourage Missionary labours, he had orders from his owner, Mr. Sturges, who belongs, I beheve, to the Society of Friends, to visit Mis sionary stations for his supplies, and to afford Missionaries every assistance in his power. Alexander Birnie, Esq., and Son, have done the same for many years. To such owners and captains we feel our obligations, and desire to record their kindness.* While at the Navigators, I heard that the widow and family of Puna, formerly our native Missionary at Rurutu, were residing at Niua- tabutabu, or Keppel's Island. I therefore de termined to go and convey them to their homes. Ou reaching the island, I found them in very destitute circumstances, and, after having given vent to her feelings, the widow supplied me with the following most affecting history of her sufferings. Her husband, herself, and family, with ten natives of Rurutu, and two Americans, put to sea in a little decked vessel of their own building, for the purpose of returning to Raia tea ; but having lost their way, they were driven about for nearly six weeks, when they descried a large low island, called by the inhabitants Manaiki. As the natives appeared friendly, one of the Americans and two of the Rurutuans went on shore, having promised to hoist a white flag if they were treated with kindness. No flag, however, was hoisted ; and although they sailed about the island for nearly a fortnight, all they heard concerning their unfortunate com panions was, that the king had dedicated them to the gods; but whether as sacrifices, or whether, from their being the first strangers who had ever visited his island, he had simply made them sacred, Puna could not ascertain. I think it not all improbable that their lives were spared, and that they may have been instrumental in imparting a knowledge of Christianity to the inhabitants. At length the boat was driven by * I am truly happy to say, that of late years several captains have been in the habit of visiting the islands, whose arrival both the natives and oursoives hail with delight. Among these may be mentioned Captain Mor gan, Captain Emment, Captain Thomas Stayers of the Tuscan, Captain Lee, and several others. a strong wind to another island of the same group, called Rakaana, which I should suppose from the widow's account to be about twenty- five miles from Manaiki, and to belong to its inhabitants, who visited and lived upon the produce of each island alternately. Here Puna's party landed, and sawhouses and canoes, but no inhabitants. In the former there were many preserved bodies, with flowing black hair, which looked as if alive. The natives, the widow informed me, were strong and robust, and resembled the inhabitants of the Paumotas, who are a shade or two darker than those of the Society Islands. The canoes were very large, and built entirely of the cocoa-nut tree. Of this group I received information from the Aitutakians some time previously, as a canoe full of people had drifted, fifty or sixty years be fore, from thence to Aitutaki. The cluster is said to consist of five islands, four of which are named Manaiki, Rakaana, Mautorea, and Pa- kara. I suppose them to be about two days' sail N.E. of Aitutaki. Again putting to sea, Puna and his party were driven in various directions for upwards of two months, when they reached Keppel's Island, lat. 15° 56', long. 174° 10', 1900 miles from Rurutu. Here the people wished to plunder them, but were prevented by Maatu, the king. They remained at this island four months, during which time they kept the Sabbath, and observed all their accustomed religious services. One person of influence joined them, and was desirous that they should reside at his district, where he promised to erect a place of worship ; but Puna was taken, ill, and, not expecting to recover, he was exceedingly anxious to be where he could enjoy intercourse with a Missionary ; and, hearing that some resided at Tongatabu, about three hundred miles distant, he again launched his little schooner. They were driven, however, by foul wind to Niuafou, an island about ninety miles west of that from which they started, and here poor Puna died the day after he landed. He was a laborious and valuable teacher. Of his piety I entertain no doubt. He and his colleague, however, never agreed, which gave rise to serious evils at Rurutu, and occasioned me more anxiety than I experienced in reference to any of our other stations. He committed his wife and family to the chief of the island, and spent his dying moments in ex horting him to place himself under Christian instruction. The day after his death the natives dragged the little vessel on shore, and set her on fire for the purpose of obtaining the iron with which she was fastened ; and some run away sailors broke open Puna's box, and stole his property, but they quarrelled in dividing it, when one of them received a blow which ter minated his life. Puna's peaceful death and parting exhortations produced so powerful an impression upon the chief's mind, that he de termined to embrace a religion which imparted such blessedness. But his people were so exasperated at his renunciation of idolatry, that they entered into a conspiracy, and put him to death. 122 ARRIVAL AT VAVAU— CHANGE AT VAVAU. Having taken the widow and family on board, we made as direct a course as we could for Ra rotonga, when, after proceeding about three hundred miles, a serious disaster befell us. At midnight the mate awoke me with the startling announcement, " You must get up immediately, Sir ; the ship has sprung a leak, is half full of water, and is sinking fast." I ran on deck in stantly, and found, to my consternation, nearly four feet of water in the hold. I at once perceived that no time was to be lost, and that every indi vidual must exert himself to the utmost ; for tbe alternative was pump or sink. We all, therefore, set to work forthwith, some with buckets and others at the pump ; and in about an hour I was relieved from my intense anxiety by finding that we had gained six inches. Thus encouraged we continued our arduous and united efforts until morning, by which time we had succeeded in pumping the ship dry. Still, however, the water came in so fast, that in a few minutes we were compelled to resume our la bours. And now the first thing to which we directed our attention was, to put our pumps into the best possible repair ; and, as the ship might sink in a moment, we also determined to get the boats in readiness. This being accom plished, we filled a few bags with biscuits, and some bamboos with water, and put them, with a number of cocoa-nuts, into a convenient place, to prevent confusion in the event of being com pelled to leave the ship. As there were two boats, we then divided the crew into two parties, and made every arrangement which prudence dictated in our distressing circumstances. I was truly thankful at being enabled to maintain a coolness and tranquillity during the whole of this exigency. The greater part of the night was spent in an unsuccessful search for the leak ; and our perplexity was much increased by the wind becoming contrary and exceedingly vio lent. Against this we contended for several days, pumping the whole . time without inter mission. At length we reached Vavau, and, hoping to discover our leak, we worked our de vious way for several hours amidst a multitude of small islands, in quest of an anchorage, but did not find one until sunset. Early the fol lowing morning we commenced a thorough search for the leak within and without ; but although the natives dived under the keel, and swam all round the vessel, no fracture nor de fect could be discovered ; we therefore put to sea again,* and, having to contend against a contrary wind, we were five days, instead of twenty-four hours, in reaching Tonga. Very providentially, I found there Captain S. Henry ; and, the day after our arrival, Captain Deanes, of the Elizabeth, English whaler, came to anchor. Aided by these two gentlemen, with their crews and the natives, we succeeded in heaving down the vessel, and, after a close scru tiny, discovered the cause of our danger in a large auger-hole in the keel, into which the bolt had never been driven. This had been filled with mud and stones in the hurricane at Rarotonga, which had kept the vessel from leaking six months, during which time she had sailed se veral thousands of miles. A stone was very fortunately wedged in the hole, or it would have been impossible, in the estimation of the captains and carpenter, to have kept the vessel from sinking. With my short visit to Vavau I was much de lighted. It will be ' recollected that, on my former voyage to the Friendly Islands, I met Finau at Lefuga, who not only refused to em brace Christianity himself, but threatened with death any of his people who did so. My satis faction, then, may be imagined at finding this once despotic, but now docile chieftain, with all his people, receiving the instructions of Mr. Turner. At the time of my arrival they were erecting a large place of worship to accom modate a congregation, which, on the preceding • We found the water run in much faster when we were lying at anchor than when at sea; indeed, the leak began when we were in a perfect calm. MISSIONARY DWELLINGS, 123 Sabbath, consisted of more than two thousand persons. All this had been effected in two years. At my former visit to the Hapai Islands I found a number of respectable Vavauans there in exile, who had forsaken all to enjoy the in structions of Mr. Thomas. There they acquired a fitness for future usefulness ; and when, by the conversion of Finau, they were permitted to revisit their own island, they began at once to impart to their countrymen the inestimable knowledge they possessed. Thus was the wrath of man made to praise God. With Mr. and Mrs. Turner I spent a most pleasant evening. Their prospects of usefulness were very encouraging, and their hearts ap peared to be thoroughly in their work. The Vavau group is composed of a great number of barren rocks, of compact crystal limestone, from thirty to more than a hundred feet in height. Many of these are inaccessible and uninhabitable to human beings. In some of them there are littly sandy coves, where the natives, in numbers corresponding with the ex tent of the habitable spot, erect their dwell ings. Vavau appeared a most dreary place. We saw nothing, as we worked our winding way, but high, precipitous, and weather-beaten rocks, which, although bold, were barren. These were the undisturbed possessions of innumera ble sea-fowl and vampire bats, whose screams, mingling with the hollow roar of the sea, as it ingulfed itself in the numerous excavations and caves which had been scooped out by the bil lows, were the only sounds which disturbed, while they appeared to enhance, the awful still ness of the place. On reaching the Missionary settlement, you are agreeably surprised to find a beautiful and fertile plain, inhabited by hu man beings, not one of whom appeared until we were near the anchorage. In my visit to Tongatabu, I was truly de lighted to find that the Missionaries had received a printing-press, and that it was most actively engaged in preparing the word of life for the people. Its invaluable operations were com menced in April, 1831, and by November, 1832, twenty-nine thousand one hundred copies of small books, containing five millions seven hundred and seventy-two thousand pages, had been struck off. Such facts furnish delightful evidence of the untiring diligence of the Missionaries who supplied the matter, and of the perseverance of Mr. Wood, who had charge of the mighty engine, Indeed, if sterling piety arid entire devotedness to the cause of God among the heathen can insure success, our Wesleyan brethren at the Friendly Islands will have a distinguished portion. After spending a fortnight of most pleasing and profitable intercourse at this place, our vessel being ready for sea, we sailed for Raratonga, which we reached in safety, in January, 1833, having been absent fifteen weeks. After this I remained several months at Ra rotonga, during which period we completed the revision of the translation which I brought to England, and of which, I am happy to add, the British and Foreign Bible Society has printed Five thousand copies. This precious treasure I shall have the unspeakable satisfaction of con veying back with me. During this period, also, the chapels were rebuilt, Mr. Buzacott's new mission premises erected, and the settlements put into excellent order. The accompanying plate may give the reader an idea of our dwell- WSmttSmmmk Mb. Buzacott's Residence, in imitation of which the Kino's was built. 124 MISSIONARY DWELLINGS— STATE OF THE SCHOOLS. HlHHL - ''¦¦-¦•tmi'rir--->-«*j^'--'-iiiiiiii' rfr**- KHli --.-**¦, hW--- a Lit. The Author's Residence at Raiatea, after tho model of which Mr. Pitman's was built. ings. The framework is of wood, and the spaces between the posts wattled and plastered with lime made from coral. By the exercise of a little ingenuity we contrived to render them both comfortable and respectable. Mixing red ochre with the coral whitewash, we obtained a salmon colour for our walls, and by pounding the charcoal of soft wood and mixing it with lime, we procured a French grey. The graceful foliage of the banana, young bread-fruit, and cocoa-nut trees, by which they are surrounded, invests our premises with an appearance of neatness and elegance. It was my determi nation, when I originally left England, to have as respectable a dwelling as I could erect; for the Missionary does not go to barbarise himself, but to civilise the heathen. He ought not, therefore, to sink down to their standard, but to elevate them to his. In addition to this, I prepared a small ele mentary book, and a catechism in the Samoa language, ten thousand copies of which Mr. Barff printed before I left the islands. The schools were, at this time, in a pleasing state of prosperity. In that of Papehia, there were about five hundred children, in Mr. Buza cott's seven hundred, and in Mr. Pitman's up wards of nine hundred ; and on the morning of our departure, they wrote to me on their slates several hundreds of letters, expressive of their regret at my leaving them. One of these, written by a little boy about nine years of age, 1 desired him to copy upon paper. The following is a translation : — " Servant of God, we are grieving very much for you ; our hearts are sore with grieving, be cause you are going to that far distant country of yours, and we fear that we shall not see your face again. Leave us John to teach us while you go, then we may expect to see you again ; but if you take John too, we shall give up all hope. But why do you go ? You are not an old man and worn out. Stay till you cannot work any longer for God, and then go home." The progress which these children had made in writing was not more gratifying than the in genuity which they had displayed in providing themselves with a substitute for slates and pen cils. We taught them to write at first by means of sand-boards, but, of course, they could not by this mode acquire any great facility in the art. They frequently expressed their regret at this, and as our supply of slates was very small, they determined, if possible, to find a substitute. Having formed the resolution, they were ob served one morning, on leaving the school, running in groups up the mountains, and shortly after returning with flakes of stones, which they had broken off from the rocks. These they carried to the sea-beach and rubbed with sand and coral until they had produced a smooth sur face. Thus far successful, they coloured the Echinus. NAMES OF THE ISLANDS— KOTZEBUE— MANUA— OROSENGA—OFU. 125 stones with the purple juice of the mountain plantain, to give them the appearance of English slates. Some ofthe boys completed the resem blance by cutting them square and framing them, so that, without close examination, you could scarcely detect the difference. The next desideratum was a pencil, and for this they went into the sea, and procured a number of the echi nus, or sea-egg, which is armed with twenty or thirty spines. These they burnt slightly to render them soft, that they might not scratch ; and with these flakes of stone for a slate, and the spine of the sea-egg for a pencil, they wrote exceedingly well: and hundreds of them took down the principal portions of every discourse they heard. CHAPTER XXVIII. Discovery of the Samoa Group — French Navigators — Names ofthe Islands— Kotzebue — Manua — Orosenga — Ofu — Tutuila — Upolu— Manono— Aborima— Savaii — Importance of the Group — Eligibility for a British Settlement — Soil — Trees — Various uses of the Candle- nut Bread-fruit, and Cocoa-nut Trees — Botany of the Islands— M.Betero — Birds — Vampire Bat — Snakes and Lizards — Fish — Fishing— Turtle. In various parts of my Narrative I have given the reader to understand that many points of importance were reserved for the conclusion. To these I shall now call his attention; and that which appears to demand our first con sideration is, the geography of the N avigators' Islands. This extensive and populous group is situated in the South Pacific Ocean, and extends four degrees east and west. It was discovered on the 3rd of May, 1678, by the French circumna vigator Bougainville, who gave it the designation it now bears, most probably on account of the superior construction of the canoes of the na tives, and their surprising dexterity in the water. The group is called by the inhabitants, Sa-moa, and consists of eight islands : — Manua, Orosenga, Ofu, Tutuila, Upolu, Manono, Abori ma, and Savaii. In addition to these there are several small islands off the coast of Tutuila and Upolu. In the year 1788 this group was visited by the unfortunate La Perouse, whose colleague, M. de Langle, and a number of his men, were barba rously murdered by the natives. This tragical act conveyed such an impression of their treach ery and ferocity as deterred subsequent voy agers from venturing among them. And for many years they appear not to have been visited by a vessel from any part of the civilised world. The names given by the French navigators are so confused and incorrect, that it is utterly impossible to know the islands which they in tended to designate. Upolu they called Oyo- lava, and the large island of Savaii, Pola. Ma nua they call Opoun, Orosenga and Ofu, Fanfou and Leone. Now Leone is the name of a bay at Tutuila, which island they call Manua. Indeed, there is not one island named cor rectly, and I am quite unable to divine where j Bougainville and La Perouse obtained the names I under which they describe them. In this respect, as well as in every other, Cap tain Cook's superiority is strikingly displayed. The accuracy of his directions is such, that you may follow them with as much confidence as you travel the high roads of England ; and the excellent sense of this prince of navigators is manifested in his retaining the native names of the places at which he touched. This is of singular advantage to persons visiting the nu merous islands of the Pacific. In our most popular nautical works, especially in Norie's Epitome, it will be seen that the names there given differ from those attached to the same islands in his charts of the Pacific, but neither of them are correct. The Russian navigator, Kotzebue, says that he visited this group ; but with all his skill in misrepresenting and vituperating the Mission aries, he has failed to correct one error or to supply a single deficiency of his French prede cessors. But while he has not done this, he takes great credit to himself for introducing yams among this people, and thereby preventing them from being driven to the dire necessity of eating human flesh ; whereas the Samoa islanders were never addicted to that horrid practice ; and as for yams, they had them before Kotzebue was born. As I may not have occasion to refer to this individual again, I shall embrace the present opportunity of saying, that his ' New Voyage round the World,' so far as it relates to Tahiti, is one tissue of falsehoods, containing accounts of persons who never existed, and lengthened histories of events which never occurred. Manua. Sailing to the eastward, after passing a small, uninhabited island, about seventy miles east of the whole group,* this island, 169'' 1' W. long., 14° 9' S. lat., presents itself. It is cir cular, and so elevated as to be visible at the distance of forty or fifty miles. The shore is lofty and bold, and there appeared to be but little low land. I did not observe any dangers off the coast. The whole group, however, re quires to be properly surveyed. The inhabitants of Manua are regarded as a conquered people, and are, in consequence, despised and oppressed by the other islanders. Indeed, in most of the groups of the Pacific, one island was subject to peculiar oppression, and supplied the others with human sacrifices and slaves : and in single islands, particular districts were thus subjected. This was the case with the district of Arorangi at Rarotonga, the chief and people of which dwelt in the mountains. Orosenga and Ofu next appear. These are two comparatively insignificant islands, nearly * I was also informed of a very dangerous reef about four degrees eastward of the group. Off Keppel's ami Boscawen's Islands there are several sunken locks, at a distance of six miles from the shore, upon which the sea appeared to break at intervals of about a quarter of an hour, and we were close to them before they were ob served. There is also a dangerous reef about 25 miles N.N.E. of these islands. 126 TUTUILA— UPOLU, MA-NO-NO— ABORIMA AND SAVA-II. united at right angles. The inhabitants were not so numerous as at Manua ; indeed, most of the people of Ofu have been destroyed by those of Orosenga. The coast appeared to be free from danger. Tutuila is about fifty miles west of Orosenga, in 170° 16' W. long., 14° 20' S. lat. This is a fine, romantic island, of from eighty to a hun dred miles in circumference. It was here that the unfortunate M. de Langle lost his life ; and, on this account, the bay, in which he was mur dered, received the name of Massacre Cove. In sailing down the south coast we observed several fine bays, two of which, attracted our particular observation. One was called Pango- pango. Into this, vessels of a hundred tons burden might run, and anchor with safety. Leone is the name of the other, which is so spacious and deep that ships of any burden might anchor there with perfect safety, except during a strong south wind. It was in this bay that I was so kindly received. See page 109. Utolu, the next island of the group, is in cir cumference between 150 and 200 miles. The mountains on this island are very high, and, in clear weather, may be seen for fifty or sixty miles. These are richly clothed with verdure to their summits ; and, in the north-east parts of the island, they present a variety, in their form and character, which, in some situations, renders their appearance romantic and sublime ; in others soft, luxuriant, and beautiful. It has been stated that there were no harbours in this group ; but, at this island alone, we found three, and there may be others. The one at Apia, in which we anchored, is spacious, commodious, and safe ; and, as it faces the north, it admits, with the prevailing trade-wind, of easy ingress and egress. The bottom is sandy, and at twenty yards from the shore there are about five fathoms of water. A river falls into the bay, so that any quantity of excellent water may easily be ob tained there. Ma-no-no lies next, and is about five miles in circumference. It is attached, by a shoal and reef, to the south-west extremity of Upolu ; the reef passes round it, and rejoins Upolu on the opposite side. This island offers several good harbours for vessels of forty or fifty tons burden. There is shoal water to a considerable distance from the shore ; but I am not aware that any rocks exist to render approach dangerous. On the north side of the island there is a good roadstead. Manono, although small, is of great importance ; for, as its inhabitants have been victorious in every struggle, it has obtained a kind of political superiority over the whole group. It has many dependent settlements on the larger islands of Savaii and Upolu, and, when engaged in a contest, draws such assistance from these as to form a force which no single chief can withstand. Hence the inhabitants of Manono are called the Maio, or victorious people. Notwithstanding this, it is affirmed that they have never been the aggressors in a conflict. The island is badly supplied with water, but the natives have sunk wells, and have thus succeeded in obtaining it. Aborima is about two miles in circumference, from two to three hundred feet in height, and is situated half-way between Manono and Savaii. It received its name, which signifies the hollow of the hand, from its remarkable shape. Most probably it is the crater of an extinct volcano. It is precipitous and inaccessible, except at one small opening ; and the people of Manono, to whom it is subject, use it in time of war as a fortress for their families and property, and, in the event of defeat, as a retreat for themselves. For these purposes it is well adapted, as it is so completely protected on all sides by the inacces sible rocks, that it is only necessary to guard the narrow entrance. This is done most effectually, — first, by throwing tripping lines across it, so that men stationed on the jutting rocks that flank the passage could easily overturn every canoe that entered it ; and secondly, by con structing a platform or bridge on the rocks that overhang this opening, from which they could hurl huge stones upon the invaders. Although, therefore, the people of Manono had been at times driven from their own island, this retreat was so effectually guarded, and so well provided with food, that they never had been, and scarcely could be subdued. Barren and steril as are the sides of the rocks, a very different appearance is presented when you arrive oppo site to the point where the crater has emptied itself. Plere the whole of the interior opens at once to the view, and anything more beautiful or unique I never beheld. The island is a basin, most regularly scooped out, and ascending with a gentle slope from the centre to the cir cumference ; and although, on approaching it, nothing meets the eye but steril cliffs, when you catch a glimpse of the amphitheatre within, you discover, there an impressive contrast to the dreariness and desolation without. Not a barren spot is to be seen, but one verdant mass of tro pical vegetation, the whole of which, from the peculiar form of the island, presents itself at a single view, and fills the beholder with delight. If anything could enhance the beauty of the scene, it is the group of native dwellings, which, half revealed among the trees of cocoa-nut, bread-fruit, and banana, form the settlement. But I must hasten to notice Sava-ii, the last and largest of the group, which is said to be 250 miles in circumference. The mountains of this superb island are very lofty, and visible at a distance of sixty or seventy miles. These gradually increase in height, from the sea to the centre of the island, and all of them are covered and crowned with noble forests. Savaii, in beauty, extent, and import ance, yields to few of the many charming islands that bestud and adorn the bosom of the Pacific. The straits between Upolu and Savaii are from ten to fifteen miles wide, and at their southern entrance are Manono and Aborima. They may be passed by vessels of the largest class with perfect safety, and are entered either between Savaii and Aborima, or between Manono and Aborima, both openings being suf ficiently wide, and perfectly free from rocks and shoals. IMPORTANCE OF THE GROUP— TREES. 127 The Navigators group is, with the exception of the Sandwich Islands, the largest and most populous in the Pacific at which missions have been commenced, and in a few years they will, no doubt, rise into considerable importance. As they lie in the vicinity of the Friendly Islands, the extensive Fiji group, the New Hebrides, New Caledonia, and numerous other solitary islands, intercourse between them could be easily maintained, and thus a civilizing and religious influence might be exerted upon the countless thousands of benighted heathen, who dwell between the Samoas and the coast of New Holland ; and, whether we view this group as a mart for commercial enterprise, a field for sci entific research, or a sphere for the exercise of Christian benevolence; we must regard it with feelings of the liveliest interest. A few years ago it was much wished by the inhabitants of New South Wales that the British Government would form a settlement at one of the South Sea Islands, where ships might refresh and refit, without being exposed to danger. The fate of the vinfortunate Oldham whaler, and the numerous tragical events which were con stantly occurring at these islands, gave rise to this suggestion. Although the danger has ceased where Christianity has been introduced, yet, should such an establishment be determined upon, the Navigators group is a most eligible place for its formation. Its central situation, the excellence of the harbours, the abundant supply of water and provision, the amazing extent of rich and arable land, and the quantity and variety of the timber, are important pre requisites for an establishment of this description, and such as must insure its prosperity. For their extent of surface these islands de serve consideration. There are many valleys containing thousands of acres of rich soil, en tirely untilled ; indeed, the portion of country under cultivation is very inconsiderable ; for, as the fruits grow so abundantly without labour, the Samoans, like the Tahitians, display but little ingenuity in agriculture. In this they are greatly surpassed by their neighbours, the Ton- gatubuans, who subsist almost entirely upon produce raised by themselves ; while the Tahi tian and the light-hearted Samoan can work or play, rove abroad or stay at home, dance or sleep, with the assurance that the beautiful grove of bread-fruit trees, in which his cottage is embowered, will afford him an abundant sup ply ; and, if these should prove insufficient, that the mountains abound with bananas, plantains, wild- yams, and other esculents, more than enough to supply the deficiency. Notwith standing this, however, the Samoans cultivate vast quantities of taro, because they prefer it to the yam. The soil is so exceedingly rich, that coffee, sugar, cotton, and every other tropical produc tion, may. be raised in these islands to almost any extent ; and, as they are well watered, and abound with springs, lakes and streams, machi nery might, in many places, he worked with the greatest facility. This, of course, enhances the value of these superb islands incalculably. The trees at the Samoas, as at Tahiti, ex hibit great beauty and variety. Some are re markable for their size, and others for their flowers, or fragrance, or fruit. Most of them are evergreens. Indeed, there are but two or three deciduous trees on the islands. In general, the new and old leaves, the bud and the blossom, the young fruit and the ripe, appear together, and adorn these through the whole circle ofthe year. Some of the trees are exceedingly valuable as timber. This is the case with the tamanu (calo- phyllum). These grow to an amazing size. I have seen them five feet in diameter. The na tives select this wood for their canoes, stools, pillows, bowls, and other articles, which are wrought, with immense labour, out of the solid mass. It has been used by us in ship-building ; and, as it is durable, and holds a nail with great tenacity, it is very valuable for that purpose. Its value is further enhanced by the circum stance, that iron lasts much longer in the tamanu than in any other wood. We have also made furniture of it. It has a veiny and beau tiful grain, and is susceptible of a high polish. In the hands of European cabinet-makers it would vie with some of our most admired woods. This might become an important article of commerce. The amai or miro is another tree of note in the various islands of the Pacific. The leaves of the miro were always used in religious cere monies, and ambassadors invariably carried a branch of it as an emblem of their authority. The wood is of a close texture, of a dark brown colour, very little variegated, but susceptible of a high polish. It is easily worked, and makes beautiful furniture. The tou (cordia) is a low, wide-spreading tree, and is generally planted near the dwellings of the chiefs. Its wood closely resembles rosewood in colour and grain, but it is not so hard. It makes beautiful furniture. I have frequently thought that it would be exceedingly valuable for musical instruments, as the wooden drums made from it by the natives produce a far more sonorous and mellow sound than those con structed from any other tree. On this account the tou is highly prized by them. To those already mentioned I might add seve ral other trees, especially the toi, with the bota nical name of which I am unacquainted. This tree grows to a considerable size and height. The wood, lefwards the heart of the tree, is of a blood red, and the lighter parts are beautifully waved, like satin-wood : it takes a high polish. The toa, also, (casuarina,) abounds in all the islands, attains to a large size, and is covered with exceedingly graceful foliage. The wood is reddish brown, and very hard. We have used it for sheaves of blocks, for cogs to our sugar- mills, and for other similar articles ; and I think it would be valuable for a variety of purposes for which hard wood is required in England . ' The ingenuity of the natives is displayed in working this wood, which they do with won derful facility, considering their miserable tools, of shell, stone, and bone. Their clubs and spears, many of which are most exquisitely carved, are made of this wood. 128 CANDLE-NUT TREE— BREAD-FRUIT TREE. The above and numerous other trees, which tbe islands produce in great abundance, might be added to the list of those most valued in Europe. From many of them gums and dyes are procured, which might become articles of importance in our own and other civilized coun tries. Several of the trees possess a high value to the islanders ; and I have frequently admired, on the one hand, the beneficence of God, who has united so many useful qualities in a single plant ; and, on the other, the ingenuity of the natives in discovering and applying these to the purposes of necessity and comfort. Of this remark I shall select an illustration. The can dle-nut tree (aleurites triloba) abounds in the mountains ; and, as its leaves are nearly white, they form a most agreeable contrast to the dark rich foliage of the other trees among which it is interspersed. It bears a nut, about the size of a walnut, which is used as a substitute for a candle. Having stripped off the shell, they perforate the kernel, and string a number of these on a rib of the cocoa-nut leaflet, and then light them. By burning large quantities of this nut in a curiously constructed oven, the natives obtain a very fine lampblack, with which they paint their canoes, idols, and drums, and print various devices upon their ornamental garments. They also use the colouring thus obtained in tatooing their skin. Besides this, the tuitui furnishes a gum with which they varnish the cloth made from the bark of the bread-fruit tree, thus rendering it more impervious and durable. From its inner bark a juice is pro cured, which is a valuable substitute for paint- oil, and when mixed with lampblack, or with the dye from the casuarina and other trees, it becomes so permanent that it never washes off.* But, among all the trees that adorn the islands of the Pacific, the bread-fruit deserves the pre eminence for its beauty and value. It frequently grows fifty or sixty feet high, and has a trunk between two and three feet in diameter. The leaves are broad and sinuated, something similar in their form to those of the fig-tree. They are frequently eighteen inches in length, and of a dark green colour, with a glossy surface resem bling that of the richest evergreens. The fruit is oval, about six inches in diameter, and of a light pea-green. It always grows at the extre mity of the branches, and hangs either alone, or in clusters of two or three. There are some times several hundreds of these upon one tree, and their light colour, contrasted with the dark, glossy leaves among which they hang, together with the stately outline and spiring shape of the tree, render it an object which, for its beauty, is not surpassed in the whole vegetable world. The value of this wonderful tree, however, ex ceeds its beauty. It is everything to the natives, their house, their food, and their clothing. The trunk furnishes one of the best kinds of timber they possess. It is the colour of mahogany, ex ceedingly durable, and is used by the natives in building their canoes and houses, and in the • Finding that the cocoa-nut oil, when mixed with paint, did not dry, we extracted an oil from the candle- nut, which answered the purpose much better. manufacture of the few articles of furniture they formerly possessed. From the bark of the branches they fabricate their clothing; and, when the tree is punctured, there exudes from it a quantity of mucilaginous fluid, resembling thick cream, which hardens by exposure to tbe sun, and, when boiled, answers all the purposes of English pitch. The fruit is, to the South Sea islander, the staff of life. It bears two crops every season. Besides this, there are several varieties,* which ripen "at different pe riods, so that the natives have a supply of this palatable and nutritious food during the greater part of the year. The leaves are excellent fodder for the cattle, and they are so excessively fond of it, thas it is necessary to protect the young trees by high and strong fences. At the Navigators' Islands we found a variety, with which the Hervey and Tahitian islanders are unacquainted. This had a number of seeds ranged around the core.f The tree which pro duces this fruit does not grow to so great a size as the others, and the leaves are not sinuated. I observed that the rustic native cottages gene rally stood amidst a grove of these beautiful little trees, the fruitful branches of which em bowered them, and shielded their inmates from the piercing rays of the sun. The inhabitants of these fertile spots can lie upon their mats, and, without labour or care, behold their bread growing before their eyes. Many other parti culars respecting this invaluable tree might be noticed, but I have already exceeded the limits I had assigned to myself for remarks upon the botany of the islands ; and, as so many have written upon the subject, it is unnecessary for me to traverse the ground again. The same observation is applicable to the cocoa-nut tree. Its appearance, its character, and its uses, have been so minutely described by others, especially by the Rev. W. Ellis.rj; that I shall only add a remark or two, to illustrate the wisdom and goodness of the kind Father of the human family, in making this provision for their wants. The bread-fruit tree requires depth of soil, and consequently cannot grow upon low coral islands. But those who dwell upon these spots are not left to perish ; for where the bread-fruit tree will not exist, there the cocoa-nut tree flourishes ; and the latter is as valuable to the inhabitants of the coral, as the former is to those of the mountainous islands. Ofthe trunk ofthe cocoa-nut tree the natives obtain timber for building their houses and canoes. With the leaves they thatch their * There are very many varieties of the bread-fruit, for each of which the natives have distinct names ; and there stood in our garden a tree which was regarded by them as a very great curiosity. Its two main branches differed con siderably, the leaves on the one side of the tree being much more deeply sinuated than those of the other, and the fruit on the one branch being oval, while that on the other was nearly round. This was an accidental circum stance, for the natives do not understand grafting. f When I informed the Raiateans of this circumstance, it excited considerable amazement, and the first thiug Makea inquired for, on arriving at the Samoas, was the bread-fruit with seed in it, that he might see the wonder for himself. X Ellis's Polinesian Researches, COCOA-NUT TREE— BOTANY AND ORNITHOLOGY. 129 dwellings and make baskets. Round that part of the stem of each leaf which is attached to the trunk of the tree, there is found a remark ably fine and strong fibrous matting, which is a singular provision for the security of the long leaves against the violence of the winds. The cloth thus woven in the loom of nature is alto gether a most curious substance ; the regularity with which the fibres cross each other, and the singular manner in which they are attached, give it the appearance of being a product of human ingenuity. It is obtained in pieces of about two feet in length, and ten or twelve inches wide, and is used by the natives for a variety of purposes, but principally for sails and clothing. It is of a wiry texture ; and, when worn, would be exceedingly distressing, if the skin of the natives was tender. The principal value of this tree, however, consists in the sup ply it yields both of food and water. In many of the coral islands there are neither streams nor springs ; and, were it not for the cocoa-nut, the inhabitants must perish. On a sultry day, when the very ground burns with heat, a native, by climbing the cylindrical trunk of one of these trees, can pluck a dozen unripe nuts, each con taining a pint or more of water, as cool and refreshing as from the limpid stream.* Is it possible to reflect upon the wonderful adapta tion of the fruits of the earth to the climate where they grow, and the circumstances of man, without exclaiming, " How manifold are thy works, 0 God ! in wisdom hast thou made them all!" As I have already intimated, the cocoa-nut tree can be killed with great ease. In the year 1832 myriads of insects, of the mantis family, appeared at Rarotonga and the surrounding islands ; and vast numbers of these invaluable trees were destroyed by them. The following is a representation of the insect. I shall conclude these remarks by observing that perhaps few more extensive or more in viting fields are open to the botanist than the South Sea Islands. This will be apparent, when I inform my reader that, in 1832, the Tahitian and Society Islands were visited by M. Bertero, an Italian botanist, an accom plished and scientific man, who astonished not only the natives, but ourselves by the cures he effected with medicinal herbs. When a patient came to him for relief, M. Bertero, without going twenty yards from the spot, would often point out some herb, which, used according to his directions, produced in numberless instances the most beneficial effects. This gentleman was enthusiastic and indefatigable in the pursuit of his object ; and, during the eight or ten months of his sojourn at the islands, he obtained two thousand new specimens. I regret exceedingly to state that the vessel in which he sailed for the west coast of South America perished at sea, and that this gentleman was unhappily lost, together with his valuable collection. This re gret is heightened by the circumstance, that he had imbibed principles which could have af forded him no consolation when battling with the wave that was about to ingulf him. No. 9. " "fis religion that can give Sweetest pleasures while we live ; 'Tis religion must supply Solid comfort when we die." At the Tahitian and Hervey Islands there are but few varieties of the feathered tribes ; and these are not remarkable either for the beauty of their plumage or for the sweetness of their notes. At the Navigators they are far more numerpus ; but even there the ornitholo gist may soon complete his catalogue. I was certainly surprised to find that owls abounded at this group, as not a single specimen is found at the islands to the east of it. There are also several species of the turtle-dove at the Samoas, and I obtained one, the plumage of which was exquisitely beautiful ; bright blue-green and vermilion being the prevailing colours. These, together with paroquets, water-hens, wood- pigeons, wild-ducks, and a few others, compre- * The cocoa-nut milk , aa it is obtained in England, con veys no accurate idea of the delicious beverage used by the natives ; for, as the nuts are old and dry, the fluid is rancid. In the tropics, the water is drunk before the ker nel is formed, when it is perfectly clear, and combines a degree of acidity and sweetness, which renders it as re freshing as lemonade. K 130 SNAKES— FISHING— IMPORTANCE OF THE NAVIGATORS ISLANDS. hend all the varieties of the feathered tribe found in the Samoa Islands. The vampire-bat abounds at this group ; and it is a singular fact that they are also numerous at Mangaia, but unknown at every other island eastward of the Navigators. At Savage Island, they are re garded by the natives as a great delicacy. Some that I was conveying to Rarotonga as a curiosity died on board the ship, and the two Savage Island youths skinned, broiled, and ate them. The Samoans venerated them as e tus ; and, if Satan is worshipped for his ugliness, I do not wonder that this creature was selected to represent him. Snakes also, which are unknown at the Tahi tian and Hervey groups, abound here. I was informed that there were several species of them, some of which are beautifully variegated. Those procured for me were of a dark olive co lour, about three feet long. There are also water-snakes, some of them beautifully marked with longitudinal stripes of yellow and black, and others with rings, alternately white and black. The natives esteem both the land and sea- snake good food. In the disorder occasioned by the leak in our ship, and her subsequent sinking at Tongatabu, I lost my snakes, and many other curiosities which I was conveying home. Very large lizards are found on the mountains of Savaii and Upolu ; and, from the description I received, I should conclude that they were guanas. None, however, of these reptiles are venomous. Another peculiarity in the natural history of the group is, that a wild dog is found in the mountains. I regretted exceedingly that I could not obtain one. From the description I re ceived, it appears to be a small animal, of a dark, dirty grey, or lead colour, with little or no hair, and large, erect ears. The coast abounds with fish and turtle, and the Samoans are exceedingly expert in catching them. The methods they adopt are similar to those of the Tahitian and Society islanders, who, I think, have more contrivances, and those more ingenious, than tbe natives of other groups. The Hervey islanders, however, surpass them in taking the flying fish. The Samoans make fish-hooks of bone, pearl, turtle, and other shells. They also make fishing-nets of the bark of the hibiscus, the bread-fruit, the banian, and other trees. But the most ingenious method of fishing which I saw at the Samoas was the following : — a number of hollow, floats, about eight inches in diameter, and of the same height, were attached to a strong cord, at a short distance from each other. To each of these a line was fastened, about ten inches long, at the end of which was a piece of fish-bone, made very sharp at both ends, and suspended by the middle ; so that, when the fish seized the bait, the bone pierced it in contrary directions, and thus secured the prey. The floats answered two purposes ; to attract the fish by their whiteness, and to show when it was caught. The rau roa is another method by which vast quantities of fish are taken. This is formed of a number of cocoa-nut and other leaves, fast ened firmly together, which are dragged from moderately deep into shallow water, where the fish are encircled and captured. The natives generally select creeks and bays for using the rau roa. They also adopt the practice of in toxicating fish ; and for this purpose throw in a quantity of bruised seeds of the hutu, or Bar- ringtonia tree. The albicore, boneto, ray, sword-fish, and sharks, are among tbe larger sea-fish eaten by the natives: in addition to these they have an almost endless variety of rock-fish, which are remarkably sweet and good. Salmon abound in many ofthe islands, but these are caught in the salt-water. They exactly re semble the English variety in size and shape, but the flesh is white. Crabs, lobsters, and rock-oysters, with a vast variety of other shell fish, are found amongst the coral reefs and rocks. In the rivers and lakes there are prawns, shrimps, and eels. Turtle are far more numerous at the Samoas than at Tahiti or the Hervey group. There are also two varieties, the hawksbill and the green. Of the shell of the former, which in Eng land is called tortoise-shell, the natives make finger-rings, fish-hooks, and neck and ear orna ments ; but, having lately learned that it was a valuable article of barter, they estimate it more highly than they did. The turtle was considered by the Rarotongans and Tahitians as most sa cred. A part of every one caught was offered to the gods, and the rest cooked with sacred fire, and partaken of by the king and principal chiefs only. I suppose no woman, in any of those islands, ever tasted that luxury prior to the introduction of Christianity. In concluding this brief notice ofthe natural history of the Navigators Islands, I would re mark that there is not, in the whole range of the Pacific, a finer group ; and I am persuaded that, as soon as the progress of religion amongst the inhabitants shall afford additional facilities for properly exploring them, a vast amount of interesting information will be obtained, and more beauties and wonders will be disclosed. CHAPTER XXIX. Distinct Race of Polynesians — Islands inhabited by each Race — Malay Origin of the Inhabitants of Eastern Polynesia — Reasons for this Theory — Three Objections answered— Origin of the Inhabitants of Western Poly nesia doubtful — Conjectures respecting them — Spiritual Condition ofthe two Races — Physical Character ofthe Eastern Polynesians— Superiority of the Chiefs, with reasons for it — Intellectual Capacities of the People- Opinions of themselves— Mental Peculiarities— Wit and Humour — Proverbs and Similes— Ingenuity — Good Sense— Eloquence— Desire of Knowledge— Influence of Religion upon the Intellect— Appropriate use of Scripture. Origin of the South Sea Islanders I have already stated that the numerous isles of the Pacific are peopled by two races of men, who, although possessing many characteristics in common, exhibit numerous traces of distinct origin. This clearly appears in their physical conformation, colour, and language. The one race is allied to the negro, having a Herculean frame, black skin, and woolly, or rather crisped hair ; while the hair of tbe other is bright, lank, AFFINITY TO THE MALAYS— ANSWER TO THE FIRST OBJECTION. 131 and glossy, the skin of a light copper-colour, and the countenance resembling that of the Malay. The latter inhabit Eastern Polynesia, which includes the Sandwich, the Marquesan, the Paumotu, the Tahitian and Society, the Austral, the Hervey, the Navigators, the Friendly Islands, New Zealand, and all the smaller islands in their respective vicinities ; while the former race, which we may designate the Poly nesian negro, is found from the Fijis to the coast of New Holland, which, for the sake of distinction, we shall call Western Polynesia. It will appear, then, that the natives on the eastern part of New Holland, and the intertro pical islands within thirty degrees east of it, including New Guinea, New Britain, New Ire land, the Archipelago of Lonsiade, Solomon's Isles, New Caledonia, the New Hebrides, and the Fijis, differ essentially from the copper- coloured inhabitants of the other islands. There is, indeed, in most of the islands, a partial in termixture of these races ; but the great mass of the people clearly exhibits the distinction I have made. Hitherto, Missionary labours have been entirely confined to the copper-coloured natives. We have now, however, proceeded so far west, as to reach the negro race, and our next effort will be to impart the same blessings to them. To this we are encouraged by the fact, and a fact more interesting can scarcely be found, that nearly the whole nation of Polynesian Asi atics is now converted to the Christian faith. The point, then, for consideration is, the origin of these islanders. In tracing that of the copper-coloured Polynesians, I find no diffi culty. Their physical conformation, their ge neral character, and their Malay countenance, furnish, I think, indubitable evidence of their Asiatic origin. ' But to these proofs must be added, the near affinity between the caste of India and the tabu of the South Sea Isles ; the similarity of the opinions which prevailed re specting women, and the treatment they re ceived in Polynesia and Bengal, more especially the common practice of forbidding them to eat certain kinds of food, or to partake of any in the presence of the men ; — their inhuman con duct to the sick ; — the immolation of the wives at the funeral of their husbands ; and a great number of games and usages. These, I think, are clear indications of the Asiatic origin of this people ; but the correspondence between the language spoken by the Malays and the Poly nesians is a still more decisive evidence. Many of the words are the same in all the dialects of the South Sea Islands ; but the identity is very remarkable in the speech of the New Zealanders, Rarotongans, and others, who introduce the nasal sound, and the hard consonants. Of this I will furnish a very few examples. EXAMPLES. English. Rarotonga. Malay. The eye mata mata Food manga mangan Dead mate mate A bird manu manu Fish ika ika Water vai vai The Polynesians employ the Malay numerals with scarcely any variation ; but, as the Samoa islanders frequently insert the * and the I into their words, these are most like the Malay. This will be apparent from an example. English. Tahitian. Rarotonga. Samoa. Malay. Ten ahuru ngauru safulu safulu Moon marama marama malama malama These are the principal circumstances upon which I found the belief, that the copper- coloured Polynesians, and the various tribes inhabiting the Indian Archipelago, have the same origin. To this theory there are three objections, which have been considered formidable, — the distance of the Malay coast from Tahiti ; the prevalence of the easterly trade-winds within the tropics ; and the unfitness of the native ca noes for performing long voyages. But I think I can show that these difficulties have been much exaggerated. Let us consider for a moment the first ob jection, — the distance from the Malay coast to Tahiti, the Sandwich, and other islands. That distance is about a hundred degrees, six or seven thousand miles ; and it is thought to have been impossible, for the natives to perform such a voyage with their vessels, and imperfect know ledge of navigation. If no islands intervened, I should at once admit the conclusiveness of this objection ; or, if we were to assert that they came direct from the Malay coast to islands so far east, the assertion could not be maintained ; but if we can show that such a voyage may be performed by very short stages, the difficulty will disappear. Suppose, then, that the pro genitors of tbe present islanders bad started from the Malay coast or Sumatra, what would have been their route % By sailing five degrees, or three hundred miles, they would reach Borneo ; then, by crossing the Straits of Macassar, which are only about two hundred miles wide, they would arrive at the Celebes. These are eight degrees from New Guinea, but the large islands of Bes- sey and Ceram intervene. The distance from New Guinea to the New Hebrides is twelve hundred miles ; but the islands between them are so numerous, that the voyage may be made by short and easy stages. Five hundred miles from the New Hebrides are the Fijis; and about three hundred miles further on, the Friendly Islands. Another stage of five hun dred miles brings you to the Navigators ; but, between these two points three other groups intervene. From the Navigators to the Her vey Islands, the distance is about seven hundred miles, and from thence to the Society group about four hundred more. Thus, I think, every difficulty vanishes ; for the longest stage, in the voyage from Sumatra to Tahiti, would be from the Navigators to the Hervey group, seven hundred miles ; and the Rarotongans themselves say that their progenitor, Karika, came from thence.* The two opposite points have yet to be reached — the Sandwich Islands and New Zea- • See pages 51, 52. k 2 132 REPLY TO THE SECOND OBJECTION— THIRD OBJECTION ANSWERED. land. The former are about two thousand five hundred miles north of Tahiti ; but the voyage, if made by way of the Marquesas, would not be difficult, because the distance would thus be diminished from six to eight hundred miles, and the voyagers taken so much to the eastward, that they would be wafted with great velocity before the prevailing trade-wind. With this supposition the native traditions agree ; one of which states, that after the Island of Hawaii was produced by the bursting of an egg, which an immense bird laid upon the sea, a man and woman, with a hog, a dog, and a pair of fowls, arrived in a canoe from the Society Islands, and became tbe progenitors of the present inhabit ants ; and, in another it is stated, that a number of persons arrived in a canoe from Tahiti, and perceiving that the Sandwich Islands were in habited only by gods or spirits, they took up their abode at Oahu. Certainly such traditions, di vested of those parts which are fabulous, in the absence of all evidence to the contrary, ought to be admitted in confirmation of the theory I am advocating. In reaching New Zealand from Tongatabu, or the Fiji Islands, comparatively little difficulty would be experienced. The distance is about twelve hundred miles ; but if the wind happens to be from the north-east, which is a frequent occurrence, the voyage could be performed in a few days. My own boat was on one occasion driven from Tahiti to Atiu, and on another from Rarotonga to Tongatabu, a distance alto gether of fifteen hundred miles ; and on my last voyage, I conveyed home some natives of Aitutaki, who had been drifted in a single canoe to Proby's Island, which is a thousand miles west of their own. Thus, I think, I have disposed of the first ob jection to my theory ; and I now proceed to the consideration of the second, — the prevalence of the easterly trade-winds. This has been deemed by many a conclusive argument against the Asiatic origin of the South Sea Islanders ; but I do not attach to it so much importance. I am fully aware of the general prevalence of these winds, and of the impossibility of the na tive canoes working against them ; but, after some observation, I am satisfied that the direc tion of the wind is not so uniform as to prevent the Malays from reaching the various islands and groups in which their descendants are, I believe, now found. At least every two months there are westerly gales for a few days, and in February there are what the natives call toerau maehaa, or the westerly twins, when the wind blows from the west several days, then veers round the compass, and, in the course of twenty- four hours, comes from that point again. I have frequently seen it continue for eight and ten days ; and, on one occasion, for more than a fortnight; so that the difficulty pre sented by the supposed uniform prevalence of the easterly winds is quite imaginary. In addi tion to this, as I have already shown, the longest stage, in an easterly direction, in performing a voyage from Sumatra to Tahiti, would be seven hundred miles ; and I myself, in my first voyage to the Navigators, sailed sixteen hundred miles due east in a few days. The third objection, derived from the con struction of the native canoes, will appear, upon a little consideration, as groundless as the others. In Marsden's History of Sumatra, a variety of facts are recorded, which prove, that long before they were visited by Europeans, there had been, in the Eastern Archipelago, some extensive and powerful maritime states. "In 1573, the king of Achian appeared, with a fleet that is described as covering the straits of Malacca. He ordered an attack upon three Portuguese frigates that were in the road pro tecting some provision vessels ; which was executed with such a furious discharge of artil lery that the Portuguese were presently de stroyed with all their crews. In 1582, the king appeared again before Malacca, with a fleet of a hundred and fifty sail. In 1615, he again attacked the settlement, with a fleet of five hun dred sail, and sixty thousand men." * Where then is the difficulty of allowing that a people thus advanced in the art of navigation should perform voyages all over the Pacific 1 A re cent writer informs us, that " the north coast of New Holland has been known by the Malays for many years. A fleet, to the number of two hundred proas, annually leaves Macassar for the fishery there : it sails in January, during the westerly monsoon, and coasts from island to island until it reaches the north-east of Timor, when it steers S.E. and S.S.E., which courses carry them to the coast of New Holland. The body of the fleet then steers eastward, leaving here and there a division of fifteen or sixteen proas under the command of an inferior rajah, whose is the only proa that is provided with a compass. After having fished along the coast to the eastward, until the westerly monsoon breaks up, they return ; and, by the last day of May, each detached fleet leaves the coast, with out waiting to collect into one body. On their return, they steer N.W., which brings them to some part of Timor ; from whence they easily retrace their steps to Macassar, where the Chinese traders meet them, and purchase their cargoes." f It should then be recollected that the progeni tors of the South Sea Islanders would not mi grate in the paltry canoes now used by many of their descendants, but in vessels similar to those in which they attacked and sunk the Por tuguese frigates, and assailed the settlement at Malacca. Besides this, we have good evidence that formerly the Tahitians and Society islanders had canoes far superior to those now in use, in which they performed some extraordinary voyages ; and a traditionary account states, that one of their ancestors visited all the Friendly Islands, and even Rotuma, or Wallace's Island, which is two thousand miles west of Tahiti, and brought from thence the celebrated old seat Reua.J • Marsden's History of Sumatra, p. 431. f Survey of the North and West Coasts of Australia, by Captain King, R.N — Pages 135 to 138.— 1818. t See Tamatoa's speech, page (jl. ANOTHER THEORY UNNECESSARY.— POLYNESIAN NEGROES' CLAIMS. 133 Thus, I think every difficulty is removed, and that we need not have recourse to the theory, advocated by some writers, and countenanced, to a certain extent, by Mr. Ellis, that the Poly nesian islanders came from South America.* I would far rather say, provided their phy sical conformation, the structure of their lan guage, and other circumstances established the identity of the Polynesians, and the aborigines of America, that the latter reached that conti nent through the isles of the Pacific. This, however, is a topic upon which, although inter esting, I cannot enter ; but so convinced am I of the practicability of performing a voyage from Sumatra to Tahiti in one of the large na tive canoes, that, if an object of sufficient mag nitude could be accomplished by it, I should feel no hesitation in undertaking the task. I fear that my remarks upon the origin of the Polynesian negroes will not be equally satis factory with those which relate to the other race. This, indeed, is a dark and mysterious chapter in the history of man ; and all I shall do is to throw out a conjecture respecting them, and to express a hope that, when we obtain a knowledge of their language and traditions, a portion of the obscurity in which their origin is now enveloped will be cleared away. It is stated that the inhabitants of the mountainous parts of several of the Asiatic islands have black skin and crisped hair, and if so, it would be interesting to ascertain, in how many other points they differ from the Malays ; whether they keep themselves distinct from that people ; and whether some of their progenitors might not have reached the South Sea Islands, in the same manner as we suppose the Malays to have done. I think I have shown that no sufficient obstacle existed to prevent this, and the only difficulty is to account for the existence of this distinct nation between the Malayan Archipe lago, and the islands to which the Malays have migrated. The hypothesis I would venture to suggest is, that the negro race inhabited the whole of the islands prior to the arrival of the Malay Polynesians ; — that the latter being a fierce and treacherous people, succeeded in con quering and extirpating them from the smaller islands and groups, but were unable to effect this in the larger ones ; and that consequently they were left in quiet possession of the islands which their posterity still inhabit. But, while the origin of this numerous nation is involved in much mystery, there are some points of greater importance in relation to them, con cerning which there can be none. There the people are, many millions of them ; and, dark as is their colour, they are enveloped in a moral gloom of deeper hue, constitute a branch of the guilty family of Adam, are involved in the com mon condemnation, and present a powerful claim upon the Christians of England for that Gospel, which has, under God, conveyed to the other race the blessings of civilization, and the light of immortality. To that people I shall, on my return, direct my principal attention ; and I * Ellis's Polynesian Researches, vol. i., p. 122 ; Tour, 443. trust that British Christians, encouraged by the result of their efforts on behalf of the other race, will be still more anxious for the conver sion of this, and never relax their efforts, or suspend their prayers, till all the islands that stud the vast Pacific shall be enlightened and blessed with the Gospel of salvation. Physical Characteristics. — The physical differences between some of the tribes of the copper-coloured Polynesians are considerable ; but viewed collectively, they are, I think, amongst the finest specimens of the human family. The men are strong and tall, being fre quently upwards of six feet high, with limbs firm and muscular, but not heavy and clumsy. Indeed, the form of many of them exhibits all that is perfect in proportion and exquisite in symmetry. This is especially the case with the chiefs, and more remarkably so with those of Tongatabu and the Friendly Islands, whose form and bearing are as stately as their move ments are natural and free. The women are inferior to the men ; but yet they often present the most elegant models of the human figure. Both the men and women are distinguished by vivacity, and their movements by extraordinary quickness and ease. They exhibit different shades of complexion, but their general colour is that of the Chinese ; the Tahitians, however, used formerly to fatten and whiten themselves at pleasure. Captain Cook attempted to account for the superior size of the chiefs, by supposing that they were a distinct race ; but in this we think he was incorrect. It may perhaps be attributed in part to their progenitors, who were probably raised to the chieftainship on account of then- physical superiority, or of some achievements which resulted from it ; — partly to their mothers, who were generally selected by the chiefs for their form and stature ; — and partly to their treatment during the years of childhood and youth. As soon as the son of a chief was born, two or three of the finest and most healthy women were selected to nurse it ; and while performing this office, which they frequently did for three years, they were provided with abun dance of the best food. A child of Tinomana, of Rarotonga, had four nurses, and he was a little monster. With this commencement, their subsequent training corresponded. I think these causes sufficient to account for the superi ority of the chiefs, many of whom are certainly splendid specimens of human nature. Intellectual Capacities. — It is a remark able fact, that almost every race thinks itself the wisest. While, in the pride of mental superi ority, civilized nations look upon barbarous tribes as almost destitute of intellect, these cherish the same sentiments towards them ; and even Britons have not been exempted from de grading representations. So far back as the time of Cicero, we find evidence of the low esti mate in which we have been held. In one of his epistles to his friend Atticus, the Roman orator recommends him not to obtain his slaves from Britain, because " they are so stupid, and utterly incapable of being taught, that they are 134 POLYNESIAN WIT AND HUMOUR— THEIRPRO VERBS— THEIR GOOD SENSE. unfit to form a part ofthe household of Atticus." At the present day, the Chinese do not form a much higher opinion of our capacities ; and even with the South Sea Islanders, it is common to say, when they see a person exceedingly awkward, " How stupid you are ; perhaps you are an Englishman."* It will depend, however, upon the standard by which we measure intellectual capacity, whether we pronounce the South Sea Islanders inferior to other races. If depth of thought and profundity of research be the only satisfactory evidences of superior minds, I shall yield the point at once. But if wit, ingenuity, quickness of perception, a tenacious memory, a thirst for knowledge when its value is perceived, a clear discernment and high appreciation of the useful ; readiness in acquiring new and valuable arts ; great precision and force in the expression of their thoughts, and " occasional bursts of elo quence of a high order, be evidence of intellect, I hesitate not to affirm, that, in these, the South Sea Islander does not rank below the European : and that many of them would, if they possessed equal advantages, rise to the same eminence as the literary and scientific men of our own land. An illustration or two of their mental capacity may not be inappropriate. The following incident will furnish an example of their wit and humour. A few years ago, a venerable and esteemed brother Missionary came to England, and, being rather bald, some kind friends provided him with a wig. Upon his return to the islands, the chiefs and others went on board to welcome him ; and, after the usual salutations, one of them said to the Mis sionary, "You were bald when you left, and now you have a beautiful head of hair ; what amazing people the English are : how did they make your hair grow again V " You simple people," replied the Missionary, "how does everything grow 1 is it not by sowing seed V They immediately shouted, " Oh, these English people ! they sow seed upon a bald man's head to make the hair grow !" One shrewd fellow inquired whether he had brought any of the seed with him 1 The good Missionary carried on the joke for a short time, and then raised his wig. The revelation of his " original head" of course drew forth a roar of laughter, which was greatly increased, when one of the natives shouted to some of his countrymen who were near " Here, see Mr. , he has corne from England with his head thatched ; he has come from England with his head thatched !" Of the pun they are very fond, and use it fre quently. I could give numerous examples of this : but the point of such witticisms is so much blunted by translation, that I think I should not do their authors justice by presenting them to the English reader. Their proverbs and similies, generally drawn from familiar objects, are often very striking and * They give us full credit for our superiority in some other respects ; but they laugh at the awkwardness of Englishmen in doing those things at which they are so expert, such as climbing, swimming, producing' fire by rubbing two sticks together, &c. appropriate. Several of these have been fur nished in the speeches introduced elsewhere ; but one or two others may be added. There is a fish, common in the tropics, called the aumea, which is remarkable for its large mouth and open gills. By the natives it is believed that the food seized by the former often passes out at the latter ; and, in allusion to this, a chief, when delivering an important commission, would say to the bearer, " Do not imitate the aumea ;" and, when exhorting each other to a cordial and profitable reception of religious truth, they would frequently remark, " Do not let our re ception of the word of life resemble the eating of the aumea, but let it sink into the heart." For several hours before a storm, a hollow roar upon the reef is the unerring indication of its approach ; and as soon as this is heard, the sea urchin, or echinus, prepares for the tempest, by crawling to a place of security, and fixing itself so firmly to the rock, that the bursting billows cannot detach it. The natives observing this, have a proverb, which, rendered literally, is, " The roaring of the sea, and the listening of the echini:" but in signification is similar to that of Solomon, "The prudent man foreseeth the evil, and hideth himself." A current ex pression, in reference to any boast, display, or bluster, is E upaupa tuma ore ia, " That's a splendid thing without a foundation ;" alluding to the parasitical plants which abound in the islands. These are merely specimens of hun dreds equally appropriate of the same class. The ingenuity of the natives is displayed in the fabrication of their cloth, the exquisite carving of their weapons and the construc tion of their canoes, houses, fishing apparatus, &c. Of their good sense, I have given a speci men in page 13 : and will only mention another instance of it. I was standing one day by Tamatoa, when the fishing canoes returned with a quantity of salmon. These were depo sited in his presence ; and one of the domestics, by his master's order, began to set apart a num ber for the various chiefs, according to the usual custom. While he was doing this, a petty chief took a large fish from the pile ; on seeing which, the servant immediately seized it, and muttered something in a very growling tone of voice. Tamatoa noticed this, and asked the man why he did so. " That fellow," he replied, "refused to give me some bread-fruit the other day, and now he comes to take our fish !" The king then ordered him to select two of the finest salmon, and give them cheerfully to the chief. The man grumbled, and, very reluctantly, obeyed the order. Shortly afterwards, Tama toa again called his servant, and said, " You foolish fellow, do you not perceive, that, by this act, the unkindness of that man will he reproved, and that he will be ashamed to refuse you any thing the next time you go t" I immediately turned to the king, and whispered, "Why, you are as wise as Solomon ; for he says, ' If thine enemy be hungry, give him bread to eat; and if he be thirsty, give him water to drink ; for thou shalt heap coals of fire upon his head.' " NATIVE PRAYER— AFFECTING APPEAL. 135 " True," he replied, " that's the way to conquer people." In eloquence they excel. I have not only seen all the passions of the human mind called into exercise, but have myself been so wrought upon by their addresseB, as to forget where I was, and in what I was engaged. Many speci mens have already been given in their speeches ; and the concluding paragraph of the following prayer, which was offered up on the Sabbath prior to our embarkation for England, may be added to them. Having preached to a large congregation, and feeling rather exhausted, I called upon one of the members to engage in prayer, prior to tbe administration of the Lord's Supper ; and being delighted alike with the piety and beauty of his ex pressions, I wrote them down, as soon as the ser vice was concluded. He commenced bysaying, — " Oh God, the high and blessed Jehovah, we praise thee for all the goodness thou hast wrought towards us : and now that we are as sembled round this table, do thou be with us. While we see the bread broken in our presence, may the eye of the heart be looking at the body of the Lord Jesus as broken upon the cross for us ; and when we see the wine poured into the cup, may the ear of the heart be listening to the voice of the Lord Jesus, saying, ' This cup is the new covenant in my blood which was shed for the remission of sins.' Let not what the apostle says be applicable to us ; never may we eat and drink condemnation to ourselves. For bid that we should take nails, and fasten the Lord Jesus again to the cross ; once he has been put to pain for us ; may that suffice ; may we never take the spear of sin, and pierce again his side, thus crucifying him afresh, and putting him to an open shame. In partaking of this sacred feast, may our hearts be warmed, may our love to the Saviour be made greater, and may our faith be made stronger." He then prayed affectionately for his beloved Missionary and his family, and for the church, of which he had been a member twelve years ; and closed with the following beautiful petitions for us, who were to embark for England on the following morning : — " Oh God, tell the winds about them, that they may not blow fiercely upon them ; com mand the ocean concerning them, that it may not swallow them up ; conduct them in safety to their far distant country, and give them a happy meeting with their relatives, and then conduct them back again to us ; but should we never meet again around the table of the Lord below, may we all meet around the throne of glory above." That the natives are anxious to obtain, and quick in receiving instruction, have been abun dantly shown in the preceding narrative. I think it right, however, to remark, that while there is ample evidence of their having possessed good powers of mind, previous to the introduc tion of Christianity, with that period a new era commenced, not only in their moral history, but also in their intellectual. The process of instruction under which they have been brought, the new wants and desires created by the sup ply of knowledge, the excitement produced by a series of discoveries, many of which were so wonderful and sublime that they could not fail both to quicken and enlarge their faculties, and, above all, the elevating power of vital religion, have made them mentally, as well as spiritually, " new creatures in Christ Jesus." This has often appeared, in our evening conversations with the natives ; for the Missionary keeps open house, which, at the close of the day, is often a full house, so many come to ask questions and acquire knowledge ; but still more strikingly in their addresses and sermons. Perhaps no mi nisters, even the most gifted, could select their illustrations or make their quotations with greater judgment and force. In the latter point, I have often been struck with their holy inge nuity ; and perhaps I may be pardoned for giving the following instance of this excellence. A few weeks after I had taken leave of Raitea for England, I had occasion to return to that island ; and a short time subsequent to my arri val, I found that a meeting had been convened which I was requested to attend. I knew not its object, until the king's speaker arose, and told me, that they had met to request me to abandon my intention of visiting England. After many interesting addresses, a chief arose, and with great gravity said, " Mr. Williams, I have been reading to day what Paul wrote to the Philippians, ' I am in a strait between two, having a desire to depart and be with Christ, which is far better ; nevertheless, to abide in the flesh is more needful for you.' Now we all know that you must wish to see your friends, and visit your native country, after so long an absence ; this is very reasonable ; but don't you think, if Paul was willing to stay even out of heaven to do good to Christians on earth, that you ought to forego the pleasure of visiting England to do good to us V' This was a touch ing appeal, and feeling it deeply, I replied by expressing my pleasure at receiving this proof of their affection, and promised, on revisiting Tahiti, to consult Mrs. W., and if we could not remain ourselves, to persuade one of our brother Missionaries to reside with them until our re turn. I had no sooner made this declaration than another arose, and, after thanking me for promising to endeavour to find a substitute, exclaimed, " But although we have ten thou sand instructors in Christ, we have not many fathers, for, in Christ Jesus, you have begotten us through the Gospel." Since the former sheets went to press, I have had an opportunity of conversing with an es teemed brother Missionary, the Rev. W. Med- hurst, who has laboured many years in Java, and he informs me that in the island of Ceram, there is a race of men which, from his descrip tion, I find resembles the negro Polynesians ; that they build canoes by lashing them together as the South Sea Islanders do ; and that they exist as a distinct nation from the Malays, by whom they are caught, and sold as slaves. These facts appear to countenance the hypothe sis I have ventured to suggest. See page 131. 136 THE DIALECTS. CHAPTER XXX. The two Languages of the South Sea Islanders — The eight Dialects ofthe Eastern Polynesians — Comparison of each Dialect with the Tahitian — Tabular view of the Differences between them — Their Precision and Per fection — Nice distinctions in the Pronouns — Causative Verb — Pronunciation — Introduction of New Words — Government— Power of the Chiefs— Punishment of Theft — Wars — Their Frequency — Weapons — Cannibal ism not practised by the Samoans — Amusements. Language. — The language is the next point which claims our attention. That of the Poly nesian negroes differs from the dialects of East ern Polynesia in one remarkable feature : which is, that in the former, many of the words and syllables terminate with a consonant, whereas in the latter, both the one and the other invari ably end with a vowel. Of the first I know but little ; but with the other I am perfectly fami liar, and to it therefore I shall confine my observations. In this language there are eight dialects ; and, for the sake of clearness, I shall select the Tahitian as the standard, and compare the others with it. I do this, however, not because I think it is the original ; for the Hervey Island dialect appears to possess superior claims to that title, as it is so much more extensively spoken, and bears a closer affinity to the other dialects, than the Tahitian ; but because the latter was first reduced to system. The islanders who speak the different dialects of this language are, the Tahitian and Society, the Sandwich, the Marque san, the Austral, the Hervey, the Samoa, the Tongatabuans, and the New Zealanders. The Sandwich Island dialect differs from the Tahitian in the frequent introduction of the k and I, and the rejection off, as in the following words : — good. love. house. Tahitian. maitai aroha fare Hawaiian. maikai alofa fale The Marquesan differs from the Tahitian in admitting the k, and rejecting the r, without supplying its place ; as — Tahitian. maitai aroha fare Marquesan. motaki aofa fae The Austral islanders, including Rurutu, Rai- vavae, Tupuai, and Rimatara Islands, situated about four hundred miles south of Tahiti, have a distinction of their own, but have been taught to use the Tahitian Scriptures, which they read fluently, and understand as well as if written in their own tongue. The peculiarity of this dia lect appears in the rejection of the / and h, without supplying any substitutes ; and, trifling as this may appear, the difference of sound it occasions is amazing. again. Tahitian. maitai aroha fare faahou Austral. maitai aroa are aaou The Hervey Island dialect is spoken, not only throughout that group, but at theManiki group, to which Puna, the native Missionary, was drifted ; and by the Paumotus, even as far up as Gam- bier's Islands. This differs very little from the dialect of New Zealand. The Hervey or Rara- tonga dialect is distinguished from the Tahitian by two peculiarities ; in tbe first place, by the rejection of they and h; and, secondly, by the introduction of the k and nga. There are also two other peculiarities in the Tahitian — a re markable break or separating catch, when two vowels come together, and a hard sound. These are supplied in the Rarotonga by the k axulnga; as, for example, va'a, canoe, becomes in that dialect, vaka; and aro, lost, becomes ngaro. food. Tahitian. maitai aroha fare maa Rarotongan. meitaki aroa are manga. The Samoa dialect differs from the Tahitian in exchanging the r for the I, and the h for the s. It also adopts the nasal sound, and rejects the k. The frequent use of the f, s, and I, renders the Samoa dialect peculiarly soft and melliflu ous ; much more so, indeed, than any other of the dialects. This is the only dialect in which the sibilant is used. The Tongatabu differs from the Tahitian in rejecting the r, and introducing the I and k; and from all the other dialects by the use of the j. In the latter point it becomes somewhat assimilated to the Fiji language. The Tonga dialect is spoken at the Hapai and Vavau groups, and at many of the adjacent islands. The New Zealand is the eighth dialect of this language. In its leading peculiarities it agrees with the Rarotonga; indeed, the only difference is, that the New Zealanders retain the A, which the Raratongans reject. A few words perhaps in each of the dialects will enable the reader to trace their affinity. (See List in following page.) The pronouns in seven of the dialects are the same ; but in that of Tongatabu they differ ma terially from the others, and bear a greater affinity to the Fiji. That a language spoken by savages should be supposed to be defective in many respects, could not create surprise ; but the fact is contrary to all we might have anticipated, that the Polyne sian dialects are remmarkably rich, admit of a great variety of phraseology, abound in turns of peculiar nicety, and are spoken with strict con formity to the most precise grammatical princi ples. Of this I shall furnish a few examples. In the first place, the Polynesians employ three numbers, the singular, the dual, and the plural, with which the inflexions of their verbs agree. singular, dual. plural. To speak parau pararau paraparau To do rave rarave raverave Their pronouns are beautifully complete, having several remarkable and valuable dis tinctions unknown to us. An instance is found in what we may term the inclusive and exclusive pronouns : for example, in English, we say, " It is time for us to go ;" and the expression may or may not include the person addressed. Now, in the Polynesian dialects there are two pro nouns which mark this difference, matou and tatou. Ifthepersonspoken to is one of the party going, the tatou would be used ; if not, the ma- THE DIALECTS— INTRODUCTION OF NEW WORDS. 137 tou. A short time since I was dining at Bath, when the lady of the house desired the servant to bring a plate, and, politely addressing me, said, " Put your bones upon the plate, Sir." Now, common as this expression is, it is cer tainly rather ambiguous. In the language of the Polynesians, however, there would be no such ambiguity, for they have two pronouns to express the difference, tooe and taoe ; the former of which would be used, if my own bones were meant ; and the latter, if those of the pheasant of which I had been partaking. a a ti S a a •3 la "a ...---g a a a'S § a.2 i& a .S a i.SS «-3S|'3-gg|, d o 2 3 c3 rt P- to o'Ed ¦****} ¦d fl.H " ri ea 3 2,-st^? rt « S rt he « S-; 3 "r*1? rf- V rt"? 3 rt a d B|j?-?o;gjJjK ST4 §1 3 3-B „ § ' -* « 073 a rt a) _. d a*f a 3v a cs ia a j2 2.„ ^i'ggslgggl'galbstS-g a-?-1? 5 a - o g.a S«5 o • aarfaiia3.aa